Class 10

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 1.
What do you mean by electric charge?
Answer:
Electric charge:

  • ‘Charge’ or ‘electric charge’ is the fundamental quantity of electricity.
  • Electric charge or simply charge is of two types, (1) Positive (+) charge and (2) negative (-) charge.
  • If electric charge flows through a conductor such as metal wire, we say that there is electric current in the conductor.
  • Equal amount of positive (+ve) charge + Equal amount of negative (-ve) charge = zero (O)
  • The SI. unit of electric charge is columb ‘C’.
  • An electron possesses a ‘negative charge of 1.6 x 10-19 C’ whereas a proton possesses a ‘positive charge of 1.6 x 10-19 C’.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 2.
State the properties of electric charge.
Answer:
(A) Like charges repel each other i.e. when a proton-proton or electron-electron interact, they repel.
(B) Unlike charges attract each other ie. when a proton and an electron interact, they attract each other.

Question 3.
What is a free electron?
Answer:
1. Metals have a property to lose electrons and form positive ions.

2. The outer most electrons move randomly around the nucleus.

3. These electrons work as glue and bind the protons at their place and thus make them immovable.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 2
4. Under normal circumstances, in metallic materials the force of attraction between these outermost electrons (or say valence electrons) and the nucleus (which is positively charged) is quite less.

5. These electrons separate from their parent atom and move randomly.

6. These electrons are known as free (or conducting) electrons and are responsible for conducting electricity or say conduction.

7. Electric current can flow very easily through material which contain a large number of free electrons. Hence such a material is called a conductor. For example, metals such as copper, silver and aluminium are conductors.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 4.
Resolve the mystery behind the conventional current and actual flow of electric current. OR ‘In a circuit diagram, we put arrows on connecting wires pointing from the positive terminal of the cell to the negative terminal of the cell’. Explain. OR Explain conventional current and its flow.
Answer:
1. In the earlier times, when scientists did not have knowledge about electrons, it was thought that electric current was a flow of positive charge. Hence, the direction of flow of positive charges was considered as the direction of electric current. This flow came to be known as ‘conventional current’.

2. Later, negatively charged electrons were discovered and it was fund that electrons were responsible for the flow of electric current.

3. Thus, it was proved that the actual flow of electric charge was not from ‘positive to negative’ but from ‘negative to positive’.

4. However, in practice we still take direction of electric current as ‘positive to negative’ i.e. the path of conventional current. We do this by putting the arrows from positive terminal of batteries to negative terminal.

5. Thus, flow of conventional current (positive to negative) is opposite to the actual direction of flow of electrons (negative to positive).

Question 5.
Define electric current and state and explain its unit.
Answer:
Electric current:
1. The rate of flow of electric charge is known as electric current. In other words, the net quantity of electric charge that flows through any cross-section of a conductor is known as the electric current.
Thus? electric current \(=\frac{\text { Quantity of electric charge }}{\text { Time }}\)

2. Thus, if Q is the amount of electric charge passing through any cross-section of a conductor in time t then, electric current (I) = \(\frac{Q}{t}\)

3. If a quantity of one Coulomb (1Q) electric charge passes through the conductor in 1 second, then we can say that an electric current of one ampere (1A) is flowing through the conductor.

4. SI unit of electric current is Coulomb/second (C/s).

5. Electric current is also measured in Ampere (A), after the French scientist Andre-Marie Ampere.

6. Milliampere (mA) and microampere (.iA) are smaller units to measure electric current.

7. 1 mA = 10-3 A and 1 μA = 10-6 A.

8. An instrument called Ammeter is used to measure the electric current.

Question 6.
What is ampere? Explain.
Answer:
1. Ampere (A) is the main unit in which electric current is measured. The unit is Ampere (A) after the French scientist Andre Ampere.
2. Milliampere (mA) and microampere (pA) are smaller units to measure electric current.
3. 1 mA =10-3 A and 1 μA = 10-6 A.
4. An instrument called Ammeter is used to measure the electric current.
5. Ammeter is ‘connected in series’ in the electric circuit.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 7.
Draw a schematic diagram of an electric circuit and explain it.
Answer:
1. The figure shown here is a basic electric circuit. It comprises of a cell, an electric bulb, an ammeter (connected in series) and a key or say switch to control the circuit.

2. When key (switch) is turned on, the electric current starts flowing from positive terminal of the cell to the negative terminal, through the bulb and the ammeter.

3. The bulb will glow and ammeter will show a reading which ascertains flow of electric current in the circuit.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 1

Question 8.
Define electric circuit and switch.
(a) Electric circuit:
A continuous and closed path along which electric current flows is called an electric circuit.

(b) Switch:
A switch is a component that provides a connecting link between the cell i.e. battery and other electrical components of electric circuit.

Question 9.
State the relationship between 1 ampere and 1 coulomb.
Answer:
If 1 coulomb charge passes through the conductor in 1 second, then we say that electric current of 1 ampere is flowing through the conductor.
1 ampere = \(\frac{1 \text { Coulomb }}{1 \text { Second }}\)
∴ \(1 A=\frac{1 C}{1 s}=1 \mathrm{Cs}^{-1}\)

Question 10.
State and explain the relation between quantity of charge and number of electrons flowing through a conductor.
Answer:
1. If the number of electrons passing through the cross-section of conductor in time ‘t’ equals to ‘n’, then the quantity of charge passing through the cross-section will be Q = ne.

2. In this sense, equation \(I=\frac{Q}{t}\) can be represented as \(I=\frac{n e}{t}\),
where e = 1.6 x 10-9 C charge of electron.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 11.
How many electrons will be required to produce 1 Ampere electric current in a conductor?
Answer:
1. If 1 coulomb electric charge i.e. Q passes through a conductor in 1 second, then 1 Ampere electric current will flow through the conductor.

2. Now, current I = 1A, charge Q = 1C and time t = 1s

3. We know that Q = ne (where e = 1.6 x 10-19 C)
Also we know that I\(=\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{n e}{t}\)
∴ No.of electrons \(\mathrm{n}=\frac{\mathrm{l} . t}{\mathrm{e}}=\frac{1 \times 1}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 6.25 x 1018

4. Thus, 6.25 x 1018 electrons will be required to produce 1 Ampere electric current in a conductor.

Question 12.
A current of 0.5 A is drawn by a filament of an electric bulb for 10 minutes. Find the amount of electric charge that flows through the circuit.
Answer:
We are given, I = 0.5 A, t = 10 min = 600 s.
Now, Q = It = 0.5 A x 600 s= 300 C

Question 13.
While connecting a torch with battery, an electric current of 64 mA flows through the bulb. If this torch glows for 10 mm, how many electrons will pass through the bulb? (charge of electron =e = 1.6 x 10-19 C)
Answer:
I = 64 mA = 64 x 10-3A,t = 10min = 10 x 60
=600s, e=1.6 x 10-19 C
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 3
= 24000 x 1016
n = 24 x 1019 electrons

Question 14.
1800 C electric charge is passing through an electric bulb in one hour. How much current will pass through the electric bulb?
Answer:
Q = 1800 C, time t = 1 hr = 3600s
Electric current \(I=\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{1800}{3600}=0.5\) current will pass through the electric bulb.

Question 15.
Give a general idea of electric potential and electrical potential difference.
Answer:
1. As shown in the figure, pour larger quantity of water in vessel A and lesser quantity of water in vessel B. Connect these two vessels with a tube.

2. Vessel A contains more water than vessel B and so water in vessel A will have higher pressure.

3. Hence, water will flow from vessel A to vessel B. In other words, water flows through the tube due to ‘water pressure difference’ or say ‘water potential difference’.

4. Similarly, if an ‘electric potential difference’ is created between two points, then the electric current can also be made to flow from one point to another.

5. The difference in electric potential that exists between the two points is known as electric potential difference.

Electric potential:

  • When you bring some electric charge near another charge, the former charge may experience a force of attraction or repulsion. So, work has to be done to move it against the force of repulsion or towards the force of attraction.
  • In other words, in order to maintain equilibrium between these two charges, some work has to be done.
  • This work is stored in the form of potential energy.
  • The work done on the charge is called electric potential.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 16.
What is electric potential difference? Explain the unit used for measuring potential difference.
Answer:
(a) Electric potential difference:
The amount of work done to take a unit positive charge from a given point say A to point B in a circuit carrying some current is known as the electrical potential difference between the two points.
→ Thus, electric potential difference \((V)=\frac{\text { Work done }(W)}{\text { Electric charge }(Q)}\)
\( \quad V=\frac{W}{Q}\)

(b) Voltage:
(1) In practice, electric potential difference is known as voltage. Its SI unit is joule/coulomb or volt (V).
(2) If the work done to bring 1-coulomb electric charge from one point to another is 1 joule, then the potential difference between these two points is called 1 volt. (V)
Thus, 1 volt \(=\frac{1 \text { joule }}{1 \text { Coulomb }}\) \(1 \mathrm{~V}=1 \mathrm{JC}^{-1}\)
(3) Electric potential difference (V) is measured with a device called voltmeter.
(4) The voltmeter is connected in parallel across the two points of which the potential difference is measured.

Question 17.
Define electric potential and state its unit.
Answer:
Electric potential difference:
The amount of work done to take a unit positive charge from a given point say A to point B in a circuit carrying some current is known as the electrical potential difference between the two points.
→ Thus, electric potential difference \((V)=\frac{\text { Work done }(W)}{\text { Electric charge }(Q)} \)
\(\quad V=\frac{W}{Q}\)

Question 18.
Define 1 volt and state its unit. OR what is voltmeter? How is It connected in an electric circuit?
Answer:
Voltage:
(1) In practice, electric potential difference is known as voltage. Its SI unit is joule/coulomb or volt (V).

(2) If the work done to bring 1-coulomb electric charge from one point to another is 1 joule, then the potential difference between these two points is called 1 volt. (V)
Thus, 1 volt \(=\frac{1 \text { joule }}{1 \text { Coulomb }}\) \(1 \mathrm{~V}=1 \mathrm{JC}^{-1}\)

(3) Electric potential difference (V) is measured with a device called voltmeter.

(4) The voltmeter is connected in parallel across the two points of which the potential difference is measured.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 19.
Name the device used to measure electric potential difference and state how it is connected in an electric circuit.
Answer:
Voltmeter:
1. The device used to measure potential difference between any two points of a circuit is called voltmeter (Volt + meter).
2. Voltmeter is connected in a parallel connection.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 4

Question 20.
List two differences between voltmeter and ammeter.
Answer:

VoltmeterAmmeter
1. It measures potential difference between two points in a circuit.1. It measures potential difference between two points in a circuit.
2. It is connected in parallel with the component across which potential difference is to be measured.2. It is connected in parallel with the component across which potential difference is to be measured.
1 Volt = \(\frac{1 \text { joule }}{1 \text { coulomb }}\)1 ammeter =\(\frac{1 \text { coulomb }}{1 \text { second }}\)

Question 21.
How much work Is done in moving a charge of 2 C across two points having a potential difference 12 V?
Answer:
The amount of charge Q, that flows between two points at potential difference V (= 12 V) is 2 C.
Thus, the amount of work W, done in moving the charge is W = VQ = 12 V x 2C = 24J.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 22.
How much work is to be done to take 2 C electric charge from the potential of 6 V to the potential of 12 V?
Q=2C
Electric potential difference V = 12V – 6V = 6V
Now \(V=\frac{W}{Q}\)
∴ Work W = VQ = 6 x 2 = 12J

Symbols of some commonly used components in circuit diagrams

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 6

Question 23.
Perform an activity to verify Ohm’s law
Answer:
Aim: Verification of Ohm’s law
Apparatus and material : 0.5 meter long nichrome wire (or an electric bulb), batteries of 1.5 V, voltmeter, ammeter and key.

Procedure:

1. Prepare an electric circuit by connecting XV nichrome wire (or an electric bulb) as resistance first with one 1.5 V battery, ammeter and a key.
2. Then connect voltmeter between two ends of wire as shown.
3. When you switch on the key, the electric current will flow through the circuit.
4. Measure the current (I) in ammeter and potential difference (V) in the voltmeter.
5. Similarly, connect two, three and finally four batteries in the circuit and each time measure the values of current I and voltage V.
6. Record all the values of I and V in the table.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 7

Observation table:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 8

Plot values of V and I on the graph.

Conclusion:

  1. On plotting these values we observe that the graph is a straight line passing through the origin.
  2. As you increase the number of batteries, the electric current in the conductor increases in a constant proportion with the increase in voltage V.
  3. The ratio of V and I i.e. VII always remains constant.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 9

Question 24.
State Ohm’s law and explain its unit.
Answer:
Ohm’s law:
1. In a definite physical situation, the electric current (I) flowing through the conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference (V) applied across it, provided its temperature and other physical conditions remain same.

2. Thus, I α V or say V α I.
∴ V = I R (where, R is the proportionality by constant and it represents resistance R of the circuit)
V/I = Constant Also, Resistance \((\mathrm{R})=\frac{\text { Voltage }(\mathrm{V})}{\text { Electric current }(\mathrm{l})}\)

3. The SI unit of resistance is volt/ampere which is called ohm and it is denoted by Ω (Omega).
∴ 1 ohm \((\Omega)=\frac{1 \text { volt }(V)}{1 \text { ampere }(i)}\)

4. When 1 volt potential difference (V) is applied across the conductor and 1 ampere (I) current flows through it, then resistance of the conductor is said to be 12.

5. The symbol HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 10represents resistance R in the circuit.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 25.
Discuss the factors on which strength of electric current ¡n a given conductor depends. OR How can you say that the current flowing in a circuit is strong or weak? Discuss.
Answer:
Ohms law says, current \((\mathrm{I})=\frac{\mathrm{V} \text { (Potential difference) }}{\mathrm{R} \text { (Resistance) }}\)

From this relation we draw two conclusions. They are –
(i) I α V (if R = constant) (ii) I α\(\frac{1}{R}\)(if V = constant)

From 1st:
1. Since, current (I) is directly proportional to potential difference V, if value of V is doubled, the current (I) flowing through it will also get doubled.
2. If V is halved, the current will also get halved,

From 2nd:
1. Current (I) is inversely proportional to resistance (R). So, if the value of resistance is doubled, the current (I) flowing will get halved.
2. If resistance is halved, the current (I) will get doubled.

Conclusion:
The strength of electric current in a given conductor depends on —
(i) Potential difference (V) across the ends of the conductor (ii) Resistance (R) of the conductor

Question 26.
Define resistance and variable resistance and bring out the difference between resistance and resistor
Answer:
(a) Resistance:
1. Resistance refers to the property of the conductor by virtue of which it opposes the flow of current through it.

2. Resistance is equal to the ratio of potential difference applied across the conductor to the current flowing through it.
Thus, Resistance \((\mathrm{R})=\frac{\text { Potentialdifference }(\mathrm{V})}{\text { Current }(\mathrm{l})} \quad\)
∴ \(\mathrm{R}=\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{l}}\)

(b) Vanable resistance:
1. A component used for regulating (i.e. increasing or decreasing) the current without changing the voltage source is called a variable resistor and the concept is called variable resistance.

2. In other words, variable resistance allows us to adjust the resistance between two points in a circuit. Rheostat is one such device that helps to change resistance in the circuit. Thus, resistor creates resistance.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 27.
Explain the cause of resistance in conductors and insulators.
Answer:
1. Flow of free electrons In a fixed direction results in flow of electric current in a conductor.
2. These freely moving electrons collide with atoms or molecules of conductor. This retards their motion.
3. Motion of electrons means that the electric current gets opposed. This is called resistance (R) of the conductor.
4. Metals such as aluminum, steel, copper, etc. have a large number of free electrons and so they offer low resistance to the flow of electric current. Metals are good conductors.
5. Insulators such as wood, plastic, rubber, etc. do not have free electrons. Hence, no current flows through them. So, their resistance is very high. Insulators are poor conductors.

Question 28.
Define resistance (resistivity) of a substance and explain its unit.
Answer:
1. The resistance (R) of a conductor is directly proportional to the length of the conductor and inversely proportional to the area of its cross-section.

2.  Let the length of the conductor be I and its cross-sectional area be A, then,
Resistance R α length l arid also R α \(\frac{1}{A}\)
∴ \(R \alpha \frac{I}{A}=\rho \frac{I}{A}\) = (where ρ (rho) is constant and called the resistivity of conducting material.)

3. We can also say, ρ = \(R \frac{A}{l}\)

4. The S.l unit of resistivity \(\rho=\frac{\text { Unit of resistance } x \text { Unit of area }}{\text { Unit of length }}=\frac{\Omega \mathrm{xm}^2}{\mathrm{~m}}=\Omega \mathrm{m} \text { (Ohm meter) }\)

Question 29.
List the factors on which the resistance of a conductor depends. Write the formula showing relation of resistance with these factors.
Answer:
At constant temperature, the resistance of a conductor depends on the following factors:
(i) Length: Resistance R of a conductor is directly proportional to its length L i.e. R α L
(ii) Area of cross-section: Resistance R of a conductor is inversely proportional to the area of cross-section A i.e, \(R \propto \frac{1}{A}\)
(iii) Nature of material: Resistance depends on the nature of material. For example, resistance of copper wire is quite less as compared to nichrome wire.

Combining all these factors we get —
R α \(\frac{L}{A}\)  or say R = ρ\(\frac{L}{A}\) (Where p is the proportionality constant and is called ‘resistivity’ or ‘specific resistance’ which depends on the nature of the material.)

Question 30.
Classify solids on the basis of their resistivity values.
Answer:
On the basis of resistivity values, we can classify solids as:
(i) Conductors (metals and alloys):

  • Metals and their alloys have very low resistivity in the range of 10-8 to 10-6 Ω m.
  • These are known as good conductors of electricity.
  • Copper, aluminium, iron, etc. are metals. Nichrome, constantan, manganin, etc. are metallic alloys.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

(ii) Insulators:

  • Insulators are substances that have very large resistivity. They have resistivity of more than 1 m. Insulators such as glass, hard rubber, etc. have very high resistivity range of 1012 to 1017 Ωm.

Electrical resistivity of some substances at 200 C. (For information only)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 11
You need not memorize these values. You can use these values for solving numerical problems.

Question 31.
Differentiate between Conductors and Insulators.
Answer:

ConductorsInsulators
Conductors contain large number of free electrons.Insulators do not contain free electrons
Conductors can conduct electricity.Insulator cannot conduct electricity.
Metallic elements like silver, aluminium, copper etc. are conductors.Rubber, plastic, etc. are insulators.

Question 32.
(a) How much current will an electric bulb draw from a 220 V source, If the resistance of the bulb filament is 1200 Ω? (b) How much current will an electric heater coil draw from a 220 V source, If the resistance of the heater coil is 100 Ω? (Text book example 12.3)
Answer:
(a) We are given V = 220 V; R = 1200Ω We have current I = 220 V/1200 Ω = 0.18 A.
(b) We are given, V = 220 V, R = 100Ω. We have current I = 220 V/100 Ω = 2.2 A.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 33.
The potential difference between the terminals of an electric heater is 60 V when it draws a current of 4 A from the source. What current will the heater draw If the potential difference is increased to 120 V? (Text book example 12.4)
Answer:
We are given, potential difference V = 60 V, current I = 4 A.
According to Ohm’s law, \(R=\frac{V}{l}=\frac{60 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{~A}}=15 \Omega\)
When the potential difference is increased to 120 V the current is given by —
current = \(\frac{V}{R}=\frac{120 V}{15 \Omega}=8 A\)
The current through the heater becomes 8 A.

Question 34.
Resistance of a metal wire of length 1 m is 26Ω at 20°C. lithe diameter of the wire is 0.3 mm, what will be the resistivity of the metal at that temperature? Using Table 12.2, predict the material of the wire. (Text book example 12.5)
Answer:
We are given the resistance R of the wire = 26Ω, diameter = 0.3 mm = 3 x 10 m, and the length I of the wire = 1m.
Therefore, the resistivity of the given metallic wire is ρ= (RA/I) = (Rπd2/4l)
Substitution of values in this gives ρ = 1.84 x 10-6 Ωm
The resistivity of the metal at 20°C is 1.84 x 10-6 Ωm.

We are given, potential difference V = 60 V, current I = 4 A.
According to Ohm’s law, \(R=\frac{V}{l}=\frac{60 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{~A}}=15 \Omega\)
When the potential difference is increased to 120 V the current is given by —
current = \(\frac{V}{R}=\frac{120 V}{15 \Omega}=8 A\)
The current through the heater becomes 8 A.

Question 35.
A wire of given material having length I and area of cross-section A has a resistance of 4 ? What would be the resistance of another wire of the same material having length 1/2 and area of cross-section 2A? (Text book example 12.6)
Answer:
For first wire
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 12
The resistance of the new wire is 1Ω.

Question 36.
If an electric bulb connected to 220 V line draws an electric current of 0.5 A, then what will be the resistance of the filament of the bulb?
Answer:
I = 0.5A,V=220V
According to Ohm’s law, \(R=\frac{V}{l}=\frac{220}{0.5}=440 \Omega\)

Question 37.
The resistance of a resistive wire having length l and area of cross-section A is 4Ω. If the length of same type of wire is 1/2 and the area of cross-section 2A, what will be the resistance of wire?
Answer:
For the first wire \(R=\rho \frac{l}{A}\)-, for the second wire,\(\mathrm{R}^{\prime}=\rho^{\prime} \frac{I^{\prime}}{\mathrm{A}^{\prime}}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 38.
There are more than one ways of combining resistors in a circuit. Explain them very briefly.
OR Why does the need of combining resistors in more than one way arises in a circuit?
Answer:
1. Apart from potential difference, current in circuit also depends on resistance R.

2. All electrical circuits do not require the same amount of resistance.

3. In order to obtain the desired resistance, resistors need to be connected in two different ways.
They are: Connecting resistors in (A) series and in (B) parallel.

4. If we want to increase total resistance, then we need to connect the resistors in series and if we want to decrease the resistance, we need to connect individual resistors in parallel.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 13

Question 39.
With the help of suitable diagrams state the two methods of connecting resistors in a circuit. There are two methods of joining the resistors. They are:

(1) Joining resistors In a series connection:

  • When two or more resistors are connected end-to-end consecutively, such a connection is called a series connection.
  • As shown in the figure, three resistors R1, R2 and R3 are connected end-to-end.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 14

(2) Joining resistors in a parallel connection:

  • When two or more resistors are connected between the same two points of a circuit, they are said to be connected in a parallel connection (because they are connected in parallel and not end-to-end).
  • The diagram here shows resistors R1, R2 and R3 connected in parallel between the two points A and B.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 15

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 40.
Explain the series connection of resistors and derive the formula of equivalent resistance.
Answer:
Series connection of resistors:
1. When two or more resistors are connected end-to-end consecutively such a connection is called a series A connection.

2. As shown in figure, consider three resistances R1, R2 and R3 connected in senes. Suppose a current I flows through the circuit when a cell of voltage V is connected across the combination.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 16
By Ohm’s law, the potential differences across the three resistances will be,
V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2, V3 = IR3,

If R be the equivalent resistance of the senes combination, then on applying a potential difference V across it, the same current I must flow through it. Therefore,
V = IR
But V=V1 + V2 +V2
∴ IRS = IR1 + IR2 + IR2 OR Rs = R1 + R2 + R3

Question 41.
State the characteristics of series connection of resistors.
Answer:
1. In series connection of resistors, the current (I) flowing through each resistance is same.
2. The total voltage drop across all the resistances connected in series equals to the sum of voltage drop across each resistance Le. V = V1 + V2 + …………………………. + Vn.
3. The equivalent resistance of resistors connected in series is equal to the algebraic sum of all resistors.
4. The magnitude of equivalent resistance i.e. R is always larger than the largest resistance of the circuit. In other words, equivalent resistance R is larger than any other resistance of the circuit.

Question 42.
An electric lamp, whose resistance is 20Ω and a conductor of 4Ω resistance are connected to a 6 V battery (as shown In figure). Calculate (a) the total resistance of the circuit, (b) the current through the circuit, and (c) the potential difference across the electric lamp and conductor.
Answer:

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 41
The resistance of electric lamp, R1 = 20Ω
The resistance of the conductor connected in series, R2 = 4Ω
Then the total resistance in the circuit
R =R1 + R2
Rs =20Ω + 4Ω=24Ω
The total potential difference across the two terminals of the battery
V = 6V.
Now by Ohm’s law, the current through the circuit is given by
I =V/Rs=6V/24.Ω = 0.25A.
Applying Ohm’s law to the electric lamp and conductor separately, we get potential difference across the electric lamp,
V1 =20Ω 2 x 0.25A = 5V;
Potential difference across the conductor, V2 = 4Ω x 0.25 A = 1 V.
Suppose we replace the series combination of electric lamp and conductor by a single and equivalent resistor. Its resistance must be such that a potential difference of 6 V across the battery terminals will cause a current of 0.25 A in the circuit. The resistance R of this equivalent resistor would be
R =V/l = 6V/0.25A = 24Ω
This is the total resistance of the series circuit. It is equal to the sum of the two resistances.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 43.
In order to get the current 0.5 A in the circuit by connecting a bulb of resistance 20Ω with 12 V battery, how much should be the value of resistance connected in series? What will be the voltage drop across the bulb?
Answer:
If the resistance connected in series with bulb is R1 and resistance of bulb is R2 then the circuit will be as shown in the figure here.
V=12 V, l=0.5A, R2=20Ω, R1=?

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 18
Using Ohm’s law,
Here, bulb and R1 are in series,\(R=\frac{V}{J}=\frac{12}{0.5}=24 \Omega\)
therefore equivalent resistance
R=R1+R2 ……………………… (1)
Substituting the value of R and R2 in equation (1)
24=20+R2
∴ R2 = 24 – 20 = 4Ω
The voltage drop across the bulb, V2 = IR2 = (0.5) (4) = 2 V

Question 44.
When an electric heater is given a voltage 120 V, an electric current of 2 A passes through It. If the heater is given a voltage of 240 V, how much electric current will flow through it? What will be the resistance of the coil of the heater?
V1 = 120V, I1 = 2A, V2 = 240V, I1 =?
Answer:
Resistance of heater coil \(R=\frac{V_1}{L_1}=\frac{120}{2}=60 \Omega\)
Now, according to Ohms’ law,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 17

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 45.
Define parallel connection of resistances and derive the resistance equation for equivalent resistance.
Answer:
1. When two or more resistances are connected between the same two points of a circuit, the resistances are said to be connected in parallel.

2. As shown in figure, consider three resistances R1, R2 and R3 connected in parallel. Suppose a current I flows through the circuit when a cell of voltage V is connected across the combination.

3. The current I at point A is divided into three parts l1, l2 and l3 through the resistances R1, R2 and R3 respectively.
These three parts recombine at point B to give the same current I. Total current flowing in the circuit,
l=l1+ l2 + l3
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 31

As all the three resistances have been connected between the same two points A and B, so voltage V across each of them is same. By Ohm’s law,
\(I 1=\frac{V}{R_1}, \quad 12=\frac{V}{R_2}, \quad I 3=\frac{V}{R_3}\)

If Rp be the equivalent resistance of the parallel combination, then,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 20

Question 46.
State the characteristics of parallel connection of resistors.
Answer:
1. The sum of the current flowing through each resistor equals to total current flowing ¡n the circuit
i.e. l=l1+ l2 + …………………. +ln
2. The voltage drop across each resistor remains the same.
3. The magnitude of equivalent resistance i.e. R is always smaller than the smallest resistance.
4. The reciprocal of equivalent resistance R is equal to the sum of reciprocal of individual resistors
i.e \(\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{R_1}+\frac{1}{R_2}+\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots+\frac{1}{R_n}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 47.
In the circuit diagram given in figure  suppose the resistors R1, R2 and R3 have the values 5Ω, 10Ω, 30Ω, respectively, which have been connected to a battery of 12 V. Calculate (a) the current through each resistor, (b) the total current In the circuit, and (c) the total circuit resistance. (Textbook Example – 12.8)
Answer:
R1=5Ω, R2=10Ω and R3=30Ω
Potential difference across the battery, V = 12 V.
This is also the potential difference across each of the individual resistor; therefore, to calculate
the current in the resistors, we use Ohm’s law.
The current l., through R1 = V/R1
l1 =12 V/5Ω = 2.4 A.
The current 12, through R1 = V/R1
I2 =12 V/10Ω = 1.2 A.
The current I3, through R3 = V/R3
I3 =12 V/30Ω = 0.4A.
The total current in the circuit,
I =I1 +I2+I3=(2.4+1.2+0.4)A = 4A
The total resistance is given by
\(\frac{1}{R_p}=\frac{1}{5}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{30}=\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus, RP = 3Ω.

Question 48.
lf in given figure R1=10Ω, R2=40Ω, R3=30Ω, R4=20Ω, R5=60Ω, and a 12V battery is connected to the arrangement. Calculate (a) the total resistance In the circuit, and (b) the total current flowing in the circuit. (Textbook Example 12.9)
Answer:
Suppose we replace the parallel resistors R1 and R2 by an equivalent resistor of resistance, R’. Similarly we replace the
parallel resistors R3, R4 and R5 by an equivalent single resistor of resistance R1. Then, we have
1/R’ = 1/10 + 1/40 = 5/40; that is R’ = 8Ω.
Similarly,
1/ R” = 1/30 + 1/20 + 1/60 = 6/60; that is, R” = 10 Ω.
Thus, the total resistance,
R= R’+ R”= 18Ω
To calculate the current, we use Ohm’s law, and get
I =V/R= 12V/18Ω = 0.67A.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 49.
Three resistors are connected In parallel with the 30 V battery. The electric current of 7.5 A flows through circuit from battery. If the values of two resistors are 10 Ω and 12 Ω, determine the value of the third resistor.
Answer:
V = 30 V, 1= 7.5 A, R1= 10Ω, R2 = 12Ω, R3 = ?
The equivalent resistance of circuit R =\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{l}}=\frac{30}{7.5}!\) = 4Ω
Now, R1, R2 and R3 are connected in parallel.
∴ R3 = 15Ω
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 22

Question 50.
Find the electric current ¡n the following circuit:
Answer:
(A) Here, resistance R1 is connected in parallel where as R2 and R3 are connected in series
Equivalent resistance of R2 and R3 is, R’ = R2 + R3 = 30 + 30 = 60Ω
Now R1 and R’ are connected in parallel and so their equivalent resistance is, \(\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{R_1}+\frac{1}{R^{\prime}}\)
∴ \(R=\frac{R_1 \times R^{\prime}}{R_1+R^{\prime}}=\frac{30 \times 60}{30+60}=\frac{1800}{90}=20 \Omega\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 23

(B) Total current flowing in the circuit \(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{2}{20}=0.1 \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 51.
State advantages and disadvantages of a series connection.
Answer:
Advantages of series connection:

  • Series connection of resistors helps to control the current in the circuit.
  • The fuse is connected in series with AC mains as well as with the electrical appliance. Thus, when a short circuit occurs in any electrical appliance, the fuse wire melts and stops electric current. Thus, senes connection prevents damage to electrical appliances.

Disadvantages of series connection:

  • In series connection, the voltage gets divided. Due to this, the appliances give less output.
  • If fault occurs in one appliance or at one part of the circuit, the current stops flowing in the entire circuit and other appliances also stop working.

Question 52.
State advantages and disadvantages of a parallel connection.
Answer:
Advantages of parallel connection:

  • Voltage drop does not occur in parallel connection. As a result, appliances operate with full efficiency.
  • If more than one appliances are connected in parallel and if an appliance stops working, even then the circuit will not break, and the other appliances will keep on working efficiently.
  • The equivalent resistance in the parallel connection of resistor decreases, hence more current can be obtained.

Disadvantages of a parallel connection:

  • In parallel connection, total resistance R of the circuit decreases, so total current increases. Hence, the current flow cannot be controlled.
  • Bulbs having different voltages lets say 220 V, and 240 V, when connect in parallel and given voltage lets say 220 V, then only that bulb which has voltage rating of 220 V will light up with full efficiency.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 53.
Differentiate between series connection of resistors and parallel connection of resistors.
Answer:

Series ConnectionParallel Connection
When two or more resistors are connected end to end consecutively, such a connection is called a series connection.When two or more resistances are connected between the same two points, they are said to be connected in parallel (because they become parallel to each other).
In series connection, the resistors are connected across two points say A and B of the circuit in such a way that equal amount of current flows through each resistor and the current flows in only one path.In parallel connection, the resistors are connected across two points say A and B of the circuit in such a way that equal amount of voltage drops across two ends of each resistor and the current flows in more than one path.
In this connection, equal amount of current (I) flows through each resistors but voltage (V) of the battery gets divided among the three resistors.In parallel connection, voltage drop (V) across two ends of each resistor remains same but the current (I) that flows in the circuit gets divided into three parts at point A.
Here, equivalent resistance R = R1+R2+R3Here, equivalent resistance \(\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{R_1}+\frac{1}{R_2}+\frac{1}{R_3}\)
The magnitude of equivalent resistance R is always larger than the largest resistance of the circuit.The magnitude of equivalent resistance l is always smaller than the smallest resistance.

Question 54.
Differentiate between resistance and resistivity.
Answer:

ResistanceResistivity
Resistance is the ratio of the voltage applied between the two ends of a conductor to the electric current flowing through the conductor.
Thus, R=\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{l}}\)
Resistivity of a substance is the resistance offered by a conducting wire of unit length and unit cross-section area. Thus, \(\left(\rho=\frac{R \cdot A}{I}\right)\)
Resistance depends on various factors such as type of substance, temperature, pressure, cross-section area, etc.It depends on type of substance, temperature of the conductor and pressure exerted on conductor.
Its SI unit is OhmΩIts SI unit is ohm-meter Ωm.

Question 55.
What is heating effect of electric current?
Answer:
1. When electric current is passed through a high resistance wire, the resistance wire becomes hot and produces heat.
2. Here, electrical energy ¡s converted into heat energy which is known as the heating effect of electric current.
3. The heat produced in an electrical appliance depends on electric current and resistance.

Question 56.
Explain electrical energy and derive its formula. OR Obtain the equation of heat energy for current flowing through a resistor for a specific time period.
Answer:
1. Suppose electric current is flowing through some resistor (R).
2. This results in continuous production of electric charges (Q).
3. The work done (W) by the battery of voit (V) for keeping the electric charges (Q) in continuous flow is,
W = V x Q
∴ W = V x I x t ( ∵ Q = I x t as per the definition of electric current)
Also, as per Ohm’s law, V = I. R
∴ W = l.R x lt = I2Rt
4. Thus, current flowing through a resistor R for time t is I.
5. W is the electrical energy consumed when current I flows through a resistor R in the circuit for time t.
6. This electrical energy gets converted into heat energy.
Thus, heat energy (H) = I2 Rt
7. This equation is also called Joule’s law of heating.
8. The SI unit of electrical energy (W) or say heat energy (H) is joule (J).
9. The other units are Watt second (Ws) as well as Kilowatt – hour (kWh) or simply unit.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 57.
100 J of heat is produced each second in a 4Ω resistance. Find the potential difference across the resistor.
Answer:
H=100J, R=4Ω, t=1 s, V=?
We have the current through the resistor as
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 24
Thus the potential difference across the resistor, V is
V =IR
=5A x 4Ω
= 20V.

Question 58.
5A current flows through an electric Iron. If the resistance of electric iron is 44Ω then how much energy will be consumed in 5 minutes?
Answer:
l = 5A; R = 44Ω,t = 5min =5 x 60 = 300s.
Electricalenergy w = l2Rt
= (5)2(44) (300) = 330000 = x 105 J

Question 59.
Discuss some practical applications of heating effect of electric current.
Answer:
Practical (daily life) applications of heating effect of electric current:
(i) Household heating appliances: Electric iron, toaster, sandwich maker, room heater, electric kettle, etc. ail such appliances make use of heating effect of electric current.

(ii) Electric bulbs: When electricity s passed through the filament of the electric bulbs, the bulbs light up. Here, heating effect is used for emitting light.

(iii) Electric fuse: Electric fuse is a safety device which works on the heating effect of electric current.

Question 60.
How is the heating effect of electric current used to light an electric bulb? Explain.
Answer:
1. The incandescent lamp or electric bulb is a glass which is filled with inactive nitrogen and argon gas.
2. A strong metal such as tungsten which has a very high melting point of 33800 C is used for making the filaments of these bulbs.
3. On passing electric current the filament becomes hot and emits light.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 61.
What is a fuse? How does the heating effect of electric current works on fuse? OR How does the fuse work?
Answer:
Fuse:

  • A fuse is a safety device which works on the heating effect of electric current. It is connected in series with the device.
  • It consists of a piece of wire made of metal or alloy having appropriate melting point.
  • If the current larger than the specified amount flows through the circuit, the fuse wire becomes hot. This melts the fuse wire and the circuit gets broken. The connected device does not get electric supply and so it gets safeguarded against over-supply of electricity.
  • Fuse for domestic purposes have rating of lA, 2A, 3A, 5A, 10A, etc.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 25

Question 62.
Define electric power and state and explain its unit.
Answer:
Electric power:
1. The electrical energy consumed (or heat energy generated) in unit time ¡s called electric power.
2. In other words, electric power is the rate of electric energy.
3. It is denoted by R
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 26
4. The SI unit of power is joule/second or watt (W).

1 Unit power:

  • If 1A current flows through the circuit through a battery of 1V, the power consumed will be 1 W.
  • We have, P = IV
    ∴ 1 watt = 1 voIt x 1 ampere = 1 VA

Question 63.
Explain the practical unit of electrical energy. What do you mean by 1 unit power?
Answer:
1. \(\text { Power } P=\frac{\text { electric energy }(\mathrm{W})}{\text { time.(t) }}\)
∴ Electrical energy (W) = Power (P) x time (t) watt x second = joule
2. Thus, the unit of electrical energy is watt. second.
3. The larger unit of electrical energy is kWh.
1 kWh = 1000 watt x 3600 seconds
= 3.6 x 106 watt.seconds
= 3.6 x 106 joules (J)
4. kWh is a practical unit of energy which is used in every day life.
5. It is also called a ‘unit’.
6. Thus, 1 unit 1kWh = 3.6 x 106 joules.
7. When a 1000 W bulb is on for 1 hour, the energy consumed is equal to 1 unit.

Question 64.
An electric iron consumes energy at a rate of 840 W when heating is at the maximum rate and 360 W when the heating is at the minimum. The voltage is 220 V. What are the current and the resistance in each case?
Answer:
We know that the power input is P = Vl
Thus, the current I = P/v
(a) When heating is at the maximum rate,
I = 840 W/220 V = 3.82 A; and the resistance of the electric iron is R = V/I = 220 V/3.82 A = 57.60 .

(b) When heating is at the minimum rate,
1= 360 W/220 V= 164 A; and the resistance of the electric iron is
R= V/l= 220 V/1 .64 A= 134.15Ω

Question 65.
An electric bulb is connected to a 220 V generator. The current is 0.50 A. What is the power of the bulb?
Answer:
P =Vl=220V x 0.50A=110 J/S=110 W.

Question 66.
An electric refrigerator rated 400 W operates 8 hour/day. What is the cost of the energy to operate it for 30 days at Rs 3.00 per kWh?
Answer:
The total energy consumed by the refrigerator in 30 days would be
400 W x 8.0 hour/day x 30 days = 96000 Wh = 96 kWh
Thus the cost of energy to operate the refrigerator for 30 days is
96 kWh x ₹ 3.00 per kWh = ₹ 288.00

Question 67.
In a house, if three bulbs of 100 W, 60 W and 30 W are used 2 hours per day, how many units of electrical energy will be consumed in 30 days?
Answer:
Energy consumed per sec P = 100 W + 60 W + 40 W= \(\frac{100}{200}\) W = kWh
P = 0.2 kWh
∴ Energy consumed per day = P x t = 0.2 kWh x 2 = 0.4 kWh
∴ Energy consumed in 30 days = 0.4 x 30 = 12 kWh
Now 1 unit = 1 kWh
∴ Energy consumed in 30 days = 12 units

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 68.
For the circuit shown in figure below, determine the equivalent resistance between A and B. Also find the current flowing from the battery.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 27
Answer:
As shown in the figure (part-a), R2 and R3 are connected in series. Their equivalent resistance
R’ =R2+R3=5+5=10Ω
Now R’ is parallel with R4 (Figure Part b) equivalent resistance,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 29
Now R” and R1 are connected in series (Figure Part c). equivalent resistor across A and B,

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 28
∴ R =R”+R1
= 5+5
= 10Ω
The current flowing from the battery,
\(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{10 V}{10 \Omega}=1 \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 69.
As shown in the figure the resistance are connected with a 12 V battery. Determine (a) Equivalent circuit resistance (b) Current flowing through the circuit.
(A) To determine equivalent resistance of the circuit, we fill first obtain :
(i) Equivalent resistance of R1 and R2 which are connected in parallel and
(ii) Equivalent resistance of R3, R4 and R5
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 30
(ii) Equivalent resistance of R3, R4 and R5
\(\frac{1}{R^{\prime \prime}}=\frac{1}{R_3}+\frac{1}{R_4}+\frac{1}{R_5}=\frac{1}{30}+\frac{1}{20}+\frac{1}{60}=\frac{1}{10}\)
∴ R=\(\frac{10}{1}\) = 10Ω
Now, R’ and R” are connected in series and so equivalent resistance
R =R’+R”=8+10=18Ω
Thus, the equivalent resistance of the entire circuit is 18Ω

(C) Current flowing through the circuit
\(I=\frac{V}{R}=\frac{12}{18}\) = 0.66 A
Thus, 0.66 A current flows in the circuit.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 70.
A child has drawn the electric circuit to study Ohm’s law as shown in the figure here. His teacher told that the circuit diagram needs correction. Study the circuit diagram and redraw it after making all corrections.
Answer:
The circuit diagram given in the question has three errors. They are:
(i) Ammeter is connected in parallel with R and voltmeter connected in series. In reality, ammeter should be connected in series and voltmeter in parallel.
(ii) The current is drawn from negative terminal and enters the battery through positive which
(iii) Cells are not connected in series combination in the battery of the circuit.
The correct diagram is figure 12.31.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 32
Question 71.
Three 2Ω resistors’, A, B and C, are connected as shown in the figure. Each of them dissipates energy and can withstand a maximum power of 18W without melting. Find the maximum current that can flow through the three resistors.
Answer:
Resistance, R = 2Ω
Maximum power, Pmax = 18W
Maximum current, Imax =?
We know that P = I2R
\(I=\sqrt{\frac{P}{R}}=\sqrt{\frac{18}{2}}=3 A=I_{\max }\)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 33

Maximum current that can flow through 2Ω resistor is 3A. This current divides along B and C because in parallel combination, voltage across B and C remain same and so,\(I \propto \frac{1}{R}\)
Since, B and C have same resistance i.e. 2Ω each, same current i.e., \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1.5 A flows through B as well as C.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 72.
What is electrical resistivity? in a series electrical circuit comprising a resistor made up of a metallic wire, the ammeter reads 5 A. The reading of the ammeter decreases to half when the length of the wire is doubled. Why?
Answer:
Resistivity: The property of a material to resist the flow of electric current is called its resistivity. It is denoted as ρ. The SI unity of resistivity is Ωm
The resistance of a uniform conductor is:
\(R=\rho \frac{1}{A}\)
Where,
I = the length of the conductor
ρ = the electrical resistivity of the material
A = the cross-sectional area
Now, if I is doubled, then R also gets doubled.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 34
When, R is doubled, I becomes \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 73.
B1, B2 and B3 are three identical bulbs connected as shown in Figure. When all the. three bulbs glow, a current of 3A is recorded by the ammeter A.
Answer:
(i) What happens to the glow of the other two bulbs when the bulb B1 gets fused?
(ii) What happens to the reading of A1, A2, A3 and A when the bulb B2 gets fused?
(iii) How much power is dissipated in the circuit when all the three bulbs glow together?
Resistance of combination of three bulbs in parallel

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 36
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 35
(i) When bulb B1 gets fused, the currents in B2 and B3 remain same. This means, I2 = I3 = 1A. The reason for this is that the voltage across the B2 and B3 bulb remains same. As a result, they keep illuminating with same intensity as before.

(ii) When bulb B2 gets fused, the current in B2 becomes zero and current in B1 and B3 remains 1 A. The reason for this is that the voltage across blub B1 and B3 remain same.
Total current I = 1 + 12 + 13 = 1 + 0 + 1 = 2A
Current in ammeter A2 = 0 Current in ammeter A1 = 1A
Current in ammeter A3 = 1A Current in ammeter A = 2A

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

(iii) When all the three bulbs are connected.
Power dissipated, \(P=\frac{V^2}{R_{e q}}=\frac{(4.5)^2}{1.5}=13.5 \mathrm{~W}\)

Question 74.
A given length of a wire is doubled on itself and this process is repeated once again. By what factor does the resistance of the wire change?
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 37

Question 75.
A wire of length I and area of cross-section A was drawn Into a wire of double its length by melting It. If Its original resistivity and resistance were p and R respectively, what will be its new resistivity and resistance?
Answer:
The volume of the wire remains same in both cases.
Volume = Area of cross-section x Length
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 38
Thus, the resistivity ρ remains the same.

Question 76.
A household uses the following electric appliances:
(i) Refrigerator of rating 400 W for two hours each day.
(ii) Two electrIc fans of rating 80 W each for twelve hours each day.
(iii) Six electric tubes of rating 18 W each for 6 hours each day.
Calculate the electricity bill of the household for the month of June if the cost per unit of electric energy is 3.00.
Answer:
1. Energy consumed by refrigerator of rating 400 W for ten hours each day
= P x t = 400W x 2h =\(\frac{400}{1000}\) kW x 2h = 0.8kWh

2. Energy consumed by two electric fans of rating 80 W each for twelve hours each day
= 2 x P x t = 2×80 W x 12 h = \(\frac{160}{1000}\) kW x 12 h = 1.92 kWh

3. Energy consumed by six electric tubes of rating 18 W each for six hours each day
=6 x P x t = 6 x 18 W x 6h = \(\frac{108}{1000}\) W x 6h = 0.648 kWh

4. Total energy consumed in the month of June (30 days)
= (0.8 + 1.92 + 0.648) x 30 kWh
= 6.568 x 30 = 197.04 kWh

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

5. Electricity bill for the month of June
= ₹ 197.04 x 3 = ₹ 591.12 = ₹ 591 (approx)

Very Short Answer Type Question :

Question 1.
What is electric charge? State Its types.
Answer:
Electric charge is the basic property of a matter carried by some elementary particles. The charge can be of two types namely positive charge and negative charge.

Question 2.
State the basic difference between static electricity and current electricity.
Answer:
Static electricity refers to the physical effect caused by the stationery charges whereas current electricity refers to physical effect caused by the moving charges.

Question 3.
What is conventional current? State the direction of flow of conventional current.
Answer:
The existence of electric current due to the flow of positive charges is known as conventional current. The direction of flow of conventional current is from the positive terminal to the negative terminal of a battery.

Question 4.
What is an open circuit?
Answer:
An electric circuit through which no current flows is called an open circuit.

Question 5.
What is a closed circuit?
Answer:
An electric circuit through which current flows continuously is called a closed circuit.

Question 6.
What is the function of an ammeter? How should it be connected in a circuit?
Answer:
Ammeter is used to measure the electric current in a circuit. It should be connected n series with the circuit.

Question 7.
Should the resistance of an ammeter be low or high? Give reason.
Answer:
Ammeter is used to measure the current and is connected in series with the circuit. If, ammeter has a high resistance, it will reduce the current flowing through the circuit and give an inaccurate result of measure of electric current. Hence, ammeter should have as low resistance as possible.

Question 8.
A charge of 900 C flows through a cross section of a conductor for 5 minutes. Calculate the electric current drawn by the conductor.
Answer:
Q = 900 t = 5 (mEnutes) x 60 (second) = 300 s
We know that \(I=\frac{Q}{t}\) ∴ \(I=\frac{900}{300}=3 A\)
Thus, electric current drawn by this circuit is 3 A.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 9.
Provided here is an electric circuit consisting of a bulb, battery and a key. I want to measure the potential difference potential difference between the two terminals of the bulb. Redraw the circuit by adding required device which can measure the potential difference.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 39
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 40

Question 10.
How much amount of charge can be moved from point to B If the work of 12 joule is done with the potential difference of 4 volt between these two points?
Answer:
W = 12J V = 4V
We know that V Volt \(=\frac{\mathrm{W}(\text { Joule })}{\mathrm{Q}(\text { Coulomb })}\)
∴ \(4=\frac{12}{Q}\)
∴ Q = 3C
Thus, 3C of charge can be moved from point A to B if work of 12 joule is done with potential difference of 4 volt between these points.

Question 11.
Heena Madam asked Rohit to draw a circuit containing Resister ‘R’ connected with a battery along with an ammeter to measure the current flowing through R. Rohit has drawn the circuit provided here and it has some errors in it. Rectify and redraw the circuit.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 42
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 43

Question 12.
Match the following components with their correct symbols.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 44
Answer:
(1-b), (2-c)

Question 13.
Point out the errors in the circuit drawn below which measures the volt across resistor R.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 46

Error 1 : Voltmeter is connected in series. It should be connected in parallel in order to measure the voltage.
Error 2 : The key is open. Hence the electric current cannot flow. It should be closed.

Question 14.
Two students perform experiments on two given resistors R1 and R2 and plot the V-l graphs as shown in diagram 1 and 2 respectively. If R1> R2, which of two diagrams correctly represent the situation on the plotted curves? Justify your answer.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 45
Resistance is the slope of graph V-l. The graph with higher slope indicates that the resistance for that particular graph is higher. We can see from diagram 1 that R1> R2 hence diagram 1 correctly represents the situation.

Question 15.
What is the relationship between the potential coefficient and electric current flowing through a conductor in a circuit Who kind out this relation?
Answer:
The potential difference across a conductor is directly proportional to the electric current flowing through it in a circuit. This relation was found out by German physicist George Simon Ohm.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 16.
Calculate the potential difference of the battery in circuit provided here.
Answer:
l = 2.5mA = 2.5 x 10-3A, R = 20 KΩ
= 20 x 103 Ω
We know that V = IR
∴ V = (2.5 x 10-3A) x (20 x 103Ω) = 50V
Thus, the battery connected in this circuit has a voltage rating of 50 V.

Question 17.
What is the nature of a graph plotted with electric current at X-axis and potential difference at Y-axis?
Answer:
The graph plotted with electric current at X-axis and potential difference at Y-axis is a straight line passing through origin.

Question 18.
In an electric circuit, what change in electric current can we observe if we double the resistance keeping potential difference constant?
Answer:
1. Suppose, initially current and resistance of the circuit is I1 α R2 respectively.
2. After the resistance is doubled, current and resistance are I2 and R2 (R2 = 2R1)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 47

Hence, if we double the resistance, current gets halved.

Question 19.
What is the relation between the resistance of a conductor and electric current flowing through it?
Answer:
In an electric circuit, the current is inversely proportional to the resistance of the conductor.

Question 20.
Classify below provided materials as (1) Good conductor, (2) Resistor, (3) Poor conductor and (4) Insulator.
Nichrome, Drinking water, Tungsten, Diamond.
Answer:
Good conductor: Tungsten, Resistor: Nichrome,
Poor conductor: Drinking water, Insulator: Diamond

Question 21.
On which factors does the resistance of a conductor depend?
Answer:
Resistance of a conductor depends on:

  • Cross-sectional area,
  • Length,
  • Nature of material.

Question 22.
What is the relation of resistance with length and cross-sectional area of a conductor?
Answer:
Resistance is directly proportional to the length and inversely proportional to the area of cross-section of a conductor.

Question 23.
Choose the combination with highest resistance.
(a) A wire of length 2m and cross sectional area 2m2
(b) A wire of length 4m and cross sectional area of 2m2
(c) A wire of length 2m and cross sectional area 4m2
(d) A wire of length 4m and cross sectional area of 4m2
Answer:
The combination with a wire of length 4m and cross sectional area of 2m2 will provide maximum resistance.

Question 24.
A wire of resistivity ρ is stretched to three times its length. What will be Its new resistivity?
Answer:
The resistivity of a material depends on the nature of the material of the wire and not its dimensions. Hence, the resistivity p will remain unchanged even if it is stretched three times.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 25.
Based on the resistivity of three distinct materials provided here, classify the materials Into conductors, alloys and insulators:
(a) 100 x 10-6
(b) 1.84 x 10-6
(c) 1.36 x 10-10
Answer:
(a)-Alloy, (b)-Conductor, (c)-lnsulator

Question 26.
What happens to the resistance of a conductor. when its area of cross-section ¡s increased?
Answer:
\(R \propto \frac{1}{A}\) So, as the area of cross-section is increases, the resistance decreases.

Question 27.
The following table gives the resistivity of three samples:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 48

Which of these is suitable for making heating elements of electrical appliances and why?
Answer:
Sample C has highest resistivity. Hence, it is most suitable for making heating elements of electrical appliances.

Question 28.
Haresh has purchased a coil of nichrome for his school project. He wants to cut out a segment from this coil such that resistance of the segment is 2 ohm. If the cross-sectional area of this coil is 3.14 x 10 m2 and the resistivity of nichrome Is 100 x 10 ohm m, what should be the length of segment that Haresh needs to cut from coil?
Answer:
R=2Ω
A =3.14 x 10-6 m2
ρ =100 x 10-6  Ωm
I  = ?
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 49

Question 29.
Two wires of equal length, one of copper and the other of nichrome have the same resistance. Which wire will be thicker?
Answer:
Nichrome wire is thicker than copper wire.

Question 30.
Arrange the below-mentioned metals In order such that the metal with lowest conductivity comes first and the one with highest conductivity comes last.
(a) Copper
(b) Mercury
(c) Silver
(d) Iron
Answer:
(c), (a), (d), (b)

Question 31.
Which are the methods of joining resistors In a circuit?
Answer:
There are two combination of joining resistors in a circuit. They are
(1) Series connection and
(2) Parallel connection

Question 32.
Name the physical quantities which remain same in all the resistors when (i) they are connected In series, (ii) they are connected In parallel.
Answer:
(i) When the resistors are connected in series, the electric current is same for all the resistors.
(ii) When the resistors are connected in parallel, the voltage across each of the resistors is same.

Question 33.
Calculate the equivalent resistance in the combination of resistance shown here.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 50
Answer:
Here, R1 and R2 are connected in parallel connection and R3 is in series.
∴ equivalent resistance \(R=\frac{R_1 R_2}{R_1+R_2}+R_3\)
∴ R = \(\frac{5 \times 5}{5+5}\)+2.5=2.5+2.5 R =5Ω

Question 34.
Calculate the voltage of battery connected in circuit provided here.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 51
Answer:
We know that V = IR
∴ V = 2A x (6+2+3)Ω
V = 22V

Question 35.
Draw a schematic diagram of an electric circuit comprising of 3 cells, a parallel combination of two bulbs and plug key in the ON mode connected with an ammeter and a voltmeter.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 52

Question 36.
Two resistors are connected in a parallel combination such that the equivalent resistance s 1 ohm. If one of the resistors has a value of 2 ohm, calculate the value for the other resistor.
Answer:
We know that for parallel combination,
\(R=\frac{R_1 R_2}{R_1+R_2}\)
(But equivalent resistance = 1Ω and R1 = 2Ω)
∴ \(1=\frac{2 R_2}{2+R_2}\)
∴ 2+R2=2R2
∴ R2 = 2Ω

Question 37.
Out of the two wires X and Y shown below, which one has greater resistance? Justify.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity 53
Answer:
The resistance is directly proportional to the length of the wire. Now we can see that wire Y is longer than X and hence it will offer higher resistance.

Question 38.
What would be the equivalent resistance of a parallel combination of resistors made by cutting a wire of resistor R in three equal parts. What will be the effect on resistivity of each of the segments?
Answer:
Resistance of wire (with resistance R) when cut in 3 equal parts would have resistance R/3 for each segment.
Let’s say resistances are r1, r2 and r3
∴ equivalent resistance = \(\frac{r_1 r_2 r_3}{r_1+r_2+r_3}\)
But, r1 = r2 = r3 = R/3
∴ equivalent resistance \(=\frac{\frac{\mathrm{R}^3}{27}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
∴ equivalent resistance \(=\frac{\mathrm{R}^2}{27}\)
Resistivity of the segments will remain the same as it was in the wire before cutting it because resistivity does not depend on the length of material.

Question 39.
Why do we use copper and aluminium wires for transmission of electric current?
Answer:
Because both copper and aluminium have low resistivity and hence high conductivity

Question 40.
Which one is having lesser resistance? A 220 V, 60 W bulb or a 220 V, 40 W bulb?
Answer:
1.  We know that P = V2/R
∴ R=V2/P
2. Now, Voltage applied is same for both the bulbs, hence relative value of resistances of both the bulbs are dependent on the value of powers.
Now, R α 1/P
Therefore, more the power less the resistance.
Hence, the bulb with 60W rating will have lesser resistance than the bulb with 40W rating.

Question 41.
Give one reason which justifies that parallel circuits are preferred in domestic wiring.
Answer:
In parallel circuit, if one device gets damaged and stops working, there is no effect in the functioning of other connected devices. Hence, parallel circuits are preferred in domestic wiring.

Question 42.
Write relation between heat energy produced In a conductor when a potential difference V is applied across its terminals and a current I flows through in time t. What is this relation known as?
Answer:
Heat energy can be expressed as H = Vit. This is also known as Joule’s law of heating

Question 43.
State the relationship between 1 Volt and 1 Joule.
Answer:
1 Volt \(=\frac{\text { 1Joule }}{1 \text { Coulomb }} \text { or } 1 \mathrm{~V}=\frac{1 \mathrm{~J}}{1 \mathrm{C}}\)

Question 44.
As per the Joule’s law of heating, on which parameters does the heat produced In a resistor depend?
Answer:
The heat produced in a resistor is directly proportional to (a) square of current, (b) resistance and (c) time for which the current flows through resistor.

Question 45.
State the difference between the wire used In the element of an electric heater and in a fuse wire.
Answer:
Wire used in electric heater should have a high resistivity and high melting point allowing the wire to produce heat without melting down where as a fuse wire should have a low resistance and low melting point so that it can protect the appliance connected with it due to fluctuating current.

Question 46.
List two characteristics of the material used in electric heating devices.
Answer:
Material used in heater wire should have

  • High Resistivity and
  • High melting point.

Question 47.
An electric iron draws a current of 3.5 A when connected with a voltage source of 220V. Calculate the energy consumed by iron if it is kept on for 2 hour.
Answer:
I = 3.5A
V = 220V
t = 2hr
energy consumed E =?
We know that E = Vit
=220 x 3.5 x 2
=1540 Wh
∴ E= 1.54 kWh

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Question 48.
Why do we use tungsten for making bulb filaments?
Answer:
The filament in bulb should have the capacity to retain extremely hot temperature so that it can emit light. As tungsten has a very high melting point (3380°C). It can retain heat without melting down and so it is used for making bulb filaments.

Question 49.
How does use of a fuse wire protect electrical appliance?
Answer:
Fuse wire has a very low melting point. A fuse is connected in series with the appliance. Hence if more than an acceptable amount of current flows in the circuit, the fuse wire melts down due to heating effect and breaks the circuit. This helps
in protecting the appliance against the damage caused by fluctuating current.

Question 50.
Melting points of three metals are provided here: (a) 3380 °C, (b) 1085 °C, (c) 232°C. Which of these metal can be used to produce a fuse wire, a bulb and an electric transmission line.
Answer:
Metal with melting point 3380°C, should be used for producing bulb, metal with melting point 1085 °C should be used for producing electrictransmission line and the metal with melting point 232 °C should be used for producing fuse wire.

Question 51.
400 J of heat is produced in 4s in a 4Ω resistor. Find potential difference across the resistor.
Answer:
H = 400J, t = 4s and R = 4Ω.
We know that,
H=I2Rt
∴ I2=H/Rt
∴ I =5A
We Also know that,
H = V/t
∴ V=H/It
∴ V = 20V

Question 52.
How much electric energy can be consumed by a 150W toaster in lo minutes?
Answer:
P = 150 W, t = 10 minutes = 10 x 60 seconds
= 600 seconds
We know that electric energy E = Pt
∴ E = 150 x 600 = 90,000 J
∴ E =90 x 103 J

Question 53.
Can a fuse wire of capacity 3A protect a circuit consuming 1 kW electric power when connected with a voltage source of 220V?
Answer:
The electric circuit that has a 1 kW power at 220 V will draw electric current I = P/V
∴ \(I=\frac{1000}{220}\) = 4.54 A
Hence, the fuse wire of 3A current rating cannot protect this circuit as it will require a fuse wire of More than, 4.54 A rating.

Question 54.
What is the commercial unit of electrical energy? Represent it in terms of joules. Commercial unit of energy is kW h. It can be represented in Joules as follows:
Answer:
1 Kilowatt hour = 1000 watt hour
We know that 1 watt = 1 joule / seconds
∴ 1 kWh = \(\frac{1000 \text { joule }}{\text { second }}\) x 3600 (second) second
∴ 1 kWh = 3.6 x 106 joules

Question 55.
An electric device operates at 24 V and has a resistance of 8Ω. Calculate the power consumed by the device and current flowing through it.
Answer:
Voltage = 24V and R = 8Ω
We know that I = V/R
∴ I = 3A
And, P=Vl
∴ P = 24 x 3
∴ P = 72W

Question 56.
An electric current of 5.0 A flows through a 12Ω resistor. What is the rate at which heat energy is produced in the resistor?
Answer:
l = 5A and R=12Ω
Rate of consumption of energy is the power and
we know that,
P = I2R
∴ P=(5)2 x 12
∴ P = 300W

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Fill in the blanks:

1. …………………. is expressed by the amount of charge flowing through a particular area in unit time.
Answer: Electric current

2. Coulomb charge constitute electrons.
Answer:  6 x 1018

3. In ………………… combination of resistance, the magnitude of equivalent resistance is greater than the largest resistance.
Answer: Series

4. The work done on the electric charge to maintain its equilibrium with the other charge is called ………………
Answer: Electric potential

5. A/An ………………. (instrument) measures electric current in a circuit whereas a/an (instrument) is used to measure the potential difference.
Answer: ammeter, voltmeter

6. Chemical reaction within a cell is responsible for generating ……………………. across its terminals.
Answer:  potential difference

7. A device called ………………… is used to change electric current flowing in a circuit by keeping potential difference constant.
Answer: rheostat

8. Joule/Coulomb is the SI unit for ………………………
Answer:  potential difference

9. Voltmeter is connected in …………………….. and ammeter is connected in ………………..
Answer: Parallel; Series

10. The graph of potential difference v/s electric current is a and it validates Law.
Answer: straight line, Ohm’s

11. The unit Volt/Ampere can also be represented as and is symbolized as ……………………..
Answer: Ohm

12. If we increase the cross sectional area of a conductor, the amount of current flowing through it ………. whereas the resistance …………………….. .
Answer: increases, decreases

13. The resistance of any conduction substance is …………….. proportional to length of the substance.
Answer: Directly

14. The resistance of a conductor is proportional to area of cross-section of the substance.
Answer: Inversely

15. ………….. is widely used as a filament in electric bulbs.
Answer: Tungsten

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

16. In a combination of resistance, all the resistors are simultaneously connected together between two points in a circuit, whereas in a combination, resistors are connected end to end consecutively between two points in a circuit.
Answer: parallel, series

17. In an electric circuit, a part of the source energy is consumed in the form of useful work whereas a fraction of this energy gets expended in form of…………………
Answer:  heat

18. Heat produced in a resistor is directly proportional to ………………….., and ……………………..  of electric current flowing through the circuit and also time during which the current flows through circuit.
Answer: resistance, square

19. Devices such as electric iron and electric heater works on the principle of …………… Law.
Answer:  Joule’s

20. A porcelain cartridge encases a ……………… which protects the appliances from fluctuating currents.
Answer: fuse wire

21. 1 kWh =………………….
Answer:  3.6 x 106 joule

22. If you run ……………… watt bulb for 1 hour, the energy consumed will be 1 unit.
Answer: 103

23. A fuse wire should have relatively …………………… (higher/lower) melting point than the conductor it is connected with.
Answer: lower

24. ………………………………. can be termed as the rate of consumption of energy.
Answer: Power

25. Electric energy consumed is the product of power and …………….
Answer:  time

True OR False:

1. The direction of electric current flowing through a conductor is from the negative terminal to positive terminal of a battery which is opposite to the direction of conventional current. — True
2. The electric current in a circuit gets doubled as we double the length of a conductor through which the current flows. — False
3. 6 x 1012 electrons flowing through a conductor in one second constitutes one microampere of electric current. — True
4. In a series combination of resistors, equal amount of electric current flows through each resistor whereas, in a parallel circuit, the current gets divided proportionately among each resistors. — True
5. A voltmeter should be connected in a series combination and an ammeter should be connected in a parallel combination with the conductor through which we want to calculate current and voltage. — False
6. The V-l graph provided here is a straight line with constant resistance and it validates the Ohm’s law — False
7. Two resistors of same material with different length and same cross-sectional area will have different resistivity, — False
8. Resistance as well as resistivity of a material are dependent on the temperature of that material. — True
9. Material A has a resistivity of 5.2 x 10-8 and material B has a resistivity of 49 x 10-8. In this case, A can be chosen over B to produce electric transmission lines. — True
10. In a series combination of a resistors 1 equal amount of potential difference is observed across each resistor whereas in a parallel combination, potential difference gets divided based on the value each resistor. — False
11. Equivalent resistance in a parallel combination is higher than the highest individual resistance of the resistor connected in circuit. — False
12. Electric bulbs are filled with non-reactive noble gas to prolong the life of filament. — True
13. A large amount of power consumed by an electric bulb is used in emitting light and the remaining amount gets dissipated in the form of heat. — False
14. A fuse wire of 4A current rating is incapable of protecting an appliance with a rating of 5A. — True
15. Fuse wires are always connected in parallel to the circuit because they have very low resistance hence any high fluctuating amount of current would pass through the fuse without harming the appliance connected with it. — False
16. Rate of doing work is the product of voltage applied in the circuit and the current flowing through it. — True
17. 1 kW h is the energy consumed when one Watt of power is utilized for one hour.– False

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity

Match the Following:
Question 1.

CharacteristicResistivity
1. Insulatora. 2.6 x 10-8
2. Poor conductorb. 100 x 10-6
3. Resistorc. 1.36 x 1010
4. Good conductord. 3.4 x 10-2

Answer:
(1-c), (2-d), (3-b), (4-a)

Question 2.

Physical QuantityCharacteristic
1. Resistancea. Directly proportional to potential difference applied
2. Electric currentb. Dependent on the direction of flow of current
3. Heat in a resistorc. Directly proportional to square of electric current
4. Powerd. Inversely proportional to cross-sectional area
e. Product of potential difference and electric current

Answer: (1-c), (2-a), (3-e), (4-d)

Question 3.

DeviceDescription
1. Rheostata. Converts heat energy into light energy
2. Ammeterb. Protects appliances from fluctuating current
3. Voltmeterc. Can change current by keeping voltage source constant
4. Fused. Should be connected n parallel to the conductor
e. Used to measure electric current

Answer:
(1-c),(2-e),(3-d),(4-b)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 12 Electricity Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

परीक्षोपयोगी अन्य महत्त्वपूर्ण प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
240 और 6552 का HCF यूक्लिड विभाजन एल्गोरिथ्म का प्रयोग करके ज्ञात कीजिए ।
हल :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 1
यूक्लिड विभाजन एल्गोरिथ्म से-
6552 = 240 × 27 + 72
240 = 72 × 3 + 24
72 = 24 × 3 + 0
क्योंकि यहाँ पर शेषफल शून्य तथा भाजक 24 है।
इसलिए 240 और 6552 का HCF = 24

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 2.
दर्शाइए कि कोई भी धनात्मक पूर्णांक 3q या 3q + 1 या 3q + 2 के रूप का होता है, जहाँ q कोई पूर्णांक है।
हल :
माना a एक धनात्मक पूर्णांक है तथा b = 3 हो तो यूक्लिड विभाजन एल्गोरिथ्म से-
a = 3q + r
क्योंकि 0 ≤ r < 3 है, इसलिए संभावित शेषफल 0, 1 या 2 हो सकते हैं ।
अर्थात् a संख्याओं 3q, 3q + 1 या 3q + 2 के रूप का हो सकता है जहाँ q कोई पूर्णांक है ।

प्रश्न 3.
निम्नलिखित संख्याओं को \(\frac {p}{q}\) के रूप में व्यक्त कीजिए-
(i) 0.375
(ii) 0.104
(iii) 0.15
(iv) 15.75
हल :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 2

प्रश्न 4.
एक मिठाई विक्रेता के पास 420 काजू की बर्फियाँ और 130 बादाम की बर्फियाँ हैं । वह इनकी ऐसी ढेरियाँ बनाना चाहती है कि प्रत्येक ढेरी में बर्फियों की संख्या समान रहे तथा ये ढेरियाँ बर्फी की परात में न्यूनतम स्थान घेरें । इस काम के लिए प्रत्येक ढेरी में कितनी बर्फियाँ रखी जा सकती हैं?
हल :
प्रश्नानुसार, यहाँ पर हमें 420 और 130 का HCF यूक्लिड एल्गोरिथ्म द्वारा ज्ञात करना है-
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 3
420 = 130 × 3 + 30
130 = 30 × 4 + 10
30 = 10 × 3 +0
क्योंकि यहाँ पर शेषफल शून्य तथा भाजक 10 है ।
इसलिए 420 और 130 का HCF = 10
अतः प्रत्येक प्रकार की बर्फी के लिए मिठाई विक्रेता 10-10 की ढेरी बना सकता है

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 5.
8232 को अभाज्य गुणनखंडों के गुणनफल के रूप में व्यक्त कीजिए ।
हल :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 4
8232 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 7 × 7 × 7
= 23 × 3 × 73

प्रश्न 6.
सिद्ध कीजिए कि \(\sqrt{2}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
हल :
माना \(\sqrt{2}\) एक परिमेय संख्या है जो कि दिए गए के विपरीत है।
अब \(\sqrt{2}\) = \(\frac {a}{b}\) जहाँ a और b सह-अभाज्य पूर्णांक हैं तथा b ≠ 0 है।
⇒ \(\sqrt{2}\)b = a
दोनों ओर का वर्ग करने पर, 2b2 = a2 ………..(i)
इससे पता चलता है कि a2, 2 से विभाज्य है, इसलिए a भी 2 से विभाज्य होगी। ………..(ii)
⇒ a = 2m जहाँ m एक पूर्णांक है ।
a का मान समीकरण (i) में रखने पर,
2b2 = (2m)2
⇒ 2b2 = 4m2
या b2 = 2m2
इसका अर्थ यह है कि 2 से b2 विभाजित हो जाता है इसलिए b भी 2 से विभाजित होगा । ………….(iii)
इसी प्रकार समीकरण (ii) व (iii) से a और b में कम-से-कम एक उभयनिष्ठ गुणनखंड 2 है। इससे हमारी कल्पना गलत होती है कि a और b सह-अभाज्य हैं । अतः सिद्ध है कि \(\sqrt{2}\) एक परिमेय संख्या नहीं है।
अतः \(\sqrt{2}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।

प्रश्न 7.
संख्या 40, 36 और 126 का अभाज्य गुणनखंडन विधि द्वारा HCF और LCM ज्ञात कीजिए ।
हल :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 5
40 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 5 = 23 × 5
36 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 = 22 × 32
126 = 2 × 3 × 3 × 7 = 2 × 32 × 7
∴ HCF(40, 36, 126) = अभाज्य गुणनखंडों की उभयनिष्ठ सबसे छोटी घातों का गुणनफल = 2 उत्तर
LCM(40, 36, 126) = अभाज्य गुणनखंडों की सबसे बड़ी घातों का गुणनफल = 23 × 32 × 5 × 7
= 8 × 9 × 5 × 7 = 2520

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 8.
छः अंकों की सबसे बड़ी संख्या ज्ञात कीजिए जो 24, 15 तथा 36 से पूर्णतया विभाज्य हो ।
हल :
यहाँ पर हम पहले 24, 15 व 36 का LCM ज्ञात करेंगे।
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 6
24 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 = 23 × 3
15 = 3 × 5
36 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 = 22 × 32
LCM(24, 15, 36) = 23 × 32 × 5 = 8 × 9 × 5 = 360
हम जानते हैं कि छः अंकों की बड़ी से बड़ी संख्या = 999999
अतः अभीष्ट संख्या = 999999 – 279 = 999720

प्रश्न 9.
यदि दो संख्याओं का LCM व HCF क्रमशः 180 व 6 हो तथा इनमें से एक संख्या 30 हो तो दूसरी संख्या ज्ञात कीजिए ।
हल :
यहाँ पर,
LCM = 180
HCF = 6
पहली संख्या = 30
∴ दूसरी संख्या = LCM × HCF / पहली संख्या
= \(\frac{180 \times 6}{30}\)
= 6 × 6 = 36

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 10.
वह बड़े से बड़े धनात्मक पूर्णांक ज्ञात कीजिए जो 398, 436 और 542 को विभाजित करने पर क्रमशः 7, 11 व 15 शेषफल छोड़े?
हल :
यहाँ पर
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 7
अब हम 391, 425 व 527 का HCF ज्ञात करेंगे-
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 8
391 = 17 × 23
425 = 5 × 5 × 17 = 52 × 17
527 = 17 × 31
HCF (391, 425, 527) = 17
अतः वांछित पूर्णांक = 17

प्रश्न 11.
सिद्ध कीजिए कि निम्नलिखित संख्याएँ अपरिमेय है-
(i) 3 – 2\(\sqrt{5}\)
(ii) 2\(\sqrt{3}\)
हल :
(i) माना 3 – 2\(\sqrt{5}\) एक परिमेय संख्या है जो कि दिए गए के विपरीत है ।
अब 3 – 2\(\sqrt{5}\) = \(\frac {a}{b}\) जहाँ a और b सह-अभाज्य पूर्णांक हैं तथा b ≠ 0 है।
⇒ 2\(\sqrt{5}\) = 3 – \(\frac {a}{b}\)
या 2\(\sqrt{5}\) = \(\frac{3 b-a}{b}\)
या \(\sqrt{5}\) = \(\frac{3 b-a}{2 b}\)
क्योंकि a और b पूर्णांक हैं जिस कारण \(\frac{3 b-a}{2b}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी ।
इसलिए \(\sqrt{5}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी जो कि असत्य है क्योंकि \(\sqrt{5}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
अतः हमारी कल्पना गलत है। इससे सिद्ध होता है कि 3 – 2\(\sqrt{5}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।

(ii) यदि संभव हो तो माना 2\(\sqrt{3}\) एक परिमेय संख्या है।
तो 2\(\sqrt{3}\) = \(\frac {a}{b}\) जहाँ a और b सह-अभाज्य पूर्णांक हैं तथा b ≠ 0 है।
⇒ \(\sqrt{3}\) = \(\frac {a}{2b}\)
क्योंकि a और b पूर्णांक हैं जिस कारण \(\frac {a}{2b}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी ।
⇒ \(\sqrt{3}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी जो कि असत्य है क्योंकि \(\sqrt{3}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
अतः हमारी कल्पना गलत है। इससे सिद्ध होता है कि 2\(\sqrt{3}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 12.
सिद्ध कीजिए कि \(\sqrt{3}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
हल :
माना \(\sqrt{3}\) एक परिमेय संख्या है जो कि दिए गए के विपरीत है ।
अब \(\sqrt{3}\) = \(\frac {a}{b}\) जहाँ a और b सह-अभाज्य पूर्णांक हैं तथा b ≠ 0 है ।
⇒ \(\sqrt{3}\)b = a
दोनों ओर का वर्ग करने पर,
3b2 = a2 ………..(i)
इससे पता चलता है कि a2, 3 से विभाज्य है, इसलिए a भी 3 से विभाज्य होगी। …………..(ii)
⇒ a = 3m जहाँ m एक पूर्णांक है।
a का मान समीकरण (i) में रखने पर,
3b2 = (3m)2
⇒ 3b2 = 9m2
या b2 = 3m2
इसका अर्थ यह है कि 3 से b2 विभाजित हो जाता है इसलिए b भी 3 से विभाजित होगा । …………..(iii)
इसी प्रकार समीकरण (ii) व (iii) से a और b में कम-से-कम एक उभयनिष्ठ गुणनखंड 3 है। इससे हमारी कल्पना गलत होती है कि a और b सह-अभाज्य हैं । जिस कारण \(\sqrt{3}\) एक परिमेय संख्या नहीं है ।
अतः \(\sqrt{3}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।

प्रश्न 13.
सिद्ध कीजिए कि 3\(\sqrt{2}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
हल :
यदि सम्भव हो तो माना 3\(\sqrt{2}\) एक परिमेय संख्या है।
तो 3\(\sqrt{2}\) = \(\frac {a}{b}\) जहाँ a और b सह – अभाज्य पूर्णांक हैं तथा b ≠ 0 है।
⇒ \(\sqrt{2}\) = \(\frac {a}{3b}\)
क्योंकि a और b पूर्णांक हैं जिस कारण \(\frac {a}{3b}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी ।
⇒ \(\sqrt{2}\) एक परिमेय संख्या होगी जोकि असत्य है क्योंकि \(\sqrt{2}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।
अतः हमारी कल्पना गलत है। इससे सिद्ध होता है कि 3\(\sqrt{2}\) एक अपरिमेय संख्या है।

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 14.
\(\frac {7}{160}\) का दशमलव प्रसार लिखिए ।
हल :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ - 9

प्रश्न 15.
परिमेय संख्या 34.12345 के हर के अभाज्य गुणनखंडों के विषय में आप क्या कह सकते हैं?
हल :
क्योंकि 34.12345 एक सांत दशमलव संख्या है। इसलिए इस हर के अभाज्य गुणनखंडन 2n × 5m के रूप के होंगे, जहाँ n और m पूर्णांक होंगे।

बहुविकल्पीय – प्रश्न :

प्रश्न 1.
निम्नलिखित में से कौन-सी संख्या अपरिमेय नहीं है?
(A) \(\sqrt{2}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{3}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{4}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{5}\)
हल :
(C) \(\sqrt{4}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 2.
प्रत्येक भाज्य संख्या को एक अद्वितीय रूप से …………….. संख्याओं के गुणनफल के रूप में व्यक्त किया जा सकता है ।
(A) अभाज्य
(B) सम
(C) विषम
(D) भाज्य
हल :
(A) अभाज्य

प्रश्न 3.
यूक्लिड विभाजन प्रमेयिका a = bq + का प्रयोग 17 व 6 के लिए करने पर का मान होगा-
(A) 6
(B) 2
(C) 17
(D) 5
हल :
(D) 5

प्रश्न 4.
यूक्लिड विभाजन प्रमेयिका a = bq + r का प्रयोग 20 व 4 के लिए करने पर का मान होगा-
(A) 5
(B) शून्य
(C) 4
(D) 20
हल :
(B) शून्य

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 5.
12 व 5 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 5
(B) 12
(C) 1
(D) 60
हल :
(C) 1

प्रश्न 6.
किन्हीं दो अभाज्य संख्याओं का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) दोनों संख्याओं का गुणनफल
(B) बड़ी संख्या
(C) छोटी संख्या
(D) एक
हल :
(D) एक

प्रश्न 7.
20 व 5 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 1
(B) 5
(C) 20
(D) 4
हल :
(B) 5

प्रश्न 8.
10 व 3 को यूक्लिड विभाजन प्रमेयिका के रूप में लिखा जा सकता है-
(A) 10 = 3 × 3 – 1
(B) 10 = 3 × 3 + 1
(C) 10 = 3 × 1 + 7
(D) 3 = 10 × 3 + 1
हल :
(B) 10 = 3 × 3 + 1

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 9.
4 व 19 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 4
(B) 19
(C) 1
(D) 76
हल :
(C) 1

प्रश्न 10.
510 व 92 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 2
(B) 81
(C) 27
(D) 243
हल :
(A) 2

प्रश्न 11.
दो धनात्मक पूर्णांकों के LCM और HCF में सम्बन्ध होगा-
(A) HCF > LCM
(B) HCF = LCM
(C) LCM > HCF
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(B) HCF = LCM (यदि धनात्मक पूर्णांक समान हों) तथा (C) LCM > HCF (यदि धनात्मक पूर्णांक भिन्न हों)

प्रश्न 12.
प्रत्येक धनात्मक विषम पूर्णांक को किस रूप में लिखा जा सकता है, जबकि p कोई पूर्णांक हो ?
(A) 2p+ 1
(B) 2p
(C) 2p + 2
(D) 4p
हल :
(A) 2p + 1

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 13.
निम्नलिखित में से किस युग्म का HCF, 4 होगा ?
(A) 23, 4
(B) 28, 4
(C) 31, 4
(D) 10, 4
हल :
(B) 28, 4

प्रश्न 14.
निम्नलिखित में से किस युग्म का HCF, 4 नहीं होगा ?
(A) 12, 4
(B) 20, 4
(C) 22, 4
(D) 28, 4
हल :
(C) 22, 4

प्रश्न 15.
निम्नलिखित में से अपरिमेय (irrational) संख्या छाँटिए-
(A) \(\sqrt{36}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{121}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{9}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{8}\)
हल :
(D) \(\sqrt{8}\)

प्रश्न 16.
यदि 306 और 657 का HCF 9 हो, तो उसका LCM क्या होगा ?
(A) 2482
(B) 22338
(C) 2754
(D) 5913
हल :
(B) 22338

प्रश्न 17.
26 व 91 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 26
(B) 867
(C) 13
(D) एक
हल :
(C) 13

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 18.
1232 व 32 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 16
(B) 616
(C) 8
(D) 2464
हल :
(A) 16

प्रश्न 19.
336 व 54 का HCF क्या होगा ?
(A) 9
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 18
हल :
(C) 6

प्रश्न 20.
यदि q कोई पूर्णांक हो तो एक धनात्मक विषम पूर्णांक को लिखा जा सकता है-
(A) 4q
(B) 4q + 1
(C) 4q + 2
(D) 4q + 4
हल :
(B) 4q + 1

प्रश्न 21.
यदि q कोई पूर्णांक हो तो एक धनात्मक विषम पूर्णांक को किस रूप में नहीं लिखा जा सकता?
(A) 6q +1
(B) 6q + 2
(C) 6q + 3
(D) 6q + 5
हल :
(B) 6q + 2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 22.
एक मिठाई विक्रेता के पास 420 काजू की बर्फियाँ और 130 बादाम की बर्फियाँ हैं। वह इनकी ऐसी ढेरियाँ बनाना चाहता है कि प्रत्येक ढेरी में बर्फियों की संख्या समान रहे तथा ये ढेरियाँ बर्फी की परात में न्यूनतम स्थान घेरें । इस काम के लिए, प्रत्येक ढेरी में कितनी बर्फियाँ रखी जा सकती हैं?
(A) 30
(B) 130
(C) 20
(D) 10
हल :
(D) 10

प्रश्न 23.
किसी परेड में 616 सदस्यों वाली एक सेना की टुकड़ी को 32 सदस्यों वाले एक आर्मी बैंड के पीछे मार्च करना है। दोनों समूहों को समान संख्या वाले स्तंभों में मार्च करना है। उन स्तंभों की अधिकतम संख्या क्या होगी जिसमें वे मार्च कर सकते हैं?
(A) 8
(B) 32
(C) 4
(D) 2
हल :
(A) 8

प्रश्न 24.
प्रत्येक भाज्य संख्या को अभाज्य संख्याओं के एक गुणनफल के रूप में व्यक्त (गुणनखंडित) किया जा सकता है तथा यह गुणनखंडन अद्वितीय होता है, इस पर कोई ध्यान दिए बिना कि अभाज्य गुणनखंड किस क्रम में आ रहे हैं। इसे कहा जाता है-
(A) यूक्लिड विभाजन प्रमेय
(B) अंकगणित की आधारभूत प्रमेय
(C) बीजगणित की आधारभूत प्रमेय
(D) रेखागणित की आधारभूत प्रमेय
हल :
(B) अंकगणित की आधारभूत प्रमेय

प्रश्न 25.
सबसे छोटी अभाज्य संख्या है-
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 1
(D) 5
हल :
(A) 2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 26.
सबसे छोटी विषम अभाज्य संख्या है-
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 5
हल :
(C) 3

प्रश्न 27.
30 के अभाज्य गुणनखंड होंगे-
(A) 6 × 5
(B) 1 × 30
(C) 2 × 15
(D) 2 × 3 × 5
हल :
(D) 2 × 3 × 5

प्रश्न 28.
दो पूर्णांकों 336 तथा 54 का LCM होगा-
(A) 12
(B) 3024
(C) 6
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(B) 3024

प्रश्न 29.
72 के अभाज्य गुणनखंड होंगे-
(A) 23 × 33
(B) 23 × 33
(C) 23 × 33
(D) 23 × 32
हल :
(D) 23 × 32

प्रश्न 30.
यदि 96 और 404 का HCF 4 हो तो उनका LCM होगा-
(A) 38784
(B) 9696
(C) 2274
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(B) 9696

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 31.
140 के अभाज्य गुणनखंड होंगे-
(A) 22 × 52 × 72
(B) 22 × 52 × 7
(C) 22 × 5 × 7
(D) 2 × 5 × 7
हल :
(C) 22 × 5 × 7

प्रश्न 32.
156 के अभाज्य गुणनखंड होंगे-
(A) 22 × 3 × 13
(B) 22 × 32 × 13
(C) 22 × 32 × 132
(D) 2 × 32 × 13
हल :
(A) 22 × 3 × 13

प्रश्न 33.
12 और 20 के HCF और LCM में सम्बन्ध होगा-
(A) HCF > LCM
(B) HCF < LCM
(C) HCF = LCM
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(B) HCF < LCM

प्रश्न 34.
6, 72 व 120 का LCM होगा-
(A) 240
(B) 360
(C) 120
(D) 152
हल :
(B) 360

प्रश्न 35.
12, 15 व 21 का LCM होगा-
(A) 420
(B) 315
(C) 410
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(A) 420

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 36.
किन्हीं तीन विभिन्न अभाज्य संख्याओं का HCF होगा-
(A) तीनों संख्याओं का गुणनफल
(B) सबसे छोटी संख्या
(C) सबसे बड़ी संख्या
(D) एक
हल :
(D) एक

प्रश्न 37.
किन्हीं तीन विभिन्न अभाज्य संख्याओं का LCM होगा-
(A) सबसे छोटी संख्या
(B) सबसे बड़ी संख्या
(C) तीनों संख्याओं का गुणनफल
(D) एक
हल :
(C) तीनों संख्याओं का गुणनफल .

प्रश्न 38.
17, 23 व 29 का LCM होगा-
(A) 1140
(B) 1139
(C) 1239
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं

प्रश्न 39.
510 व 92 का LCM होगा-
(A) 23460
(B) 3460
(C) 2346
(D) 1800
हल :
(A) 23460

प्रश्न 40.
पूर्णांक 8, 9 और 25 का LCM है-
(A) 1500
(B) 1700
(C) 1800
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(C) 1800

प्रश्न 41.
यदि 36 व x का HCF व LCM क्रमशः 6 व 180 हो तो x का मान होगा-
(A) 180
(B) 36
(C) 30
(D) 6
हल :
(C) 30

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 42.
यदि दो संख्याओं का गुणनफल 240 तथा उनका HCF 4 हो तो LCM होगा-
(A) 12
(B) 20
(C) 240
(D) 60
हल :
(D) 60

प्रश्न 43.
यदि दो संख्याओं का HCF व LCM क्रमशः 24 व 360 हो तथा इनमें से एक संख्या 72 हो तो दूसरी संख्या होगी-
(A) 120
(B) 60
(C) 30
(D) 15
हल :
(A) 120

प्रश्न 44.
किसी खेल के मैदान के चारों ओर एक वृत्ताकार पथ है। इस मैदान का एक चक्कर लगाने में सोनिया को 18 मिनट लगते हैं, जबकि इसी मैदान का एक चक्कर लगाने में रवि को 12 मिनट लगते हैं। मान लीजिए वे दोनों एक ही स्थान और एक ही समय पर चलना प्रारंभ करके एक ही दिशा में चलते हैं। कितने समय बाद वे पुनः प्रारंभिक स्थान पर मिलेंगे?
(A) 6 मिनट
(B) 12 मिनट
(C) 18 मिनट
(D) 36 मिनट
हल :
(D) 36 मिनट

प्रश्न 45.
किसी स्कूल की नौवीं कक्षा के सैक्शन-ए में 36 विद्यार्थी तथा सैक्शन -बी में 32 विद्यार्थी हैं । इस स्कूल की लाइब्रेरी में कम से कम कितनी किताबें होनी चाहिएँ ताकि सैक्शन-ए या सैक्शन-बी के विद्यार्थियों को बराबर-बराबर दी जा सके ?
(A) 144
(B) 288
(C) 32
(D) 36
हल :
(B) 288

प्रश्न 46.
\(\sqrt{5}\) हैं :
(A) सम
(B) विषम
(C) परिमेय
(D) अपरिमेय
हल :
(D) अपरिमेय

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 47.
………………… और अपरिमेय संख्याएँ मिलकर वास्तविक संख्याएँ बनाती हैं?
(A) परिमेय
(B) सम
(C) विषम
(D) अभाज्य
हल :
(A) परिमेय

प्रश्न 48.
\(\sqrt{3}\) है :
(A) परिमेय
(B) अपरिमेय
(C) मिश्रित संख्या
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(B) अपरिमेय

प्रश्न 49.
निम्नलिखित में से कौन-सी संख्या अपरिमेय नहीं है?
(A) \(\sqrt{2}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{3}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{13}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{16}\)
हल :
(D) \(\sqrt{16}\)

प्रश्न 50.
\(\sqrt{2}\) है-
(A) अपरिमेय
(B) परिमेय
(C) मिश्रित संख्या
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(A) अपरिमेय

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 51.
यदि \(\frac {p}{q}\) एक ऐसी परिमेय संख्या हो, जिसमें q = 2n5m जहाँ n और m ऋणेतर पूर्णांक है तो इसका दशमलव प्रसार होगा-
(A) असांत आवर्ती
(B) असांत अनावर्ती
(C) सांत
(D) असांत
हल :
(C) सांत

प्रश्न 52.
निम्नलिखित में से किस संख्या का दशमलव प्रसार असांत आवर्ती होगा ?
(A) \(\frac{3}{2^3}\)
(B) \(\frac{13}{5^3}\)
(C) \(\frac{23}{2^3 5^2}\)
(D) \(\frac{129}{2^2 5^7 7^5}\)
हल :
(D) \(\frac{129}{2^2 5^7 7^5}\)

प्रश्न 53.
निम्नलिखित में से किस संख्या का दशमलव प्रसार सांत होगा-
(A) \(\frac{29}{7^3}\)
(B) \(\frac{2}{5^1}\)
(C) \(\frac{11}{3^1 5^1 7^1}\)
(D) \(\frac{13}{2^3 7^3}\)
हल :
(B) \(\frac{2}{5^1}\)

प्रश्न 54.
निम्नलिखित में से किस संख्या का दशमलव प्रसार असांत आवर्ती होगा ?
(A) \(\frac {3}{8}\)
(B) \(\frac {13}{125}\)
(C) \(\frac {17}{9}\)
(D) \(\frac {7}{80}\)
हल :
(C) \(\frac {17}{9}\)

प्रश्न 55.
\(\frac {3}{8}\) का दशमलव प्रसार होगा-
(A) 0.375
(B) 0.0375
(C) 3.75
(D) 0.00375
हल :
(A) 0.375

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 56.
निम्नलिखित में से अपरिमेय (irrational) संख्या छाँटिए-
(A) \(\sqrt{9}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{14}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{25}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{36}\)
हल :
(B) \(\sqrt{14}\)

प्रश्न 57.
यदि 124 और 148 का HCF 4 हो, तो उसका LCM क्या होगा ?
(A) 1147
(B) 18352
(C) 4588
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(C) 4588

प्रश्न 58.
\(\frac {17}{8}\) का दशमलव प्रसार होगा-
(A) 0.2125
(B) 0.02125
(C) 2.125
(D) 21.25
हल :
(C) 2.125

प्रश्न 59.
निम्नलिखित में से अपरिमेय (irrational) संख्या छाँटिए-
(A) \(\sqrt{8}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{16}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{49}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{81}\)
हल :
(A) \(\sqrt{8}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ

प्रश्न 60.
यदि 135 और 225 का HCF 45 हो, तो उसका LCM क्या होगा ?
(A) 405
(B) 1125
(C) 675
(D) इनमें से कोई नहीं
हल :
(C) 675

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 1 वास्तविक संख्याएँ Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
If the probability of winning a game is 0.07, what is probability of lossing it?
Solution :
P (winning a game) = 0.07 (given)
P (winning a game) + P (lossing a game) = 1
0.07 + P (lossing a game) = 1
P (lossing a game) = 1 – 0.07
= 0.93

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 2.
If probability of ‘not E’ = 0.95, then find P (E).
Solution :
Probability of “not E’ = 0.95 (given)
P (E) + P (not E) = 1
P (E) + 0.95 = 1
P (E) = 1 – 0.95
P (E) = 0.05

Question 3.
A die is thrown once. Find the probability of getting ‘at most’?
Solution :
A die is thrown once, the possible numbers are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
The numbers ‘at most’ are = 1, 2
Let E be event of getting at most 2
Number of outcomes to favourable event E = 2
P (E) = \(\frac{2}{6}=\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 4.
A dice is thrown once, find the probability of getting
(i) composite number
(ii) a prime numbers.
Solution :
A dice is thrown once, the possible numbers are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
The numbers of all possible outcomes = 6
(i) The composite numbers are 4, 6
Let E1 be event of a getting of composite number
Number of outcomes to favourable event
E1 = 2
P (E1) = \(\frac{2}{6}=\frac{1}{3}\)

(ii) The prime number are 2, 3, 5
Let E2 be event of a getting of a prime number
Number of outcomes to favourable to event
E2= 3
P (E2) = \(\frac{3}{6}=\frac{1}{2}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 5.
A child has a die whose six faces show the letters as shown below:
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability - 1
The die is thrown once. What is the probability of getting
(i) A?
(ii) C?
Solution :
In throwing the die any one of the six faces may come upward
The number of all possible outcomes = 6
(i) Since, there are two faces with letter A
Let E1 be event of getting faces with letter A
Number of outcomes to favourable to event E1 = 2

(ii) The prime numbers from 1 to 20 are 2, 3, 12, 15, 18 i.e. 6 numbers
Let E3 be event of drawn card a divisible by 3
Number of outcomes to favourable to event
P(E3) = \(\frac {3}{10}\)

Question 7.
If a number x is chosen at random from the numbers -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3. What is the probability that x2 ≤ 4?
Solution :
A number x is chosen at random from the numbers -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3
x2 = 9, 4, 1, 0, 1, 4, 9
The number all possible outcomes = 7
The numbers x2 ≤ 4 are 4, 1, 0, 1, 4, 9 i.e. 5 numbers
Let E be event of chosen at random x2 ≤ 4
Number of outcomes to favourable to event E = 5
∴ P (E) = \(\frac {5}{7}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 8.
A pair of dice is thrown once. What is probability of getting a doublet?
Solution :
A pair of dice is thrown once. The number of all possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability - 2
Some number on both dice are:
(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (4, 4), (5, 5), (6, 6) i.e. 6 faces are doublet.
Let E be event of getting the same number on both dice.
Number of outcomes to favourable to event E = 6
∴ P (E) = \(\frac{6}{36}=\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 9.
A piggy bank contains hundred coins of Rs. 1, twenty coins of Rs. 2, fifteen coins of Rs. 5 and ten coins of Rs. 10. If it is equally likely that one coin will fall, when the bank is turned upside down,
(i) will be a Rs. 2 coin,
(ii) will not be Rs. 5 coin.
Solution :
Total number of coins = 100 + 20 + 15 = 145
The number of all possible outcomes 145
(i) Number of Rs 2 coins = 20
Number of favourble outcomes = 20
∴ P (Rs. 2 coins) = \(\frac{20}{145}=\frac{4}{29}\)

(ii) Number of coins other than Rs. 5 coins = 100 + 20 + 10 = 130
Number of favourable outcomes = 130
∴ P (will not be a Rs 5 coins) = \(\frac{130}{145}=\frac{26}{29}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 10.
A die is thrown twice. Find the probability that (i) 5 will come up at least once. (ii) 5 will not come up either time.
Solution :
A die is thrown twice. The number of all possible outcomes 36
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability - 3
(i) The number 5 will come up at least once are (1, 5), (2, 5), (3, 5), (4, 5), (5, 5), (6, 5), (5, 1), (5, 2), (5, 3), (5, 4), (5, 5), (5, 6) i.e. 11 faces
Let E be the event of getting 5 will come up at least once
∴ Number of outcomes to favourable to event E = 11
∴ P (E) = \(\frac {11}{36}\)

(ii) P (5 will not come up either time)
= 1 – P(E)
= 1 – \(\frac {11}{36}\)
= \(\frac {25}{36}\)

Question 11.
The probability of selecting a blue marble at random from a jar that contains only blue, black and green marbles is. The prolability of selecting a black marble at random from the same jar is. If the jar contains 11 green marbles, find the total number of marbles in the jar.
Solution :
Let the number of marbles of blue and black be x and y respectively.
Total number of marbles = x + y + 11
Number of all possible outcomes = x + y +11
According to question
P (black marbles) = \(\frac {1}{4}\) (given)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability - 4
Putting the value of y in the equ. (2), we get
x = \(\frac{5+11}{4}=\frac{16}{4}\) = 4
Hence, total number of marbles in the jar
= 4 + 5 + 11
= 20

Question 12.
A card is drawn at random from a well shuffled deck of playing cards. Find the probability that the card drawn is :
(i) a card of space or an ace
(ii) a black king
(iii) neither a jack nor a king
(iv) either a king or a queen
Solution :
Total playing cards = 52
Number of all possible outcomes = 52
(i) Number of cards of spade or an ace = 13 + 3 = 16
Number of favourable outcomes = 16
∴ P (spade or an ace) = \(\frac {16}{52}\) = \(\frac {4}{13}\)

(ii) Number of black king cards = 2
Number of favourable outcomes = 2
∴ P (a black king) = \(\frac {2}{52}\) = \(\frac {1}{26}\)

(iii) Number of cards of Jack or King = 4 + 4 = 8
Number of cards other than Jack and King = 52 – 8 = 44
Number of favourable outcomes = 44
∴ P (neither jack or king) = \(\frac {44}{52}\) = \(\frac {11}{13}\)

(iv) Number of cards of either a king or a queen = 4 + 4 = 8
Number of cards other than Jack amd King = 8
Number of favourable outcomes = 8
∴ P (either a king or a queen) = \(\frac {8}{52}\) = \(\frac {2}{13}\).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 13.
The king, queen and jack of clubs are removed. The remaining cards are mixed together and then a card is drawn at random from it. Find the probability of getting (i) a face card (ii) a card of heart (iii) a card of clubs (iv) a queen of diamond.
Solution :
Since, king, queen and jack of clubs are removed from a deck of 52 cards.
∴ Number of all possible outcomes
= 52 – 3 = 49
(i) Number of face cards = 12 – 3 = 9
Number of favourable outcomes = 9
∴ P (a face card) = \(\frac {9}{49}\)

(ii) Number of cards of heart in deck = 13
Number of favourable outcomes = 13
∴ P (a card of heart) = \(\frac {13}{49}\)

(iii) Number of cards of clubs 13 – 3 = 10
Number of favourable outcomes = 10
∴ P (a card of clubs) = \(\frac {10}{49}\)

(iv) There is only one queen of diamond number of favourable outcomes = 1
∴ P (a queen of diamond) = \(\frac {1}{49}\)

Question 14.
All red face cards are removed from a pack of playing cards. The remaining cards are well shuffled and them a card is drawn at random from them. Find the probability that the drawn card is (i) a red card (ii) a face card and (iii) a card of clubs.
Solution :
Since, all red face cards are removed from a pack of playing cards.
Remaining cards = 52 – 6 = 46
Number of all possible outcomes = 46
(i) Remaining red cards = 26 – 6 = 20
Number of favourable outcomes = 20
P (a red card) = \(\frac {20}{46}\) = \(\frac {10}{23}\)

(ii) Number of face cards = 6
Number of favourable outcomes = 6
P (a face card) = \(\frac {6}{46}\) = \(\frac {3}{23}\)

(iii) Number of cards of clubs = 13
Number of favourable outcomes = 13
P (a card of club) = \(\frac {13}{46}\)

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
Experiments which have not fixed results experiment are called ______ experiment.
Solution :
Random

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 2.
An event having only one _______ called an elementary event.
Solution :
outcome

Question 3.
The possible outcomes for a given event are called _______ outcomes.
Solution :
favourable

Question 4.
King, Queen and Jack are called ______ cards.
Solution :
face

Question 5.
The total number of non-face cards are ______ .
Solution :
40

Question 6.
Cards of spaced and clubs are ______ cards.
Solution :
black

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 7.
Value of probability of an event cannot be _______ or greater than 1.
Solution :
negative.

Multiple Choice Questions

Choose the correct answer each of the following :

Question 1.
Cards bearing numbers 2, 3, 4, ……. 11 are kept in a bag. A card is drawn at random from the bag. The probability of getting a card with a prime number is :
(a) \(\frac {1}{2}\)
(b) \(\frac {2}{5}\)
(c) \(\frac {3}{10}\)
(d) \(\frac {5}{9}\)
Solution :
(a) \(\frac {1}{2}\)

Numbers are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1
Prime numbers are, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11 = 5
p(E) = \(\frac{5}{10}=\frac{1}{2}\)
So, correct choice is (a)

Question 2.
If an event cannot occur, then its probability is :
(a) 1
(b) \(\frac {3}{4}\)
(c) \(\frac {1}{2}\)
(d) 0
Solution :
(d) 0

The event which can not occur is said to be impossible event and probability of impossible event is zero.
So correct option (d) is correct.

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 3.
An event is very unlikely to happen. Its probability is closest to:
(a) 0.0001
(b) 0.001
(c) 0.01
(d) 0·1
Solution :
(a) 0.0001

In an event is vary unlikely to happen, its probability should be quite small.
Hence the option (a) is correct.

Question 4.
Which of the following cannot be probability of an event?
(a) 5%
(b) 0.9
(c) 1·1
(d) 0.1
Solution :
(c) 1·1

The probability lies between 0 and 1 so correct choice is (c).

Question 5.
The probability of certain event is :
(a) 1
(b) 0
(c) \(\frac {1}{2}\)
(d) None of these
Solution :
(a) 1

Question 6.
The probability of an impossible event is :
(a) \(\frac {1}{3}\)
(b) 0
(c) 1
(d) None of these
Solution :
(b) 0

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability

Question 7.
The chance that a non leap year contains 53 sundays is:
(a) \(\frac {2}{7}\)
(b) \(\frac {1}{7}\)
(c) \(\frac {3}{7}\)
(d) \(\frac {1}{365}\)
Solution :
(b) \(\frac {1}{7}\)

Question 8.
The probability that in a family of 3 children there will be at least one boy is:
(a) \(\frac {1}{8}\)
(b) \(\frac {6}{8}\)
(c) \(\frac {4}{8}\)
(d) \(\frac {7}{8}\)
Solution :
(d) \(\frac {7}{8}\)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 15 Probability Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 1.
Explain the functions of the main parts of a human eye along with a diagram.
Answer:
The human eye is one of the most valuable and sensitive sense organs. It enables us to see the wonderful world and its colours.
Structure and working of human eyes:
1. The human eye is the best natural optical instrument whose construction and working can be compared with a camera.

Working of eyes:

1. The light rays coming from the object enter the eye through cornea. The cornea forms a transparent bulge in front of the eye-balls. The eye-ball is almost spherical shaped and has a diameter of about 2.3 cm.

2. Just behind the cornea, there lies a dark muscular diaphragm called ins which controls the amount of light that enters the eye.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

3. There is a hole in the iris which is the aperture of the eye i.e. the pupil of eye.

  • The size of this aperture or pupil is controlled by iris.

4. After passing through the pupil, the light rays are incident on the eye-lens.
The eye lens is a convex lens made of transparent jelly like material.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 1

5. Ciliary muscles hold the eye lens.

  • Ciliary muscles change the thickness of the eye lens while focusing. In other words, the focal length of eye lens can be changed by changing its shape with the help of ciliary muscles. This helps in proper viewing of the objects.

6. The screen on which the image is formed in the eye is called retina.

  • The retina is a delicate membrane having a large number of light sensitive cells.
  • When light rays falls on retina, its light sensitive cells generate electrical signals.

7. The retina sends these signals to the brain through optic nerve.

  • The brain interprets the image of the object. The eye lens forms an inverted real image of the objects on the retina.
  • This interpretation allows us to see the objects.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 2.
Explain accommodation power of an eye.
Answer:
Accommodation power of an eye:
1. The ability of the eye lens to adjust its focal length as per requirement so that objects can be seen clearly is called accommodation power of an eye.
2. With the help of ciliary muscles, an eye can focus the images of the distant objects as well as the near by objects on its retina by changing the focal length of its lens.
3. When the eyes are looking at a distant object, the ciliary muscles are relaxed, the lens is thin and focal length is more. This enables eye to see the distant object clearly.
4. Similarly when the ciliary muscles contract, the curvature of the eye lens increase and focal length decreases. This enables to see nearby objects clearly.

Question 3.
Explain Near point of an eye and far point of an eye.
Answer:
(i) Near point of an eye :

  • The minimum distance at which the objects can be seen clearly without contracting the eye lens
    i. e. without any strain is called the least distance of the distinct vision or near point of an eye.
  • For a young adult having normal vision, the near point of the eye is 25 cm.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 2

(ii) Far point of an eye :

  • The farthest distance up to which the eye can see objects clearly is called far point of an eye.
  • The farthest point of a person with normal vision lies at an infinite distance. This is so because the maximum distance an individual can see cannot be measured.
  • Thus, a person with normal vision can see objects clearly from 25 cm to infinite distance.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 4.
How do ciliary muscles help to see nearby and far objects?
Answer:
1. The lens of our eyes is made up of a fibrous jelly-like material. Because the lens is made with such flexible material its shape or say curvature can be changed while seeing the object. The ciliary muscles have the ability to change the curvature and hence the focal length of the eyes.

2. When the ciliary muscles are in relaxed position, the lens remains thin. So, the focal length of the lens increases and we can see far-off objects clearly.

3. When we look at objects closer to us (for example, while reading), the ciliary muscles contract. This increases the curvature of the eye lens and the lens become thicker. The focal length decreases and so we are able to see nearby objects clearly.

Question 5.
What is cataract?
Answer:
1. Sometimes, in old aged people, the crystalline lens of the eyes becomes milky and cloudy.
2. As a result, the vision becomes hazy or even opaque due to the formation of a membrane over the lens. This condition is called cataract.
3. Cataract causes partial or complete loss of vision. The vision can be restored through cataract surgery-

Question 6.
How does defect of vision occur? Name the different types of defects of vision.
Answer:
1. The light rays coming from an object passes through the eye lens and forms an image on the retina of the eye.
2. To see objects clearly, image should be formed exactly on retina.
3. For this, the ciliary muscles in the eye change the thickness of the eye lens which results in the change of focal length of the eye.
4. When thickness of this lens does not change with respect to the object distance, the object cannot be seen properly. This is known as defect of vision.
5. The vision becomes blurred due to such refractive defects.

Types of defect of vision:

  • Near sightedness or Myopia
  • Far sightedness or Hypermetropia
  • Presbyopia

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 7.
What is the cause of short (near) sightedness in eye ? How can short sightedness defect be removed ? OR Write a short note on near sightedness or myopia.
Answer:
1. To see distant objects, the eye lens should become thin.
2. When the lens is unable to do so, the light rays converge more than they should. So, the image gets formed before the retina rather than on it. Hence, distant objects cannot be seen clearly.
3. This defect is known as near sightedness or myopia. Myopia arises due to

  • Excessive curvature of the lens or
  • Elongation of the eye ball.

4. To correct this defect, concave lens of appropriate focal length is used.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 3

Question 8.
Write a short note on far sightedness (hypermetropia).
Answer:
1. If eye lens does not become thick as per the requirement, then the rays coming from nearby objects gets less converged and hence are focused behind the retina.
2. Due to this, the image is formed behind the retina and not exactly on the retina. Hence, nearby objects cannot be seen clearly.
3. The near point for person suffering from such defects is more than the normal near point of 25 cm. So, he has to keep a reading material at a distance much beyond 25 cm for reading comfortably.
4. This type of defect is known as far sightedness or hypermetropia.
5. This defect occurs due to less convergence of the light rays.
6. To correct this defect, convex lens of appropriate focal length is used.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 4

Question 9.
Write a short note on aging-eye (presbyopia).
Answer:
Presbyopia:
1. Presbyopia which literally means aging eye’, is an age related eye condition which makes it difficult to see objects that are too close.
2. As a person grows older, the power of accommodation of an eye usually decreases.
3. The near point of aged people recedes and they find It difficult to see nearby objects clearly without spectacles. Such a defect is called presbyopia.
4. This defect arises due to weakened ciliary muscles and loss of elasticity of eye lens.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 5

5. At times, people also find it difficult to see even distant objects without spectacles i.e. they suffer from both myopia as well as hypermetropia. Vision of such people can be cured using spectacles of bifocal lens.
6. The upper part of bifocal lens is made up of concave lens and its lower part is made up of convex lens.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 10.
Enlist the defects of vision in human eyes and their remedies.
Answer:

Defects of visionRemedies
1. Near sightedness (Myopia)Using concave lens of appropriate focal length can cure it.
2. Far sightedness (Hypermetropia)Using convex lens of appropriate focal length can cure it.
3. PresbyopiaUsing spectacles of bifocal lens i.e. convex and concave together can cure it.

Question 11.
What is a prism? Draw its diagram.
Answer:
Prism:
1. A prism is a portion of a transparent medium bounded by two plane faces inclined to each other at a certain angle.
2. As shown in the figure, the prism has two triangular bases and three rectangular lateral surfaces (or faces). These surfaces are inclined to each other.
3. The angle between the two lateral faces is called the angle of prism.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 7

Question 12.
Draw a ray diagram to show the path of a light ray that enters the glass prism obliquely. Label on it the angle of incidence and angle of deviation.
Answer:
1. The figure here shows the principle section ABC of a glass prism.
2. Ray PQ is an incident ray on face AB.
3. On entering the denser medium (grass) from rarer medium (air), the ray PQ bends towards the normal along the path QR. This means ray PQ got refracted.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 9
4. Ray QR again undergoes refraction when it hits face AC. The ray now travels from denser medium to rarer medium (air). Hence, it bends away from the normal. It emerges out as ray RS.
5. Angle ‘D’ between the incident ray PO and the emergent ray is called the angle of deviation i.e. the angle at which the incident ray deviates.
6. Angle ‘e’ made by the emergent ray with the normal to the retracting face ‘AC’ is called the angle of emergence. An important result is – i + e = A + D i.e. Angle of incidence + Angle of emergence = Angle of prism + Angle of deviation

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 13.
What is dispersion of light? Which are the colours of the spectrum obtained from the dispersion through a glass prism?
Answer:
Dispersion of light:
1. Splitting of white light into its seven constituent colours on passing through a transparent medium like a glass prism is called dispersion of light.
2. When white light is incident on a prism, the prism decomposes the white light and hence a band of seven colours is obtained on the screen.
3. The band of these colours is known as spectrum.
On the screen, we get a band of seven colours in the following order from bottom to top:
Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange and Red (VIBGYOR)

Question 14.
What is the reason behind formation of spectrum and refraction of light into seven colours?
Answer:
1. All the constituent colours of a white light have saine velocity in vacuum. However, when white light passes through a transparent medium like glass, water, glycerin, etc., velocity of the constituent colour changes and due to this, deviation of the different constituent colours occurs at different angles.
2. Each colour has a unique refractive index. Hence, the seven colours of the spectrum get refracted in different proportions.

Example:

  • The velocity of violet light is least and so it bends the most.
  • The velocity of red light is highest and so it bends the least.
  •  Hence, in a spectrum of prism, red colour is at the top while violet colour is at the bottom of the spectrum.

Question 15.
Explain the dispersion of white light by a glass prism using necessary figure. OR Explain
Answer:
1. Take two identical prisms P1 and P2 having same angles.
2. Arrange these prisms as shown in the figure.
3. Incident a beam of white light on prism P1.
4. The light coming out of the prism P1 will consist of seven colours.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 10

5. Arrange prism P2 if such a way that the band of seven colours of prism P1 falls properly on P2 and finally gives white beam of light on a screen.
6. From this experiment, Newton established that a white light is composed of seven constituent colours.
7. This way we can understand the structure of white light through the phenomenon of dispersion of light.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 16.
Explain formation of a rainbow with a neat diagram.
Answer:
Rainbow:
1. A rainbow is a natural spectrum visible in the sky after rain shower.
2. Rainbow is formed when the water droplets present in the atmosphere disperse the sunlight tailing on diem.
3. Note that a rainbow is always formed in the direction opposite to that of the sun.

Formation:

1. When sunlight falls on the atmospheric water drops, they first disperse the incident light and then reflect it internally (not necessarily total internal reflection).
2. Finally the light gets refracted again while it is coming out of rain drops.
3. We see different colours in a rainbow because light enters into our eye through dispersion and internal reflection.
4. In a rainbow, water droplets act as small prisms.
5. The colour at the bottom of the rainbow is violet while the top most colour is red. Such a rainbow is called a primary rainbow.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 11

Question 17.
Draw the structure of rainbow formation.
Answer:
Rainbow:
1. A rainbow is a natural spectrum visible in the sky after rain shower.
2. Rainbow is formed when the water droplets present in the atmosphere disperse the sunlight tailing on diem.
3. Note that a rainbow is always formed in the direction opposite to that of the sun.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Formation:

1. When sunlight falls on the atmospheric water drops, they first disperse the incident light and then reflect it internally (not necessarily total internal reflection).
2. Finally the light gets refracted again while it is coming out of rain drops.
3. We see different colours in a rainbow because light enters into our eye through dispersion and internal reflection.
4. In a rainbow, water droplets act as small prisms.
5. The colour at the bottom of the rainbow is violet while the top most colour is red. Such a rainbow is called a primary rainbow.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 11

Question 18.
What is atmospheric retraction? Which phenomena results from it?
Atmospheric refraction :
1. Atmosphere consists of layers of different densities spread across it. This means the density of atmosphere is not same everywhere.
2. The layer at lower altitude from the earth has more density than that at the higher altitude.
3. Due to this difference, the refractive index of atmosphere continuously decreases as one moves from lower to higher altitudes.
4. Moreover, the physical conditions of the refracting medium i.e. the atmospheric air keeps on changing. As a result, we feel that the position of an object in the atmosphere is changing.
5. This phenomenon is called atmospheric refraction or the refraction of light by earth’s atmosphere.
6. Phenomena such as twinkling of stars, early sunrise and delayed sunset occur due to this effect.

Question 19.
Write a note on twinkling of stars. OR Stars seem higher than they actually are. Explain. OR Explain twinkling of stars in detail.
Answer:
1. Density of atmosphere is not uniform everywhere.
2. There are different layers of atmosphere with different refractive indices.
3. Atmospheric layer at lower altitude is colder and denser compared to layer at higher altitude.
4. When the light travels from star at rarer medium towards earth at denser medium, in bends towards normal.
5. Thus, due to refraction towards normal,the position of star appears higher from its actual position.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 12

Reason for twinkling of stars:
1. The physical condition of refracting medium .e. the earth’s atmosphere is not stationary. Hence, the position of star seems to be changing continuously.
2. This results in the continuous change in the path of the rays coming from the stars and continuous change in the intensity of light. This leads to twinkling of stars.
3. Light from a star is refracted or say bent as it leaves the space and enters the earth’s atmosphere.
4. Air at higher altitude is rare whereas near the earth’s surface it is dense.
5. As a result, when light from the star comes down, the dense air bends the light more.
6. Due to this, refraction of star’s light, the star appears to be at a higher position than it actually is.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 20.
Why do we experience early sunrise and delayed sunset when actually it is not so? OR Our day is longer by four minutes. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Actual sunrise means actual appearance of the sun at the horizon.
2. When the sun is slightly below the horizon,the sun rays pass from less dense air to more dense air in the atmosphere and get refracted downwards.
3. Due to this atmospheric refraction, the sun appears to be raised above the horizon when actually it is still slightly below the horizon. Thus, we can see sunrise two minutes before it actually comes to horizon.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 13
4. In the same way, when sun is setting i.e. when it moves below the horizon, it is seen to us for two minutes.
5. In total, 2 minutes early sunrise and 2 minutes delayed sunset make our day longer by four minutes.
6. Thus, we experience early sunrise and delayed sunset when actually it is not so.

Question 21.
What is scattering of light? On what factors does it depend?
Answer:
Scattering of light:

  • The deflection of light by minute particles and molecules in all the directions is known as scattering of light.
  • The colour of scattered light depends upon the size of scattering particles.
  • For example, minute particles scatter light of small wavelength such as blue colour.
  • Whereas bigger particles scatter light of larger wavelength such as red colour.
  • If the size of scattering particles is much bigger, the scattered light appears white.

Question 22.
Describe Tyndall effect.
Answer:
Tyndall effect:
1. The earth’s atmosphere is a heterogeneous mixture of smoke particles, tiny water droplets and air particles.
2. When light falls on such colloidal particles, a path of light beam becomes visible.
3. This phenomenon is known as Tynciall effect.
4. The light rays reach us after getting deflected in all directions from these particles.
5. Commercially, Tyndall effect helps in determining the density of aerosol and other colloidal particles that are emitted.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 14

Examples:

  • When a fine beam of sun light enters a room filled with smoke through a small hole, a path of light beam can be seen due to Tyndall effect.
  • When sunlight enters a canopy of dense forests, Tyndall effect can be seen due to scattering of light through tiny water droplets of the mist.
  • Sometimes smoke emitted by the combustion of engine oil appears blue in colour.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 23.
Why does clean sky appear blue in colour?
Answer:
1. The sunlight is made up of seven colours.
2. When sunlight passes through the atmosphere, most of the longer wavelength lights such as red, orange, yellow, etc. present in it do not get scattered much by the molecules of the air and other fine particles and hence pass through straight.
3. The shorter wavelength blue light is however scattered all around the sky by air molecules in the atmosphere.
4. The wavelength of red light is about 1.8 times more than that of blue colour.
5. Thus, when sunlight passes through the atmosphere the tine particles in the air scatter blue colour more strongly than red.
6. As a result, the sky appears blue.

Question 24.
Why does sun appear reddish at sunrise and sunset?
Answer:
1. White light coming from the sun has to travel a large distance in the atmosphere before reaching to the observer.
2. During sunrise or sunset, most of the blue colour present in sunlight has been scattered out and it is away from our sight.
3. As a result, only red light remains present in the beam of sunlight and so only red colour reaches our eye.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 15

Question 25.
Why do some people use spectacles with bifocal lenses?
Answer:
1. Some people suffer from near-sightedness (myopia) as well far-sightedness (hypermetropia).
2. Myopia can be cured with concave lens whereas hypermetropia with convex lens. Spectacles with bifocal lens have two lenses namely concave and convex to overcome this problem.
3. Hence, people suffering from both myopia as well as hypermetropia wear bifocal lens.

Question 26.
In the figure, a narrow beam of white light is shown to pass through a triangular glass prism. After passing through the prism it produces a spectrum XV on a screen.
(a) State the colour seen at X and Y.
(b) Why do different colours of white light bend through different angles with respect to the incident beam of light?
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 16
(a) ‘X’ represents violet colour and ‘Y’ represents red.
(b) The refractive index of glass is different for different colours.
Hence, the different colours present in the white light bend at different angles at the prism.

Question 27.
A beam of white light falling on a glass prism gets split up into seven colours marked 1 to 7 as shown in the diagram.
A student makes the following statements about the spectrum observed on the screen:
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 17
(a) The colours at positions marked 3 and 5 are similar to the colour of the sky and the core of a hard boiled egg respectively. Is the statement made by the student correct or incorrect? Justify.
(b) Which two positions correspond closely to the colour of the colour of —
(i) A solution of potassium permanganate? (ii) ‘Danger’ or stop signal lights?
Answer:
The colours of the spectrum observed on the screen are in the order:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 18

(a) The statement made by the student is incorrect. The colour at position 3 is yellow while the sky is blue. The colour at position 5 is blue while the core of the boiled egg is yellow.
(b) (i) Solution of potassium permanganate is violet coloured. Position 7 corresponds to this colour.
(ii) Danger or stop signal lights are of red colour. Position 1 corresponds to this colour.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 28.
Stars and planets both belong to space, even then stars twinkle but planets do not. Give reason.
Answer:
1. The stars are very far from us and so they may be considered as the point sources of light.
2. Compared to stars, planets are much nearer to the earth and so planets appear quite big.
3. Hence, planets cannot be considered a single point source of light but collection of a very large number of point sources of light.
4. Thus, on the whole, the brightness of the planet always remains the same and it does not appear to twinkle. But the atmospheric refraction affects stars more since they are point sources of light and so stars twinkle.

Question 29.
Why are danger signal lights red in colour? OR Signal lights used to indicate danger are red in colour. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Wavelength of red colour is quite large. It does, not allow light to scatter much.
2. Thus when red coloured light is used, it gets scattered least in fog or smoke and so it can be seen from a long distance.
3. Hence, red coloured light is used to indicate danger.

Question 30.
There was a beautiful village in a Himalayan valley. When trains passed from the village, the whistle and the sound of train, mixed with the sound of waterfall, seemed to be very pleasant to everyone. Children loved this and so they used to play near the railway track. On one foggy day, a group of children found that a fishplate was missing from the track. This worried all the villagers. One of the children Raghav placed his ear on the railway track and tried to know if a train was coming. He asked his friends to inform the nearest railway station and he himself put-off his red shirt and started running towards the train, waving his red shirt. The engine driver sensed some danger and stopped the train. A major accident was averted.

Questions:

  1. Name the two physical phenomena of science used by Raghav.
  2. Why did Raghav use his red shirt instead of any other coloured shirt or cloth?
  3. What moral values do you learn from Raghav?

Answers:

  1. (a) Sound travels through a medium. (b) Scattering of light
  2. The red light is least scattered by fog or smoke. Hence, it can be seen from a large distance.
  3. (a) Proper knowledge of science and its right application.
    (b) Concern for others and awareness about things.

Question 31.
Four friends went bicycling in a park. It was monsoon and the weather was extremely pleasant. They played several games. Suddenly, Shweta observed seven colours in the sky. She said to others, “Look! What a beautiful rainbow!” Shivani, one of the four friends, asked her what a rainbow was. Shweta explained about it and gave other details to all. Everyone got delighted and felt thankful.

Questions:

  1. What would have been the position of the sun when Shweta was facing the rainbow?
  2. Which device can be used to obtain such a phenomenon at home?
  3. What moral value do you learn from Shweta?

Answers:

  1. The sun was behind Shweta.
  2. A small prism can be used to form a rainbow at home.
  3. Shweta delivered the values of sharing knowledge and helping others.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 32.
Bhavan studies in class 5. He sits in 10th bench. He is extremely fond of junk food and mostly carries food items such as pasta, maggi, etc. in his lunch. Off late his teacher finds that Bhavin faces difficulty In reading the blackboard text. The teacher advises Bhavin’s mother that he should only bring healthy lunch with loads of green vegetables and fruits.

Questions:

  1. Name the eye defect Bhavin is suffering from.
  2. What are two possible deformities related to his eye defect?
  3. What values do you learn from this?

Answers:

  1. Bhavin is suffering from myopia (near-sightedness)
  2. Increased thinness of lens due to excessive curvature of the eye lens and eyeball defect due to elongation of the eyeball.
  3. The teacher displayed the values of concern and awareness.

Very Short Answer Type Question :

Question 1.
State the structure of cornea.
Answer:
Cornea has a transparent bulged structure. It is located at the front of the eye ball.

Question 2.
Give an Idea about structure of eye ball.
Answer:
Eye ball is nearly a spherical shaped structure having a diameter of about 2.3 cm.

Question 3.
What is the role of eye lens?
Answer:
The eye lens does the task of adjusting focal length required to focus objects at different distances on retina.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 4.
What is Iris?
Answer:
Iris is a dark muscular structure lying behind the cornea. It controls the size of the pupil.

Question 5.
How are functions of cornea and pupil related?
Answer:
It is cornea that allows the light to enter but it is pupil that regulates and controls the amount of light that should enter the eye.

Question 6.
What kind of image is created on retina?
Answer:
Real and inverted.

Question 7.
What do the light-sensitive cells located on retina do?
Answer:
When light falls on light-sensitive cells, the cells get activated. They then generate electric signals and send them to the brain.

Question 8.
What role does the brain play In vision?
Answer:
The brain interprets the electric signals sent by the retina. It then processes them so that we can see the objects.

Question 9.
What is power of accommodation?
Answer:
The ability of the eye lens to adjust its focal length as per the requirement so that objects can be seen clearly is called accommodation power of the eye.

Question 10.
What is the farthest distance upto which the eye can see objects clearly called?
Answer:
Far point of an eye

Question 11.
State the distance of near point and far point of the eye.
Answer:
Near point: Minimum distance 25 cm, Far point: Infinite

Question 12.
How many types of common defects of vision arise in eye? Name them.
Answer:
Myopia, Hypermetropia, Presbyopia

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 13.
What is cataract?
Answer:
Sometimes, the crystalline lens of people of old age becomes milky and dowdy which results in partial or complete loss of vision. This is called cataract.

Question 14.
What causes refractive defect of vision?
Answer:
When the thickness of the eye lens cannot be adjusted to clearly focus the object, the object cannot be seen properly. This is the cause of refractive defect of vision.

Question 15.
State the causes of hypermetropia.
Answer
(i) The focal length of the eye lens is too long.
(ii) The eye ball has become too small.

Question 16.
What is presbyopla? What causes it?
Answer:
Presbyopia is an age related eye condition which makes it difficult to see the objects that are too close; Weakened ciliary muscles and loss of elasticity of eye lens.

Question 17.
How can one get rid of presbyopia?
Answer:
By wearing bi-focal lens i.e. a lens consisting of both concave and convex lens.

Question 18.
How does the focal length of the eye lens change when we shift looking from a distant object to a nearby object?
Answer:
The focal length of the eye lens decreases.

Question 19.
Why does it take some time to see the objects In a dim room when we enter the room from bright sunlight outside?
Answer:
The light.sensitive cells of retina are less sensitive in dim light. Hence, it takes time to get the cells activated and see the object.

Question 20.
What is angle of prism?
Answer:
The angle between two rectangular lateral faces of the prism is called the angle of prism.

Question 21.
What is dispersion of light?
Answer:
The splitting of white light into its various components or say 7 colours is called dispersion of light.

Question 22.
What made Newton believe that the sunlight is made up of seven colours?
Answer:
Newton allowed sunlight to pass through one prism. He then focused the spectrum on an inverted prism. On this he got the sunlight again. This made him believe that sunlight is made of seven colours.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 23.
What determines the colour of an object?
Answer:
The colour of light which Is reflected from the object

Question 24.
Why does green leaf looks green?
Answer:
(A) It absorbs all colours except green

Question 25.
Answer the following questions:
(i) An object reflects all the colours of incident light. What should be the colour of that object? An object absorbs all the colours of incident light. What should be the colour of that object?
Answer:
(i) White; (ii) Black

Question 26.
Why danger signals and signs are of red colour?
Answer:
Red colour has the largest wavelength and it is least scattered by fog and dust. Hence, its visibility is the highest. As a result

Question 27.
What Is a rainbow? What causes It?
Answer:
A rainbow is a natural spectrum appearing in the sky after the raw. Dispersion of sunlight by tiny water droplets.

Question 28.
State two examples where in you can see the rainbow even on a sunny day i.e. other than during monsoon.
Answer:
We can see a rainbow through a waterfall and through a fountain when the sun is behind us.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Question 29.
What is internal reflection?
Answer:
When a ray of light enters a medium from another (example: from air to water droplet) and gets reflected within that second medium before moving out of that medium then such a reflection is called internal reflection.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World 19

Question 30.
What is atmospheric retraction?
Answer:
Atmospheric retraction is the deviation of light or other electromagnetic waves from a straight line as it passes through the atmosphere due to the variation in air density.

Question 31.
Why is the density of earth’s atmosphere non-uniform everywhere?
Answer:
Because it consists of layers of different densities

Question 32.
Define Tyndall effect.
Answer:
The scattering of light in the nature due to small particles present in the atmosphere is called Tyndall effect.

Question 33.
Why can we see sun about two minutes before the actual sunrise?
Answer:
Because of the refraction of the light by atmosphere

Question 34.
Why does the sky appear dark to passengers flying at very high altitudes?
Answer:
Scattering of light is not possible at such heights. Hence, ………………….

Fill in the Blanks:

1. The light rays coming from the object first enter the eye through ……………
Answer:
Cornea

2. Retina is a …………. type of screen.
Answer:
Light-sensitive

3. An aperture of an eye behind the cornea at the center is known as ………………
Answer:
Pupil

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

4. Through the optic nerves, the electrical signals are sent to the …………..
Answer:
Brain

5. The focal length of tens changes with the change in the ……….. of an eye lens.
Answer:
Curvature

6. The ability of an eye to adjust focal length of the eye lens as per requirement is known as of ……………. an eye.
Answer:
Accommodation power

7. Least distance of distinct vision is also called ……………
Answer:
Near point of an eye

8. Myopia is also known as ……………….
Answer:
Near sightedness

9. If lens remain thin and does not become thick as per requirement, rays coming from nearby object are less refracted and are focused behind…
Answer:
The retina

10. The angle of incidence at which the angle of refraction is 900 is called …………
Answer:
Critical angle

11. Splitting of white light into seven colours is known as …………….
Answer:
Dispersion

12. In ………….. medium, violet coloured light is deviated maximum.
Answer:
Transparent

13. Recombining the seven colours of spectrum gives …………. colour.
Answer:
White

14. The deflection of light by minute particles and molecules in all the directions is known as …………….
Answer:
Scattering of light

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

15. If the size of scattering particle is much bigger the scattering light appears ………….. coloured.
Answer:
White

16. When Newton further tried to split the colours of the spectrum of white light by using another prism
Answer:
He could not get any more colours.

17. Any light tat gives a spectrum similar to that of sunlight is often referred as ………….
Answer:
White light

18. In total refractions and reflections take place in the water droplet for the formation of a rainbow.
Answer:
Three

19. In Tyndall effect, the light rays reach us after deflection of light in all the direction from …………….
Answer:
Colloidal particles

20. The time difference between the actual sunset and apparent sunset is about …………….
Answer:
2 minutes

True Or False

1. A muscular diaphragm behind the cornea is known as pupil. — False
2. The ciliary muscles helps in changing the thickness of the eye lens. — True
3. If eye lens do not become thin as per requirement but remain thick only, then rays coming from distant object after being refracted by lens can be focused before the retina. — True
4. In bifocal lens, the lower part of a small circular section is made up of convex lens. — True
5. Contact lens is widely used to remove the defect of eye. — True
6. Cataract causes only partial loss of vision. — False
7. Myopia can be cured with convex lens. — False
8. A water droplet can act like a small prism. — True
9. Atmospheric layer at lower altitude is colder and denser as compared to layer at higher altitude. — True
10. When the sun is below the horizon, sunhiit reaches to our eyes after being reflected in the atmosphere. — False

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World

Match the Following 

Column I.Column II.
(1) Myopia(p) The focal length of the eye lens increases
(2) Hypermetropia(q) The focal length of the eye lens decreases
(3) Presbyopia(r) The power of accommodatior of the eye decreases with ageing

Answer: 1-q, 2-p, 3-r

Column I. Column II.
(1) Twinkle of stars(a) Tiny water droplets present (or suspended) in the atmosphere
(2) Blue coloured sky(b) Band of colours
(3) Rainbow(c) Scattering of light
(4) Spectrum(d) Uneven atmosphere

Answer: 1-d, 2-c, 3-a, 4-b

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 11 Human Eye and Colourful World Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Short/Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Per day expenses of 25 families of the frequency distribution of a Dhani of a village is given as follows:
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 1
Find the mean expense of families by direct method.
Solution :
We prepare the cumulative frequency table as given :

Per day expense (in ₹)Number of families (fi)class mark (xi)fixi
25-3533090
35-45740280
45-55650300
55-65660360
65-75370210
TotalΣfi = 25Σfixi = 1240

∴ mean = \(=\frac{\Sigma f_i x_i}{\Sigma f_i}\)
= \(\frac {1240}{25}\)
= ₹ 49.6
Hence, mean expense of families = ₹ 49.6

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 2.
The following distribution shows the daily pocket allowance of children of a locality.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 2
Find the mean daily pocket allowance by using appropriate method.
Solution :

Daily pocket allowance (in ₹)Number of children (fi)class mark (xi)fixi
10-2031545
20-30525125
30-40435140
40-50745315
50-60655330
TotalΣfi = 25Σfixi = 955

∴ mean = \(=\frac{\Sigma f_i x_i}{\Sigma f_i}\)
= \(\frac {955}{25}\) = ₹ 38.2
Hence, mean daily pocket allowance = ₹ 38.2

Question 3.
The marks obtained by 110 students in an examination are given below :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 3
Find the mean marks of students.
Solution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 4
Hence, mean marks of students = 44.82

Question 4.
The following data gives the information on the observed life times (in hours) of 200 electrical components.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 5
Determine the modal lifetimes of the components.
Solution :
The class interval 80 – 100 has maximum frequency. So, it is the modal class.
∴ l = 80, f1 = 65, f0 = 38, f2 = 24, h = 20
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 6
Hence, modal lifetimes of components = 87.94 hours.

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 5.
Find the mode of the following distribution.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 7
Solution:
The class interval 35 – 40 has maximum frequency. So, it is the modal class.
∴ l = 35, f1 = 50, f0= 34, f2 = 42, h = 5
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 8

Question 6.
Find the mode of the following frequency distribution.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 9
Solution :
The class interval 30 – 40 has maximum frequency. So, it is the modal class.
∴ l = 30, f1 = 16, f0 = 10, f2 = 12, h = 10
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 10

Question 7.
If the median of the following frequency distribution is 32.5. Find the values of f1 and f2.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 11
Solution :
Let us prepare the cumulative frequency distribution table as given below.

Class IntervalFrequencyCumulative frequency (c.f.)
0 – 10f1f1
10 – 205f1 + 5
20 – 309f1 + 14
30 – 4012f1 + 26
40 – 50f2f1 + f2 + 26
50 – 603f1 + f2 + 29
60 – 702f1 + f2 + 31
Totaln = Σfi = 40

Here, n = 40
⇒ fi + f2 + 31 = 40
⇒ fi + f2 = 9
Median is 32.5, which lies in the class interval 30 – 40, So the median class is 30 – 40.
l = 30, f = 12, cf = f1 + 14, h = 10
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 12
Putting the value of f1 in equation (1), we get
3 + f2 = 9
f2 = 6
Hence, f1 = 3, f2 = 6

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 8.
On the annual day of school agewise participation of students is given in the following distribution table.

Age (in years)Number of students
Less than 62
Less than 86
Less than 1012
Less than 1222
Less than 1442
Less than 1667
Less than 1876

Find the median of students and get the median graphically.
Solution :
We convert the cumulative frequency table into depicting class intervals with their respective frequencies as given below :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 13
\(\frac {n}{2}\) = \(\frac {76}{2}\) = 38
But 38 comes under the cumulative frequency 42 and the class interval against cumulative frequency 42 is 12 – 14. So, it is the median class.
Here, l = 12, f = 20, cf = 22, h = 2
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 14
We plots the points (6, 2), (8, 6), (10, 12), (12, 22), (14, 22), (16, 67), (18, 76) on the graph paper joining these points with a free hand to get less than curve as shown in a graph. We have n = 38.

Now, locate the point on the ogive where, ordinate is 38. The n coordinate corresponding to this ordinate is 13.6. Therefore required median on the graph is 13.6.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 15

Question 9.
The following table gives production on yield per hectare of wheat of 100 farms of a village.

Production YieldNumber of farms
40 – 454
45 – 506
50 – 5516
55 – 6020
60 – 6530
65 – 7024

Change the distribution of a more than type distribution and draw its ogive.
Solution :
We prepare the cumulative frequency table by more than type method as given :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 16
\(\frac {n}{2}\) = \(\frac {100}{2}\) = 50
We plots the points (40, 100), (45, 96), (50, 90), (55, 74), (60, 54) and (65, 24) on the graph paper. Joining these points with a free hand to obtain more than type ogive curve as shown in a graph.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 17

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 10.
By changing the following frequency distribution to less than type distribution, draw idts ogive.

ClassesNumber of farmers
0 – 156
15 – 308
30 – 4510
45 – 606
60 – 754

Solution :
We prepare the cumulative frequency table by less than type method as given :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 18
We plots the points (15, 6), (30, 14), (45, 24), (60, 30) and (75, 34) on the graph paper. Joining these points with a free hand to obtain less than type ogive curve as shown in graph.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 19

Question 11.
Given below is a frequency distribution table showing daily income of 100 workers of a factory.

Daily income of workers (in ₹)Number of Workers
200 – 30012
300 – 40018
400 – 50035
500 – 60020
600 – 70015

Convert this table to a cumulative frequency distribution table of more than type.
Solution :
We prepare the cumulative frequency table by more than type method as given :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 20
We plots the points (200, 100), (300, 88), (400, 70), (500, 35) and (600, 15) on the graph paper. Joining these points with a free hand to obtain more than type ogive curve as shown in a graph.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 21

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
The data having more than one mode is called _______ data.
Solution :
multimodal

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 2.
The cumulative frequency table is useful in determining the _______ .
Solution :
median

Question 3.
Each group into which the raw data is condensed is called a _______ .
Solution :
class interval

Question 4.
The ______ between the true upper limit and true lower point of a class is called its class size.
Solution :
difference

Question 5.
_______ of observation is the sum of the values of all the observations divided by the total number of observations.
Solution :
mean

Question 6.
The _______ frequency of a class is the frequency obtained by adding the frequency of all classes preceding the given class.
Solution :
cumulative

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 7.
The data having only one mode is called _____ data.
Solution :
Unimodal

Multiple Choice Questions

Choose the correct answer each of the following:

Question 1.
If xis are the midpoints of the class intervals of grouped data, fis are the corresponding frequencies and \(\bar{x}\) is the mean, then Σ(fixi – \(\bar{x}\)) is equal :
(a) 0
(b) – 1
(c) 1
(d) 2
Solution :
(a) 0

We know that the mean of the data is given by
\(\bar{x}\) = \(\frac{Σfixi}{x}\)
where n = Σfi
∴ Σ(fixi – \(\bar{x}\)) = Σfixi – Σ\(\bar{x}\)
= n\(\bar{x}\) – n\(\bar{x}\)
= 0 [∵ x\(\bar{i}\) = n\(\bar{x}\)]
Hence, correct choice is (a).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 2.
If the mode of a data is 18 and mean is 24, then median is
(a) 18
(b) 24
(c) 22
(d) 21
Solution :
(c) 22

mode = 18, mean = 24,
∵ 3 median = mode + 2 mean
= 18 + 2 (24)
= 18 + 48 = 66
∴ median = \(\frac {66}{3}\) = 22
Hence, correct choice is (c).

Question 3.
Mode of data 2, 3, 5, 2, 3, 6, 5, 2, 2, 5, 7, 4, 4, is:
(a) 5
(b) 3
(c) 2
(d) 4
Solution :
(c) 2

Here frequency of 2 is 4 so mode = 2.
Hence, correct choice is (c).

Question 4.
For the following distribution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 22
The modal class is:
(a) 10-20
(b) 20-30
(c) 30-40
(d) 50-60
Solution :
(c) 30-40

MarksNumber of studentsCF
Below 103 = 33
10 – 2012 – 3 = 912
20 – 3027 – 12  = 1527
30 – 4057 – 27 = 3057
40 – 5075 – 57 = 1875
50 – 6080 – 75 = 580

Here the heighest frequency is 30, which likes in the interval 30 – 40.
Hence correct choice is (c).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 5.
In an arranged discrete series in which total number of observations n is even, median is:
(a) (\(\frac {n}{2}\))th terms
(b) (\(\frac {n}{2}\) + 1)th terms
(c) The mean of (\(\frac {n}{2}\))th term and (\(\frac {n}{2}\) + 1)th term
(d) none of these
Solution :
(c) The mean of (\(\frac {n}{2}\))th term and (\(\frac {n}{2}\) + 1)th term

When n is even then median
The mean of (\(\frac {n}{2}\))th term and (\(\frac {n}{2}\) + 1)th term
So correct choice is (c).

Question 6.
While computing mean of grouped data, we assume that the frequencies are :
(a) evenly distributed over all the classes
(b) centred at the class marks of the classes
(c) centred at the upper limits of the classes
(d) centred at the lower limits of the classes
Solution :
(b) centred at the class marks of the classes

In computing the mean of grouped data, the frequencies are centered at the class marks of the classes.
Hence, the option (b) is correct.

Question 7.
The cumulative frequency table is useful in determining the:
(a) mean
(b) median
(c) mode
(d) all of these
Solution :
(b) median

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics

Question 8.
For the following distribution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics - 23
The sum of lower limits of the median class and modal class is:
(a) 15
(b) 25
(c) 30
(d) 35
Solution :
(b) 25

ClassFrequencyCF
0 – 51010
5 – 101524
10 – 151237
15 – 202057
20 – 25966

Now \(\frac {N}{2}\) = \(\frac {66}{2}\) = 33
Which lies in the interval 10 – 15.
Therefore lower limit of the median class is 10.
The highest frequency is 20, which lies in the interval 15 – 20, therefore lower limit of modal class is 15. Hence required sum is 10 + 15 = 25.
Hence correct choice is (b).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 14 Statistics Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 1.
What is light? How does it enables us to see things?
Answer:
1. Light consists of electro-magnetic waves. These waves produce sensation in our eyes.
2. When light falls on an object let us say a book, or a table, etc, it gets reflected. The reflected light rays reach our eyes and enable us to see the object.

Question 2.
Discuss the nature of light. OR State the basic properties of light.
Answer:
1. Light waves do not require a material medium (such as solid, liquid or gas) for their propagation and hence are called non-mechanical waves.
2. Light waves travel at a speed of 3 x 108 m/s in vacuum.
3. The speed of light waves depend upon the nature of medium through which they pass.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 10
4. In practical terms, a light wave can travel from one point to another. Such a propagation of light waves in one straightline and from one point to another is known as a ‘ray’. Bundle of such rays is known as ‘beam of light’.
5. When light is incident on a surface separating two’ medias such as air and water, then some part of incident light is reflected, some part is transmitted and some part of it is absorbed by that surface.
6. Light which is incident on a completely polished shining plane surface gets reflected whereas light incident on a transparent medium (such as glass) gets refracted and passes through that medium.
7. Due to these properties of light i.e. reflection and refraction, the light rays can be focused by mirrors and lenses respectively.
8. Moreover, due to reflection and refraction of light, real or virtual images are formed.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 3.
What is reflection of light? State its types.
Answer:
Reflection :

  • The phenomenon of sending back the light rays which fall on the surface of an object when light is incident on it, is called reflection of light.
  • For example, when light falls on a plane mirror, the mirror sends it back i.e. reflects it.

Types of reflection:
(A) Regular reflection and
(B) Irregular reflection

Question 4.
Explain the types of reflection.
Answer:
(A) Regular reflection :
When a parallel beam of light falls on a smooth or shining surface, then the reflected beam is also parallel and directed back in a fixed direction. This type of reflection is known as regular reflection. For example, reflection by a mirror.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 11

(B) Irregular (diffused) reflection :
When a parallel beam of light falls on a rough surface i.e. irregular surface, the reflected light is not parallel but spreads over a wide area. This type of reflection is known as irregular reflection. For example, light falling on chair, book, etc. gets reflected and helps us to see these objects.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 5.
Define incident angle and reflection angle. Also state the laws of reflection.
Answer:
Angle of incidence (θi):
The angle that the incident ray makes with normal drawn at the point of incidence is known as incident angle or angle of incidence. It is denoted by θi (θ = theta).

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 12

Angle of reflection (θr):

The angle that the reflected ray makes with normal drawn at the point of reflection is known as reflection angle or angle of reflection, It is denoted by θr

Laws of reflection:
1. The angle of incidence (θi) = the angle of reflection (θr).

2. (a) The incident ray,
(b) the normal to the mirror at the point of incidence and
(c) the reflected ray – all lie in the same plane.

(Note: The laws of reflection are applicable equally to plane as well as spherical mirrors. Moreover they are also applicable to regular as well as irregular surfaces.)

Question 6.
What is an image? Explain the types of images.
Answer:
Image: When a number of rays emerging from a point of an object, after reflection or refraction, ‘meet’ or ‘appear to meet’ at another point, then the point of meeting is called the image of the first point.

Types:
(1) Real image and
(2) Virtual image

(1) Real image: When the rays of light after reflection or refraction ‘actually meet’ at a point, the image formed is called a real image.

  • Real image can be obtained on a screen.
  • Real image is always inverted. For e.g., image formed on cinema screens.

(2) Virtual image: When the rays of light after reflection or refraction ‘do not actually meet’ but ‘appear to meet’ at a point, the image formed is called a virtual image.

  • Virtual image cannot be obtained on a screen.
  • Virtual image is always erect. For e.g., our image formed when we stand in front of a mirror is a virtual image.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 7.
What is a mirror? State Its types.
Answer:
A polished shining surface which reflects almost all the light incident on it is called a mirror.
Types of mirror:
(1) Plane mirror and
(2) Spherical mirror. Further, spherical mirrors are of two types.

They are:

  • Concave mirror and
  • Convex mirror.

Question 8.
Discuss the different types of mirrors.
Answer:
(A) Plane mirror:
1. A plane mirror is a thin, flat and smooth sheet of glass having a shining coat of silver metal on one side.
2. For example, mirror used in vehicles, in dressing tables, etc.
3. When a parallel beam of light rays falls on a plane mirror, it is reflected as a parallel beam.
4. Thus, plane mirror changes only the direction of the incident light rays. It does not converge or diverge them.
(Note: To bring the parallel light rays closer is called converging them where as to spread out is called diverging.)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 13

(B) Spherical mirror:

  • Unlike plane mirrors, spherical (curved) mirrors converge or diverge the parallel light rays incident on them.
  • A spherical mirror is a mirror whose reflecting surface is in fact a part of a hollow sphere of a glass.
  •  When light rays fall on spherical mirrors, they converge or diverge i.e. the incident parallel rays come closer or spread-out unlike plane mirrors where they are just reflected as parallel beams.

Spherical mirrors are of two types :
(i) Concave mirrors and
(ii) Convex mirrors.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 14

Question 9.
Give a brief idea about how a spherical mirror is formed.
Answer:
1. A spherical mirror is a curved mirror (i.e. not a plane mirror).
(Note: Since the spherical mirror is curved, we consider the mirror as cut-out from a sphere. Doing so helps us to understand various terms related to spherical mirrors and image formation through these mirrors.)
2. The simplest spherical mirror is a spoon that we have in our kitchen. The front and back of the spoon behaves like two different types of spherical mirrors giving upward and inverted images.

Types: Spherical mirrors are of two types.

(a) Concave mirror: The spherical mirror in which light rays converge to form an image is called a concave mirror (or converging mirror).
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 15

(b) Convex mirror: A spherical mirror in which light rays diverge to form an image is called a convex mirror (or diverging mirror).
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 16

Question 10.
With the help of a suitable diagram define the following terms for concave and convex mirrors (Spherical mirrors).
Answer:
(1) Centre of curvature (C)
(2) Radius of curvature (R)
(3) Pole (P)
(4) Principal axis
(5) Aperture (MN)
(6) Principle focus (F)
(7) Focal length (f)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 17

1. Centre of curvature (C): The centre of spherical sphere from which a mirror is made is known as centre of curvature (C). (Note: Centre of curvature of a concave mirror lies in front where as in convex mirror it lies behind.) Point C is also called 2F since it lies at double the distance of PR

2. Radius of curvature (R): The radius of spherical sphere i.e. from centre of curvature C to pole P i.e. CP from which a mirror is made is known as radius of curvature (R). Thus CP = R. (Note: CP = 2 times PF and so is also written as 2F.)

3. Pole (P): The centre of reflecting surface i.e. MN is known as pole of mirror (P).

4. Principal axis: The imaginary line passing through the pole (P) and centre of curvature (C) is known as principal axis. A

5. Aperture (MN): The portion of the reflecting surface (mirror) from which the reflection of light actually takes place is known as its aperture MN.

6. PrincIple focus (F): The point (F) on the principle axis where the beam of light parallel to the principle axis either actually converges to or diverges from, after reflection from a mirror is called the principle focus (F).

7. Focal length (f): The distance between the pole (P) and principle focus (F) is called focal length (f). Thus, f = PF.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 11.
How can you study image formed by a mirror (or a lens)?
Answer:
1. The image of an object formed by a spherical mirror (or a (ens) can be obtained and studied by constructing a ray diagram.
2. Two rays are sufficient to draw a ray diagram because by intersecting two reflected rays we can obtain the position of the image formed.

Question 12.
State the various types of rays that hit a spherical (concave) mirror and direction of their reflecton. Draw ray-diagram to explain how the image will form through these rays.
Answer:
Types of Rays and their Reflection in a Concave Mirror
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 18

Question 13.
How do parallel rays converge or diverge in spherical mirrors? Explain with the help of diagrams. OR With necessary diagrams, explain the formation of principal focus and focal length of concave and convex mirrors.
(A) Concave mirror:

  • When parallel rays are incident on concave mirror, on reflection, they converge i.e. come closer to each other and meet at a point called principal focus (F). Hence, concave mirror is also called a converging mirror.
  • The distance between the pole (P) of the concave mirror and focus (F) is called its focal length (1).
  • Note that since all the reflected rays actually pass from the focus (F), a concave mirror has a real focus.
  • The focus (F) of concave mirror is in the front of the mirror.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 19

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

(B) Convex mirror:

  • When parallel rays are incident on convex mirror, on reflection, they diverge i.e. spread out from each other. Hence, convex mirror is also called a diverging mirror.
  • If you look at the mirror from left side, the reflected (divergent) rays appear to be coming from a point (F) behind the convex mirror.
  • The distance between the pole (P) and principal focus (F) is called the focal length (f) of the convex mirror.
  • This point F is called the principal focus of the convex mirror.
  • Note that since the reflected rays do not actually pass through the focus (F) of the convex mirror, it is said that convex mirror has a virtual (non-real) focus.
  • Also note that this virtual focus lies behind the convex mirror.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 20

Question 14.
State and explain the relation between radius of curvature (R) and focal length (f) of a spherical mirror
Answer:
1. For a spherical mirror (both concave and convex), the principal focus (F) lies exactly at the mid-way between pole (P) and center of curvature (C).
2. We know that distance between pole (P) and center of curvature (C) is called the radius of curvature and is denoted by R.
∴ Focal length \((f)=\frac{1}{2} R=\frac{R}{2}\)
Also, R = 2f i.e. radius is twice the focal length (f).
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 21

Question 15.
Radius of curvature of a convex minor is 15 cm. Find out its focal length.
Answer:
R = 15cm
F= ?
We know that
Focal length f = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{15}{2}\) = 7.5cm
Thus, focal length of the convex mirror is 7.5 cm.

Question 16.
Focal length of a concave mirror used in a laboratory is 12 cm. What will be the radius of its curvature?
Answer:
Answer:
F = 12cm
R = ?
We know that, Focal length f =\(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
∴ R = 2f = 2 x 12 = 24cm
Thus, the radius of curvature of the mirror is 24 cm.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 17.
What do you mean by focal length of a spherical mirror is 20 cm?
Answer:
1. Focal length (f) is the point at which all the parallel rays meet after getting reflected from the spherical mirror.
2. If the focal length of a spherical mirror is 20 cm it means all the parallel rays that hit the spherical mirror will meet at 20 cm away from the spherical mirror.

Question 18.
At how many positions can we place an object to obtain Images from a concave mirror?
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 22

As shown in figure, we can place the objects at six positions. They are:
1. Much beyond C i.e. at infinity
2. Beyond C
3. On center of curvature (C)
4. Anywhere between focus (F) and center of curvature (C)
5. On focus (F)
6. Anywhere between the pole (P) and focus (F)

Question 19.
Draw the ray diagram for a concave mirror when an object s placed at following points. Also give the position, nature and size of image.
Answer:
Object is placed at the following positions:
(1) At infinity
(2) Beyond C
(3) At C
(4) Between C and F
(5) At F
(6) Between P and F
(Note: Each diagram along with its detail carry 2 marks and hence the questions will be asked accordingly. However, here we have given detail of all the positions.)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Images formed by a Concave mirror
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 24

Summary of images formed in a concave mirror

Position of object

Position of imageSize of image

Nature of image

1. At infinity

At FHighly diminishedReal and inverted
2. Beyond C (i.e. 2F)Between F and CDiminished

Real and inverted

3. On C (i.e. on 2F)

On CSame as object sizeReal and inverted
4. Between F and CBeyond CEnlarged

Real and inverted

5. On principal focus F

At infinityHighly enlargedReal and inverted
6. Between P and FBehind the mirrorEnlarged

Virtual and erect

Question 20.
State the uses of concave mirrors.
Answer:
Uses of concave mirrors:

  • Concave mirrors are used in torches, search-lights and vehicle head-lights to obtain powerful parallel beam of lights.
  • They are also used in shaving mirrors to see a larger image of the face.
  • Dentists use concave mirrors to see enlarged view of teeth an patients.
  • To concentrate sunlight for producing heat in solar furnace.

Question 21.
Why are focal length and centre of curvature negative for convex mirrors?
Answer:
1. In a convex mirror, the rays parallel to principle axis, instead of converging at a point in the front of the mirror, appear to diverge from a point behind the mirror. This point is called the focal point or focus F of the mirror. Similarly, the centre of curvature also lies behind the mirror.

2. As per the rule, positions in the front of any mirror will have positive sign and those behind the mirror will have negative signs. Since, F and C both lie behind the convex mirror, their signs are negative.
(Note: (1) The focus of convex mirror is also called virtual focus. (2) f = R/2 holds true for convex mirrors also.)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 22.
At how many positions can we place an object to obtain images from a convex mirror? Also explain why we place the object at fewer positions in convex mirror than concave mirror.
Answer:
To obtain an image on a convex mirror we can place our object only at two positions. They are:
(1) At infinity
(2) Between pole P and infinity

Reason:
1. In concave mirrors, the focus F and center of curvature C lie before the mirror. The object is also placed before the mirror and so it can be placed at six positions in concave mirror.

2. In a convex mirror, the focus F and center of curvature C lie behind the mirror. Now, the image is formed only when an object is placed before the mirror and not behind it. Hence, in convex mirror, there can be only two positions for placing the object before the mirror.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 25

Question 23.
Draw and explain the type of Images formed by convex mirror.
Answer:
Images formed by a convex mirror
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 26

Summary of images formed in a convex mirror

Position of objectPosition of imageSize of imageNature of image
1. At infinityAt focus F, behind the mirrorHighly diminishedVirtual and erect
2. Anywhere between infinity and pole P of the mirrorBetween pole P and focus F, behind the mirrorDiminishedVirtual and erect

Question 24.
List out the properties of the image formed by a convex mirror.
Answer:
Properties of image formed by a convex mirror:
(1) The image formed is always virtual and erect.
(2) The image is highly diminished i.e. point sized.
(3) Image is always formed between F and R
(4) As you move the object closer to the pole, the image also moves closer to the pole. It grows in size and at one point becomes equal to the object size.

Question 25.
Explain New Cartesian Sign Convention for reflection by spherical mirror.
Answer:
1. For studying the reflection from spherical mirrors, the method or sign convention called the New Cartesian Sign Convention is used.
2. Here, pole P of the mirror is taken as origin and The principal axis XX’ is taken along the X-axis of the New Cartesian co-ordinate system. The axis drawn perpendicular to principal axis at pole P is considered as Y-axis. According to the New Cartesian Sign

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Convention:
(i) The object AB always lies on the left side of mirror and hence light is incident from left side of the mirror.
(ii) All the distances parallel to the principal axis are measured from the pole of the mirror P.
(iii) Distances measured in the same direction as that of incident light (left to right) along the +ve x-axis are taken as positive. x-axis are taken as positive.
→ Distances measured against the direction of incident light (right to left) along the -ve x-axis are taken as negative.
(iv) Distances measured perpendicular to and above the principal axis (along +ve y-axis) are taken as positive.
→ Distances measured perpendicular to and below the principal axis (along -ve y-axis) are taken as positive.

Summary of signs of various distances for concave and convex mirrors.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 27

Note: Refer the New Cartesian Sign Convention while reading the table.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 28

Question 26.
State the mirror formula for concave and convex mirrors.
Answer:
The relationship between the object distance (u), image distance (v) and focal length (f) of a mirror is called the mirror formula.
As per mirror formula:\(\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}\)
In words: \(\frac{1}{\text { Object distance }}+\frac{1}{\text { Imagedis tance }}=\frac{1}{\text { Focal length }}\)
Object distance image distance Focal length
Mirror formula is same for concave as well as convex mirror.

Question 27.
What do you mean by magnification? State Its definition and give to formula.
Answer:
Magnification:
Whenever we observe the image of an object after reflection by a spherical mirror, there can be a change in the size of the object. This means that the image formed can be larger than the object size, smaller or even of the same size as the object. This phenomenon of change in the image size is known as magnification (m).

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Definition:
1. The ratio of image height (h’) to object height (h) is called the magnification (m).
2. Thus, for spherical mirrors, magnification (m) \((m)=\frac{\text { Height of image }\left(h^{\prime}\right)}{\text { Height of object }(h)} \text { i.e. } m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}\)
3. In terms of object distance (u) and image distance (y), magnification (m) can be expressed as,
\(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=-\frac{v}{u}\)
4. If value of m = positive, image is virtual.
5. If value of m = negative, image is real.

The two important aspects of magnification that determines the sign and value of m.
We know magnification\((m)=\frac{\text { Image height }\left(h^{\prime}\right)}{\text { Object height }(h)}\)

There are two important aspects of magnification. They are:
(a) Sign of m, (b) Value of m

(a) Sign of m:

  • The sign of m i.e. magnification can be either positive or negtive.
  • The sign of m depends on the signs of h’ and h.

(i) Sign of h:  h represents the height of the object. Since the object is always placed above the principal axis, value of h will always be positive.

(ii) Sign of h’:

  • represents the height of image.
  • If the image is virtual, it will always be erect and hence above the principal axis. Hence, h’ will be positive.
  • If the image is real, It will always be inverted and hence below the principal axis. Here, h’ will be negative.

Conclusion:

  • m will be positive for virtual images (Since both h and h’ will be positive.)
  • m will be negative for real images. (Since h will be positive but h’ will be negative.)
  • Concave mirrors can produce both virtual and real images. So, magnification m of a concave mirror can either be positive or negative and vice-versa.
  • Convex mirrors and plane mirrors can produce only virtual images. So, their magnification will always be positive and vice-versa.

(b) Value of m:

  • The magnification i.e. the value of m can either be greater than 1, equal to 1 or less than 1.
    (i) m> 1
  •  If value of m> 1, it means that the size of image > size of object.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Example:
h’ = 10 cm and h = 5 cm
\(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{10}{5}=2\)
∴ image size > object size.

(ii) m = 1
If value of m = 1, it means size of image = size of object.

Example:
h’ = 10 cm and h= 10 cm
\(M=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{10}{10}=1\)∴ image size = object size

(iii) m < 1
→  If value of m < 1, it means size of image < size of object.

Example:
h’ = 5, h = 10
\(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{h}}=\frac{5}{10}=\frac{1}{2}=0.5\)
∴ image size <object size

Conclusion:

  • Image produced by a plane mirror is always same size as that of object. Thus, m = 1.
  •  Image produced by a convex mirror is always diminished i.e. smaller than the object. Thus, m < 1.
  • Image produced by concave mirror can be both larger or smaller than the object. Thus, m> 1 or m < 1.

Question 28.
Obtain the position, nature and size of an image formed by a plane mirror from the formula of magnification.
Answer:
1. We know that magnification m =\(\frac{\mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{h}}\)
2. Now in a plane mirror, image height (h’) = object height (h).
3. So we get value of m=+1.
4. The image formed in its case by the plane mirror will be virtual, erect and of same size as the object.
5. Also, magnification m = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\).
6. But, m = 1 and so 1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)
∴ u = -v i.e. y = – u.
7. Since y = – u, the size of the image y will be same as that of the object u but negative sign indicates that the image will be behind the mirror.

Summary of size of image, type of image and magnification for various mirrors
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 29

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 29.
Textbook illustration 10.1: A convex mirror used for rear-view on an automobile has a radius of curvature of 3.00 m. If a bus is located at 5.00 m from this mirror, find the position, nature and size of the Image.
Solution:
Radius of curvature, R = + 3.00 m;
Object-distance, u = – 5.00 m;
Image-distance, v=?
Height of the image, h’ = ?
Focal length, f = R/2 = +\(\frac{3.00 \mathrm{~m}}{2}\) = +1.50m (Since the principal focus of a convex mirror is behind the mirror)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 30
The image is virtual, erect and smaller in size by a factor of 0.23.

Question 30.
Textbook illustration 10.2: An object, 4.0 cm in size, is placed at 25.0 cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length 15.0 cm. At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order to obtain a sharp image? Find the nature and the size of the image.
Answer:
Object-size, h= +4.0cm;
Object-distance, u = – 25.0 cm;
Focal length, f = -15.0 cm;
Image-distance, v = ?
Image-size, h’ = ?
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 31
or \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{-5.0+3.0}{75.0}=\frac{-2.0}{75.0}=\text { or, } v=-37.5 \mathrm{~cm}\)
The screen should be placed at 37.5 cm in front of the mirror. The image is real.
Also, magnification, \(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=-\frac{v}{u}\)
\(\text { Or, } h^{\prime}=-\frac{v h}{u}=-\frac{(-37.5 \mathrm{~cm})(-4.0 \mathrm{~cm})}{(-25.0 \mathrm{~cm})}\)
Height of the image, h’ = – 6.0 cm. The image is inverted and enlarged.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 31.
Differentiate between regular reflection and irregular reflection.
Answer:

Regular reflectionIrregular reflection
When a parallel beam of light is incident on a shining plane or a smooth surface, the light rays remain parallel after reflection in a specific direction. Such reflection is called regular reflection.When a parallel beam of light is incident on a rough or irregular surface, the incident rays do not remain parallel but spreads over wide region after reflection. Such a reflection of light is called irregular reflection.
Reflected rays are parallel to incident rays.Reflected rays are not parallel to incident rays.
Example: Reflection of light by a plane mirrorExample: Reflection from chair, book, etc.

Question 32.
Differentiate between concave mirror and convex mirror.
Answer:

Concave mirror
A spherical mirror having inner curved reflecting surface is known as concave mirror.A spherical mirror having outer curved reflecting surface is known as convex mirror.
Image formed by concave mirror can be real and inverted or virtual and erect.Image formed by convex mirror is always virtual and erect.
Real image can be smaller size or even larger than the object.Virtual image will always be smaller than the object.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 33.
Differentiate between real image and virtual image.
Answer:

Real imageVirtual Image
An image formed by reflection or refraction of light from the object is called a real imageAn image which is not actually formed by reflection or refraction of light from the object is called a virtual image.
It can be obtained on a screen.It cannot be obtained on a screen.
Real image is in inverted form.Virtual image is always erect.

Question 34.
Give a brief Introduction about refraction.
Answer:
Refraction:
1. Light travels on a same path i.e. without bending if it is travelling in same transparent medium such as air or water.
2. While travelling if light comes across another transparent medium, its velocity changes and so it bends.
3. For example, if light is travelling in air (medium 1) and then it strikes water (medium 2) obliquely, it bends. This bending of light is called refraction of light.

Question 35.
Define refraction of light. State its laws.
Answer:
Refraction:
When a ray of light enters obliquely from one transparent medium to another transparent medium, its velocity changes due to which it gets deviated from its original direction at the surface separating two medias. This is called refraction.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 32

Laws of refraction:
1. Incident ray, refracted ray and normal to the surface separating two medias at the point of incidence, all lie in the same plane.
2. The ratio of the sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction is constant for the light of a given colour (wave length) and for the given pair of media. This law is known as Snell’s Law of Refraction.
\(\frac{\sin \theta_1}{\sin \theta_2}=\text { constant }\)
Here, θ1 = angle of incidence and θ2= angle of refraction.
Example:
Refraction takes place when light travels from air (medium 1) into glass (medium 2).

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 36.
With respect to travel of light and its refraction, explain medium and comparative types of mediums. Also explain behaviour of light in these mediums.
Answer:
Medium:

  • A transparent substance in which light can travel is called a medium.
  • Air, water gas, glass, kerosene, etc. are examples of mecums.
  • The densities of each medium are different and so they are classified as follows —

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 33

(i) Optically rarer medium:
A medium in which the speed of light is more is called optically rarer medium.

Example:
Air is optically rarer than water and glass.

(ii) Optically denser medium:
A medium in which the speed of light is less (compared to an optically rarer medium) is called an optically denser medium.

Example:
1. Glass is optically denser than air. Kerosene is optically denser than water. Refraction of light in various mediums:
2. When light travels from a rarer medium (e.g. air) to a denser medium (e.g. glass), It bends towards normal at the point of incidence.
3. When light travels from an optically denser medium (e.g. glass) to a rarer medium (e.g. air), it bends away from normal at the point of incidence.

Question 37.
What do you mean by refractive index of a medium?
Answer:
1. A ray that travels obliquely from one transparent medium into another will change its direction in the second medium. This means that the light has refracted.
2. The extent of the change in direction that occurs within the given pair of media (let us say air and glass) can be expressed in the terms of refractive index.

Question 38.
Explain relative refractive index.
Answer:
Relative Refractive Index :
1. The ratio of speed of light v1 in medium 1 to the speed of light v2 in medium 2 is known as the relative refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 (except the medium of vacuum).
2.  It is denoted by η12 i.e. refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1.
∴ Refractive index η12 = \(\eta_{21}=\frac{\text { Speed of light in medium } 1}{\text { Speed of light in medium } 2}=\frac{v_1}{v_2}\)
3. Similarly, the ratio of speed of light 2 in medium 2 to the speed of light y1 in medium 1 is known as the relative refractive index of medium 1 with respect to medium 2.
∴ Refractive index \(\eta_{12}=\frac{\text { Speed of light in medium } 2}{\text { Speed of light in medium } 1}=\frac{v_2}{v_1}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 39.
Define and explain absolute refractive index.
Answer:
Absolute refractive index:
1. The ratio of speed of light in vacuum (or air) (C) to the speed of light of any other medium is known as the absolute refractive index or simply refractive index.
2. It is denoted by ηm
∴ Absolute refractive index \(\eta_m=\frac{\text { Speed of light in vacuum (or air) }}{\text { Speed of light in medium }}=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}\)

Question 40.
Give Snells law.
Answer:
Snells law:
1. The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the ratio of sine of angle of refraction is constant.
2. This constant is known as relative refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 and is denoted by η21.
∴ \(\eta_{21}=\frac{\sin \theta_1}{\sin \theta_2}\)
3. In terms of ratio of velocity of light In two media, the refractive index of light is represented as under –
The ratio of velocity of light v1 in medium 1 to the velocity of light v2 in medium 2 is called relative refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1.
∴ \(\eta_{21}=\frac{v_1}{v_2}\)
4. The refractive index of the transparent medium with respect to vacuum is called the absolute refractive index of a medium. It is commonly known as refractive index.

Question 41.
Why do we take absolute refractive index of air = 1?
Answer:
1. Actually the velocity of light in vacuum is slightly more than the velocity of light in air.
2. But for calculating purpose, magnitude of velocity of light in vacuum is taken as equal to the velocity of light in air =
3 x 108m/s
Absolute refractive index of air = \(\frac{\text { velocity of light in vaccum }}{\text { velocity of light in air }}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{3 \times 10^8}=1\) gives us the value of absolute refraction index of air = 1.
4. Thus, absolute refractive index of air is taken as 1.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 42.
Why absolute refractive index Is always greater than 1? Explain with the help of an example.
Answer:
1. Velocity of light is highest in a vacuum.
2. Hence, velocity of light in any other medium will always be lesser than the velocity of light in vacuum or air.
3. In practice, we take the velocity of light in vacuum = velocity of light in air = 3 x 108 rn/s
4. Thus, absolute refractive index
\(\eta=\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in medium } 2 \text { i.e. air }}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{3 \times 10^8}=1\)
5. Now, when we consider absolute refractive index of vacuum or air with any other medium, the answer will always be greater than 1.

Example:
Velocity of light in vacuum (air) = 3 x 108 m/s
Velocity of light in water = 2.25 x 108 m/s
∴ Absolute refractive index of water = \(\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in water }}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{2.25 \times 10^8}=1.33\)
Thus, absolute refractive index will always be greater than 1.

Question 43.
(Activity 10.10) Perform an activity to demonstrate refraction of light through a glass slab.
Answer:
1. Fix a sheet of white paper on a drawing board using drawing pins.
2. Place a rectangular glass slab over the sheet In the middle.
3. Draw the outline of the slab with a pencil. Let us name the outline as ABCD.
4. Take four identical pins.
5. Fix two pins, say E and F, vertically such that the line joining the pins is inclined to the edge AB.
6. Look for the images of the pins E and F through the opposite edge. Fix two other pins, say G and H, such that these pins and the images of E and F lie on a straight line.
7. Remove the pins and the slab.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 34
8. Join the positions of tip of the pins E and F and produce the line up to AB. Let EF meet AB at O. Similarly, join the positions of tip of the pins G and H and produce it up to the edge CD. Let HG meet CD at O’.
9. Join O and O’. Also produce EF up to P, as shown by a dotted line in figure.

Observation:
1. At O, light ray along EF enters from air into glass. It bends towards the normal NN’. This is the first refraction.
2. At O’, the light ray enters from glass into air. It bends away from the normal MM’ and travels along GH. This is second refraction.
3. Here, angle of emergence r2 is equal to angle of incidence t1, i.e., the emergent ray is parallel to the original direction of the incident ray. This is because there is an identical medium, air in this case, adjacent to both edges AB and CD.
4. However, the light ray is shifted sideways slightly. This is lateral displacement and is represented by O’L.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Conclusion:

  • The ray of light travelling from a rarer medium (air) to a denser medium (glass) bends towards the normal.
  • The ray of light travelling from a denser medium (glass) to a rarer medium (air) bends away from the normal.
  • The emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray but is slightly displaced sideways.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 35

Types: (A) Convex lens:
A lens which is thick at the center and tapered at the upper and lower ends is called a convex lens.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 36

(B) Concave lens:
A lens which is thin in the middle but thicker at the edges is called concave lens.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 37

Uses of lens:
In magnifying glass, cameras, repairing watches, microscope, telescope, etc.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 45.
What do you mean by converging and diverging lens?
Answer:
Converging lens:
1. A lens that converges (brings closer) the rays of light travelling parallel to Its principal axis to a point called focus (F) is called a converging lens.
2. Convex lens is a converging lens.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 38

Diverging lens:
A lens that diverges (spreads out) the rays of light travelling parallel to its principal axis is called a diverging lens. If we plot these rays backwards, they appear to diverge from the focus (F) of the lens.
(Note: Lenses have two faces. So light can pass from both sides i.e. left and right.)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 39

Question 46.
Define various terms related to lenses along with suitable diagrams.
Answer:
1. As shown in the diagram, a convex lens (or a concave lens) can be thought of as formed from two spheres.
2. Since there are two spheres and the light can pass from both the sides of a lens, there are two radii, two focuses and two centers of curvature.

1. Centres of curvature:

  • The centres of respective spheres of which the surface of lens form parts are called centres of curvature.
  • Lens has two centres of curvature denoted by C1 and C2.

2. Radii of curvature:

  • The radii of spheres of which surfaces of lens form parts are called radii of curvature
  • Lens has two radii of curvature denoted by R1 and R2.

3. Principal axis: A straight imaginary line passing through the centres of curvature C1 and C2 of lens is called the principal axis of lens.

4. Optical centre: The centre of lens, located on principal axis, is known as the optical centre. It is denoted by O.

5. Principal focus: When rays parallel to the principal axis of convex lens are refracted, they converge at a point on the principal axis. This point is called principal focus of the convex lens. A convex lens has two principal foci F1 and F2 on either side of lens.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

→ The rays parallel to the principal axis of concave lens are refracted such that they appear to be diverging from a point on principal axis. Such a point is called focus of concave lens. Concave lens also has two focii F1 and F2 on either side of lens.

6. Focal length
→ The distance between the optical centre (O) and the principal focus (F) is called the focal length of the lens (f).
→ We also mark another point called 2F on the principal axis. This point lies at twice the distance of F.
(Note: In a lens, 2F and C may or may not be at same position.)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 41

Question 47.
Explain with the help of ray diagram how an image can be formed with convex lens. For obtaining an image through convex lens, we consider the following rays:

Ray 1: It moves parallel to the principal axis and after refraction passes through the principal focus (F2) on the other side of the lens.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 42

Ray 2: It passes through the principal focus (F1) and after refraction becomes parallel to the principal axis on the other side of the F lens. 1A
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 43

Ray 3: The ray passing through optical centre O will emerge from other side of the lens without any deviation.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 44

Question 48.
List out the various positions at which we can place an object in front of convex lens.

Positions at which we can place an object in front of a convex lens.

(Note: 1. Normally, for both concave and convex lens, the rays are shown coming from the left side of the lens. After refraction they move towards the right side of the lens. 2. The focus F1 lies on the left side i.e. towards surface 1 of the lens and focus F2 on the right side i.e., towards surface 2 of the lens.

In a convex lens, an object can be placed at the following positions to obtain its image.
(1) At Infinite distance
(2) Beyond 2F1
(3) At 2F1
(4) Anywhere between F1and 2F1
(5) At principal focus (F1)
(6) Anywhere between principal focus (F1) and optical center (O)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 49.
Draw the diagrams for a convex lens when an object is placed at the following points. Also give the position, nature and size of the image.
(1) At infinity
(2) Beyond 2F1
(3) At 2F1
(4) Between F1 and 2F1
(5) At focus F1
(6) Between focus F1 and optical center (O).

(Please note : Each diagram along with its detail carry 2 marks and hence the questions will be asked accordingly. However, we have given detail of all the positions.)

Images formed by a convex lens

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 45
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 46
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 47

Summary of images formed by convex lens

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 48

Question 50.
Draw ray diagram for a concave lens when an object Is placed at (1) Infinity and when object is placed (2) Between infinity and optical centre (O) of the lens.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Images formed by a concave lens
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 49

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 50
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 51

Question 52.
State the New Cartesian Sign convention to be followed for refraction of light through spherical lenses.
Answer:
New Cartesian Sign convention for refraction of light through spherical lenses:
(i) The object is always placed on the left side of the lens. This means that the light is incident on the lens from left side.
(ii) All distances parallel to the principal axis are measured from the optical centre (O) of the lens.
(iii) The distance measured in the same direction as the incident light is taken positive.
(iv) The distance measured in the direction opposite to the direction of incident light is taken negative.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 52

(v) Height measured above the principal axis of the lens and perpendicular to it i.e. in the upward direction is taken as positive.
(vi) Height measured below the principal axis of the lens and perpendicular to it in the downward direction is taken as negative.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

New Cartesian Sign Convention followed for refraction of light through spherical lenses
Sign convention for a convex lens:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 53

Object distance = – u
Object height = + h
Image distance = + v for real image
Image height = – h’ for real image
Focal length = + f
Note: If the image is virtual, then image distance
= -v and image height = + h’

Sign convention for a concave lens:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 54
Object distance = – u
Object height = – v
Image distance = – v
Image height = + h’
Focal length = – f

Note: If the image is virtual, then image distance
= – v and image height = + h’
→ Finally, the linear magnification, m = h’/h is positive for a virtual image and negative for a real image

Question 53.
State and explain the lens formula.
Answer:
Lens formula:
(i) The lens formula is a mathematical relation between the object distance (u), image distance (v) and focal length (f) of a spherical lens.
As per lens formula,\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)
In other words,\(\frac{1}{\text { Image distance }}-\frac{1}{\text { Objectdistance }}=\frac{1}{\text { Focallength }}\)
Image distance Object distance Focal length
(ii) Lens formula is applicable to both concave lens as well as convex lens.

Question 54.
State the equation for magnification produced by a lens.
Answer:
1. The magnification produced by a lens is defined as “The ratio of the height of the image formed by the lens to the height of the object”.
Thus, magnification m = Height of the image = h’
, Height of the object h \(m=\frac{\text { Height of the image }}{\text { Height of the object }}=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}\)
Also, \(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{v}{u}\)
2. ‘m’ is positive for virtual image formed by the lens.
3. ‘m’ is negative for real image formed by the lens.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 55.
Textbook Illustration 10.3: A concave lens has focal length of 15 cm. At what distance should the object from the lens be placed so that it forms an image at 10 cm from the lens? Also, find the magnification produced by the lens.
Solution:
A concave lens always forms a virtual, erect image on the same side of the object.
Image-distance v = -10 cm;
Focal length f = -15 cm;
Object-distance u = ?
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 55
\(\frac{1}{u}=\frac{-2+2}{30}=\frac{1}{-30}\)
Thus, the object – distance is 30 cm.
Magnification m = v/u
\(\mathrm{m}=\frac{-10 \mathrm{~cm}}{-30 \mathrm{~cm}}=\frac{1}{3}=+0.33\)
The positive sign shows that the image is erect and virtual. The image is one-third of the size of the object.

Question 56.
Textbook illustration 10.4: A 2.0 cm tall object is placed perpendicular to the principal axis of a convex lens of focal length 10 cm. The distance of the object from the lens Is 15 cm. Find the nature, position and size of the image. Also find its magnification.
Answer:
Height of the object h =+ 2.0 cm;
Focal length f =+ 10 cm;
object-distance u = – 15 cm;
Image-distance v = ?
Height of the image h’ = ?
The positive sign of v shows that the image is formed at a distance of 30 cm on the other side of the optical centre. The image is real and inverted.
Magnification \(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{v}{u}\)
or, h’ = h (v/u)
Height of the image, h’ = (2.0) (+30/-15)
= – 4.0 cm
Magnification m = v/u
or \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{+30 \mathrm{~cm}}{-15 \mathrm{~cm}}=-2\)
The negative signs of m and h’ show that the image is inverted and real. It is formed below the principal axis. Thus, a real, inverted image, 4 cm tall, is formed at a distance of 30 cm on the other side of the lens. The image is two times enlarged.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 57.
Write a short note on : Power of lens. OR Write definition of power of lens. Give Its SI unit. Name the Instrument used to measure the power of lens.
Answer:
1. The ability of a lens to converge or diverge light rays depends on its focal length.
2. The convex lens of short focal length bends the light rays at large angles by focusing them closer to the optical centre.
3. Similarly concave lens of very short focal length causes higher divergence than the one with larger focal length.
4. The efficiency with which a lens converges or diverges the light rays is expressed in terms of its power.
5. Thus, the power of lens (P) is the “Reciprocal of the focal length (I) of lens”.
Power of lens \((\mathrm{P})=\frac{1}{f}\)
6. The SI unit of power of a lens is diopter and it is denoted by D.
7. If fis expressed in meters, then \(1 D=\frac{1}{1}=1 m^{-1}.\)
8. We can measure the power of lens by using diopter meter.
9. As per Cartesian sign system, focus of convex lens lies on right side of the lens and so power of convex lens is positive, while focus of concave lens lies on left side of lens and so power of concave lens is negative.

Question 58.
Give the sign convention for powers of converging and diverging lenses.
Answer:
1. Converging lens has a positive focal length and so its power (P) is positive.
2. Diverging lens has a negative focal length and so its power (P) is negative.

Question 59.
A pencil when dipped in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bent at the interface of air and water. Will the pencil appear to be bent to the same extent, if instead of water we use liquids like, kerosene or turpentine. Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
1. A pencil when dipped in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bent at the interface of air and water. This happens because the light reaching out from the portion of the pencil inside seems as if it is coming from a different direction as compared to the part above water due to refraction of light.

2. The pencil will look bent at different extents when materials such as kerosene or turpentine are used because their refractive indices are different. This produces deviation from incident ray by different extents.

Question 60.
The film or CCD chip must be placed where the image is focused In order to record a sharp image. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Light from very distant objects reaches the camera in the form of parallel beams.
2. This will allow the light to focus right at the focal point of the lens.
3. Anything closer will have rays that will not be parallel but diverging and so they will be focused at a distance further from the lens than the focal point of the lens.
4. Hence, the film or CCD chip must be placed where the image is focused properly in order to record a sharp image.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 61.
Convex mirrors are used In car headlights where as concave mirrors are used in street lights. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Concave mirrors have an ability to form a parallel and powerful beam of light focusing on a particular area.
2. On keeping the bulb of the car head light at the focal point of the reflector, a powerful beam of light is produced. This allows better focusing of the lights and hence the visibility of the driver improves.
3. Whereas, convex mirrors have the ability to diverge the rays over a large area. This brightens a larger area compared to concave mirror.
4. Hence, convex mirrors are used in car headlights where as concave mirrors are used in street lights.

Question 62.
You are given three mirrors of equal sizes — concave, convex and plane. How will you identify them without touching their surfaces?
Answer:
Take one mirror at a time and watch your face in it. First keep the face quite close and then slowly and gradually move the face away from the mirror. Do this in each mirror and decide the type of mirror based on the following observations —

  • If the image formed is of same size as our face but laterally inverted i.e. left portion looks right and right looks left for all positions, then it is a plane mirror.
  • If the image formed is erect and enlarged initially but gets inverted as the face is moved further, the mirror is a concave mirror.
  • If the image formed is erect and smaller in size for all the position, the mirror is convex.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 63.
The phrase “Objects in mirror are closer than they appear” is written on the side mirrors of the vehicles. Give reason.
Answer:
1. The side mirrors of the vehicles are convex mirrors.
2. The image obtained through convex mirrors is always diminished.
3. As a result the actual object appears smaller.
4. Since smaller-appearing objects seem farther than they actually are, a driver might change a lane assuming an adjacent vehicle is at a safe distance behind, when in fact it may be quite closer.
5. Thus, the phrase Objects in mirror are closer than they appear” serves as a warning/reminder to the driver of this potential problem.

Question 64.
A diamond kept under water sparkles less as compared to when kept in air. Give reason.
Answer:
1. The sparkling of a diamond actually occurs because of repeated total internal reflection.
2. When light enters a diamond, it is difficult for it to leave because of the high index of refraction so it tends to totally internally reflect inside the diamond.
3. The multiple internal reflection of light in the diamond in different directions, allow it to sparkle.
4. Putting a diamond underwater means that the difference in speeds (or index of refraction) is much less which leads to less total internal reflection. This decreases the sparkle of the diamond.

Question 65.
State the type of mirror preferred as
(i) Rear view mirror In vehicles and
(ii) Shaving mirror. Justify your answer giving two reasons in each.
Answer:
(i) A convex mirror is preferred as a rear-view mirror because —

  • Convex mirror always forms a virtual, erect and a diminished (point-like) image of an object placed anywhere in front of it. This means the driver can see the image of person even at a very distant position.
  • Convex mirror has a wider field of view. So it covers a large rear distance. This helps the driver as he can see more.

(ii) A concave mirror Is preferred for shaving because —

  • When such a mirror is held near the face, the person can see enlarged image of his face. This helps to have a cleaner shave.
  • An erect image is formed.

Question 66.
A person in a dark room looking through a window can clearly see a person outside in the daylight, whereas the person outside cannot see the person inside. Give reason.
Answer:
1. When light falls on an object, it absorbs some light and reflects some.
2. If you are inside in the dark, a person outside in bright sunlight is sending out (reflecting) lots of light
3. Most of this light would come through the window to you, so you see them clearly.
4. Since it is so bright outside, there is also a good amount of light, which reflects back towards you.
5. In your case, you are standing in dark and so very little light falls on you. As a result, you do not reflect much light. This makes it difficult for the person standing outside to see you clearly.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 67.
Sudha finds out that the sharp image of the window pane of her science laboratory is formed at a distance of 15 cm from the lens. She now tries to focus the building visible to her outside the window instead of the window pane without disturbing the lens. In which direction will she move the screen to obtain a sharp Image of the building? What Is the approximate focal length of this lens?
Answer:
Sudha should move the screen towards the lens to for obtaining a sharp Image of the building.

Reason:
1. The window pane was lying beyond focus 2F i.e. center of curvature and convex lens forms its image, on the other side between F and 2F
2. The building that Sudha sees from her window can be considered as a distant object i.e. at infinity. When Sudha tries to focus the building, the lens forms the Image of building at a distance of focal length. The approximate focal length of this lens is 15 cm.

Question 68.
Raj along with his friend Dipti visited Nagina-wadi in Kankaria, Ahmedabad which has got a variety of mirrors. Raj showed her a mirror In which Dipti’s image showed the upper half of the body very fat and lower half of the body very thin. Dipti thought there is a problem with the mirror. She got embarrassed and also angry. Raj laughed and explained not to worry as the mirror is designed that way.
(1) Can you name the two types of mirrors used?
(2) Name the mirror In which the size of Image ¡s small.
(3) What values are displayed by Raj?
Answer:
(1) Concave and convex mirror
(2) Convex mirror
(3) Compassion and empathy towards Dipti in consoling her and making her calm.

Question 69.
Under what condition in an arrangement of two plane mirrors, the incident ray and reflected ray will always be parallel to each other, whatever may be angle of incidence. Show the same with the help of diagram.
Answer:
When we place two plane mirrors at right angle with each other, then the incident ray and reflected ray will always be parallel to each other, whatever the angle of incidence.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 70.
Four friends were on a picnic. Ranjit was driving the car. Suddenly he noticed that in his side mirror that the car which was behind their car had met with an accident. He immediately stopped his car and the friends decided to help the injured person. All of them took the Injured person to the nearest hospital. After taking first-aid from the hospital, the victim thanked them for saving his life.
(1) Name the type of mirror from which Ranjit saw the accident.
(2) Why is this type of mirror used as a side mirror in vehicles?
(3) Which values are displayed by Ranjit?
Answer:
(1) A convex mirror
(2) Convex mirrors, have wider field of view, as they are curved outwards. Therefore, a convex mirror enables the driver to view much larger area.
(3) Ranjit displayed alertness as well as duty of a citizen towards other. The friends also displayed selflessness and empathy.

Question 71.
A child is standing in front of a magic mirror. She finds the image of her head bigger, the middle portion of her body of the same size and that of the legs smaller. The following is the order of combinations for the magic mirror from the top. Which combination do you think is correct? Justify your reason.
(1) Plane, convex and concave,
(2) Convex, concave and plane
(c) Concave, plane and convex,
(d) Convex, plane and concave
Answer:
1. Combination (c) Concave, plane and convex is the correct combination.
2. Concave mirrors of large focal length can be used to see a larger image of the head, the plane mirror for middle portion to see the body of the same size whereas convex mirror to see the diminished image of leg.
3. Hence, the selected combination is correct.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 72.
A pencil when dipped in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bent at the Interface of air and water. Will the pencil appear to be bent to the same extent, if instead of water we use liquids like, kerosene or turpentine. Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
1. A pencil when dipped in water in a glass tumbler appears to be bent at the interface of air and water. This happens because the light reaching out from the portion of the pencil inside seems as if it is coming from a different direction as compared to the part above water due to refraction of light.
2. The pencil will look bent at different extents when materials such as kerosene or turpentine are used because their refractive indices are different. This produces deviation from incident ray by different extents.

Question 73.
If an object of 4 cm height Is placed at a distance of 18 cm from concave mirror having focal length 12 cm, find the position, nature and height of the image.
Answer:
Object height h = 4 cm
Object distance u = -18 cm
Focal length f = -12 cm
(Both, principal focus F and u lie to the left of concave mirror, hence negative.)
From mirror formula,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 56
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 57

Conclusion:
1. Magnification is positive, h’ is negative which indicates image is real and inverted. Also, it is enlarged compared to object.
2. The image is formed 36 cm on the left side of pole P beyond the center of curvature C.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 74.
A convex mirror Is fitted on an automobile with focal length of 3 m. If a vehicle behind is at a distance of 5 m, determine the position and nature of an image.
Answer:
Object distance u = – 5 m
Focal length f = 3 m
(f is positive because focus of convex mirror lies on right side of pole P)
From mirror formula,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 58
\(v=\frac{15}{8}\) = 1.875m
Here, y is positive and y < u
∴ m<1
Therefore, virtual, erect and diminished image behind the convex mirror is obtained at a distance 1.875 m from the mirror.

Question 75.
An object of height 5 cm is placed at a distance of 10 cm from convex mirror of focal length 15 cm. Find the position, nature and size of an image.
Answer:
Object distance u = -10 cm
Focal length f = 15 cm
Object height h = 5 cm
According to mirror formula,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 59

Here, image distance v is positive and h’ is positive so, we get a virtual image of 3 cm height behind the mirror which is erect and diminished.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 76.
Refractive index of media A, B, C and D are
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 60
In which of the four media is the speed of light (i) maximum and (ii) minimum? Find the refractive index of medium C with respect to medium B.
Answer:
(i) Speed of light is maximum is medium A for which n (= 1.33) is minimum
(ii) Speed of light is minimum in medium D for which n (= 1.65) is maximum. Refractive index of medium C with respect to medium B.
\(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{CB}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{1.52}{1.44}=1.05\)

Question 77.
(a) The refractive index of Ruby is 1.71. What is meant by this statement?
(b) The refractive index of some medium are given below:
Crown glass – 1.52, Water – 1.33, Sapphire  – 1.77
In which of the medium is the speed of light:
(i) Maximum (ii) Minimum?
(c) Calculate speed of light in sapphire.
Answer:
(a) The refractive index of ruby is 1.71. It means that the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the speed of light in Ruby is 1.71.

(b) (i) Speed of light is maximum in water for which n (= 1.33) is minimum
(ii) Speed of light is minimum in sapphire for which n (= 1.77) is maximum

(c)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 61

Question 78.
Light enters from air to glass having refractive index 1.5. What is the speed of light in glass? The speed of light in vacuum is
3 x 108 m/s.
Answer:
Absolute refractive index of glass
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}\) and c = 3 x 108 m/s-1
\(v=\frac{c}{n}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.5} m/s-1\) (n = 1.5) = 2 x 108 m/s-1[/latex]

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 79.
A light ray enters from air to the water medium having the absolute refractive index 1.33. If the angle of refraction of light is 17°30’, what will be the angle of incidence at the surface separating the two media ? Take absolute refractive index of air as 1.00.
Answer:
Taking air as medium 1 and water as medium 2,
n1 = 1, n2 = 1.33, θ2 = 17°30’
According to Sneil’s law,
n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2
sin θ1 = 1.33 X 17°30’
The value of sin 17°30’ is determined from the Mathematical table of natural sine.
sin 17°30’ = 0.3
∴ sin θ1 =1.33 x 0.3 = 0.4
∴ From the table of natural sine
sin 23° 36’ = 0.4007
∴ θ1 = 23° 36’
∴ Angle of incidence = 23° 36’

Question 80
The refractive index of light entering glass from water is 1.12. Find the absolute refractive index of water if the absolute refractive index of glass is 1.5.
Answer:
Here, we take water as medium 1 and glass as medium 2.
Absolute refractive index of glass η2= 1.5
Absolute refractive index of glass with respect to water η21 = 1.12
Therefore, absolute refractive index of water η1 =?
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 62

Thus, absolute refractive index of water is = 1.34

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 81.
A swimmer lights a torch under the surface of sea water. Light from the torch is incident on water surface In such a way that incident light makes an angle 370 with water surface. Find the angle of refraction. Absolute refractive index of water is 1.33 and absolute refractive index of air is 1.0.
Answer:
Taking medium 1 as water, we get η1 = 1.33
Taking medium 1 as water, we get η2 = 1.00
Incident angle θ1 = 37°
Angle of refraction θ2 = ?
Using the formula, =
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 63
Angle of refraction θ1 = 53° (from log table).
∴ The value of angle of reflection is equal to 53°

Question 82.
A convex lens forms a real and inverted image of an object at a distance of 40 cm from it. What will be the distance of an object if size of an image is same as the object? Determine the power of lens.
Answer:
Given:
Lens = Convex
Image = Real and inverted
Size of image h’ = object size h
Now, \(m=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}\)
But, h’= h ∴ m=1.
The image is inverted. ∴ h’ will be negative.
∴ magnification on will be -1.
(Note: You can also think this way. For a convex lens, if the image is real and inverted, the magnification will be negative.)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 64
Thus, object distance = – 40 cm and also image distance = 40 cm.
Substituting, values of y and u in lens formula we get,
\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 65

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 83.
The object of 5 cm height is placed at a distance 25 cm from the centre of convex lens of focal length lo cm. Draw a ray diagram and find position, nature and the size of an image formed.
Answer:
1. Take a scale 2.5 cm = 1 unit on principal axis and draw a ray diagram. The ray diagram is shown below.
2. This shows that real, inverted and diminished image of an object is formed on other side of lens at a distance of 16.67 cm from the lens.
3. Also, h’ = – 3.33 cm
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 66
As per lens formula,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 67

Image will be formed on the other side of the lens at a distance of 30 cm.

Question 84.
An object Is placed perpendicular to the principal axis of concave lens focal length 30 cm. Find the position of an image when the object is at a distance 20 cm from the lens.
Answer:
The focal length of lens f = -30 cm
Object distance u = -20 cm, image distance v = ?
As per the lens formula,
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 68

The image will be obtained on the same side of the object at a distance of 12 cm from lens.

Question 85.
The magnification produced by a spherical lens is +2.5. What is the
(a) Nature of image
(b) Nature of lens?
Answer:
(a) When the magnification is positive, then the image is virtual and erect. In this case, the magnification has a positive sign, so the nature of image is virtual and erect.
(b) The value of magnification given here is 2.5 (which is more than 1). So, the image is larger than the object. A virtual, erect and magnified can be formed only by a convex lens, therefore, the nature of lens is convex.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 86.
Power of a convex lens is +4.0 D. At what distance should the object from the lens be placed to obtain its real and inverted image of the same size on the screen?
Answer:
1. The focal length of this convex lens is + 4D. As per formula \(p=\frac{1}{f(\text { in meters })}\) we get
\(f=\frac{1}{p}=\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25m = 25cm
2. Now, in a convex lens, when the image size is same as object size, then the object should be placed from the lens at a distance of 2f.
3. Thus, object distance = 2f = 2 x 25 = 50 cm.

Question 87.
Two thin lenses of power +3.5 D and – 2.5 D are placed in contact. Find the power and focal length of the lens combination.
Answer:
Power of combination of lenses, p = p1 + p2
So, p = + 3.5 + (-2.5)
p=+3.5 – 2.5
p = + 1.0 D
Thus, the power of this combination of lenses is, + 1.0 diopter.
We will now calculate the focal length of this combination of lenses. We know that:
Power, \(P=\frac{1}{f} \text { or }+1=\frac{1}{f}\)= and f= +1 m
So the focal length of this combination lens is + 1 meter.

Question 88.
You have two lenses A and B of focal lengths + 10 cm and -10 cm respectively. State the nature and power of each lens. Which of the two lenses will form a virtual and magnified Image of an object placed 8 cm from the lens? Draw a ray diagram to justify your answer.
Answer:
Here, = + 10 cm, = – 10 cm
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 69

Lens A is convex and lens B is concave. Lens A will form a virtual and magnified image when the object is placed as 8 cm from it.

Question 89.
If the absolute refractive indices of water, benzene, and sapphire are 1.33, 1.50 and 1.77 respectively, then which medium has maximum relative refractive index?
(i) Sapphire relative to water
(ii) Sapphire relative to benzene
(iii) Benzene relative to water
(iv) Water relative to benzene
Answer:
Absolute refractive index of water = 1.33,
Absolute refractive index of benzene = 1.5, and Absolute refractive index of sapphire r = 1.77,
(A) Relative refractive index of sapphire η3 to water ηi.e. = η31 =\(\frac{\eta_3}{\eta_1}= 1.77/1.33\) = 1.33
(B) Relative refractive index of sapphire η3 to benzene η2 i.e. = η32= \(\frac{\eta_3}{\eta_2}\)= 1.77/1.5 = 1.18
(C) Relative refractive index of benzene η2 to water η1 i.e. = η21 =\(\frac{\eta_2}{\eta_1}=1.5/1.33\)= 1.12
(D) Relative refractive index of water η1 to benzene η2 i.e. η12 =\(\frac{\eta_1}{\eta_2}= 1.33/1.5\)= 0.88
Thus, sapphire to water has the highest relative refractive index.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 90.
It he absolute refractive indices of water and glass are 4/3 and 3/2 respectively, then what will be the ratio of velocity of light In water to that of glass?
→ 8/9
Solution:
Absolute refractive index of water = \(\eta_1=\frac{4}{3}\)
Absolute refractive index of glass = \(\eta_2=\frac{3}{2}\)
∴ Ratio of velocity of light in water to glass will be \(\eta_{21}=\frac{v_1}{v_2}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 70

Very Short Answer Type Question

Question 1.
What is reflection? State its types.
Answer:
The phenomenon of sending back the light rays which fall on the surface of an object when light is incident on it, is called reflection of light.
Types:

  • Regular reflection and
  • Irregular (diffused) reflection.

Question 2.
What is regular reflection?
Answer:
1. When a parallel beam of light falls on a smooth or shining surface, then the reflected beam is also parallel and directed back in a fixed direction.
2. This type of reflection is known as regular reflection. E.g. reflection by a mirror.

Question 3.
What is irregular or diffused reflection?
Answer:
1. When a parallel beam of light falls on a rough surface or irregular surface, then reflected light is not parallel but spreads over a wide area.
2. This type of reflection is known as irregular reflection.

Question 4.
State the laws of reflection.
Answer:
(i) The angle of incidence (θi) is equal to the angle of reflection θr i.e. θi = θr.
(ii) The incident ray, the normal to the mirror at the point of incident and the reflected ray, all lie in the same plane.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 5.
Define angle of incidence.
Answer:
The angle that incident ray makes with normal drawn at the point of incidence is known as incident angle or angle of incidence. It is denoted by θi.

Question 6.
Define angle of reflection.
Answer:
The angle that reflected ray makes with normal drawn at the point of reflection is known as reflection angle or angle of reflection. It is denoted by θr.

Question 7.
What is a plane mirror?
Answer:
A plane mirror is a thin, flat and smooth sheet of glass having a shining coating of silver metal on one side.

Question 8.
What happens when a parallel beam of light is Incident on shining plane or smooth surface?
Answer:
The beam remains parallel after reflection a specific direction

Question 9.
What is a spherical mirror?
Answer:
1. A spherical mirror is a mirror whose reflecting surface is in fact a part of a hollow sphere of a glass.
2. Unlike plane mirrors, a spherical (curved) mirror converges or diverges parallel light rays incident on them.

Question 10.
Draw a labeled diagram showing various parts of a concave mirror.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 71

Question 11.
State the relation between radius and focal length of a spherical mirror.
Answer:
Radius of curvature (R) = 2 times focal length (f)
∴ \(f=\frac{R}{2}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 12.
Radius of a mirror is 25 cm. What will be its focal length?
Answer:
R = 2f \(f=\frac{R}{2}=\frac{25}{2}\) = 12.5 cm.

Question 13.
What should be the position of an object with respect to focus of a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, so that its real and magnified image is obtained? Draw a ray diagram to show the image formation.
Answer:
1. Given that f = 20 cm.
2. To obtain real and magnified image, the object should be placed between F1 and 2F2. Hence, the range will be between 20 cm to 40 cm.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 72
Question 14.
Draw a labeled diagram showing various parts of a convex mirror.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 73

Question 15.
How does a ray parallel to the principle axis behaves In a concave mirror? Show with diagram.
Answer:
Ray parallel to principal axis which after reflection passes through principal focus F.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 74

Question 16.
How does a ray that passes through the principle focus of a concave mirror behaves? Show with diagram.
Answer:
Ray passing through the principle focus will become parallel to the principle axis after reflection.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 75

Question 17.
Draw the diagram for a ray directed towards principle focus and its reflection through a convex mirror.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 76

Question 18.
Look at the diagram and describe the position, nature and size of the image formed.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 82

Position: Beyond centre of curvature C
Nature: Real and inverted
Size: Magnified

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 19.
For a concave mirror, draw the diagram for image formed when the object is placed beyond C.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 77

Question 20.
Fill the table with respect to concave mirror.
Answer:
(1) Position of image — On c, Nature — Real and inverted,
(2) Position of object — Behind the mirror, Nature — Virtual and erect

Question 21.
State one use of convex mirrors.
Answer:
It is used as rear-view mirrors in vehicles.

Question 22.
ROM wants to have an erect Image of an object using a converging mirror of focal length 40 cm.
(i) Specify the range of distance where the object can be placed in front of the mirror. Give reason for your answer.
(ii) Will the image be bigger or smaller than the object?
Answer:
(i) To have an erect image of an object, the position of object should be between pole of the concave mirror and its focus, i.e. between 0 to 40 cm.
(ii) The image formed will be magnified i.e. image will be bigger than the object.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 23.
Raghav drew the following diagram in which a ray of light is incident on a convex mirror. You need to redraw the diagram and complete the path of the ray after It gets reflected from the mirror.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 79

Question 24.
The focal length of a concave mirror is 20 cm. Where will you place the object if you want an image which is real, inverted and of same size as the object?
Answer:
40cm

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 25.
A concave mirror produces a real image which is five times magnified as compared to the object. The object is placed at 15 cm in the front of the mirror. At what distance will the image be produced?
Answer:
75cm
(Hint: magnification m = -v/u.
Since image is real, take – m instead of m. Object lies to the left of the mirror and so u = -u
∴ – m = -v/-u)

Question 26.
What is the angle of incidence for a ray of light passing through the centre of curvature of a concave mirror?
Answer:

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 27.
State the mirror formula.
Answer:
The formula which gives relation between object distance (u), image distance (v) and focal length (f) of a spherkal mirror is known as the mirror formula.
\(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Question 28.
Define magnification of spherical mirror.
Answer:
The ratio of image height (h’) to the object height (h) of the spherical mirror is called the magnification of the mirror.

Question 29.
State the formula of magnification.
Answer:
Magnification \(m=\frac{\text { Image height }\left(h^{\prime}\right)}{\text { Object height }(h)}=-\frac{v}{u}\)

Question 30.
For a mirror, h’ = 10 cm and h = 5 cm. Give its magnification.
Answer:
\(M=\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{10}{5}=2\)

Question 31.
If m < 1, state the relation between image size and object size.
Answer:
If m < 1, image size < object size.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 32.
What will be the magnification of an object whose height is 4 cm and which produces a real image of 6 cm height?
Answer:
-1.5cm

Question 33.
What is refraction?
Answer:
When a ray of light enters obliquely from one transparent medium to another transparent medium, its velocity changes due to which it gets deviated from its original direction at the surface separating two medias. This is called refraction.

Question 34.
Look at the diagram given here and watch the alphabets. Now write the correct sequence of (a) angle of incidence, (b) angle of emergence, (c) angle of refraction and (d) lateral displacement shown in the diagram as a, b, c and d.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 80
Answer:
The correct sequence is b, a, d, c

Question 35.
What is relative refractive index?
Answer:
1. The ratio of speed of light v1 in medium 1 to the speed of light v2 in medium 2 is known as the relative refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 (except the medium of vacuum).
2. It is denoted by 21 i.e. refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 36.
State the two factors that determine lateral displacement of a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass slab.
Answer:
(i) Lateral displacement is directly proportional to the thickness of optical glass slab.
(ii) Lateral displacement is directly proportional to the angle of incidence.

Question 37.
A student traces the path of a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass slab. Which angle is correctly marked?
Answer:
→ r
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 81

Question 39.
What is absolute refractive index?
Answer:
1. The ratio of speed of light in vacuum (or air) (c) to the speed of light of any other medium is known as the absolute refractive index or simply refractive index.
2. It is denoted by ‘i’

Question 40.
State the equation for absolute refractive Index.
Answer:
∴ Absolute refractive index η
\(=\frac{\text { speed of light in vacuum }}{\text { speed of light in medium }}=\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}\)

Question 41.
What is Snell’s law? Give its equation.
Answer:
1. The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the ratio of sine of angle of retraction is constant.
2. This constant is known as relative,e refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 and denoted’ by η21
∴ \(\eta_{21}=\frac{\sin \theta_1}{\sin \theta_2}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 42.
Observe the following incomplete ray diagram, where the image AB’ is formed after refraction from a convex lens:
On the basis of the above information, fill in the blanks:
(1) The position of object AB (not shown In the figure) must be ………………….
(2) The size of the object must be Than the size of the image.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 83

(1) beyond 2F1 (2) greater.

Question 43.
Akash took a candle and focused the image of its flame on a white screen with the help of a convex lens.
He recorded the following distances —
(1) Position of the candle (object) = 26 cm,
(2) Position of the convex lens = 50 cm, (3)
Position of the screen = 74 cm. Based on the given information calculate the focal length of the convex lens.
Answer:
Here, u = – (50 – 26) = – 24.0 cm
From the lens formula
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 84

∴ focal length f = 12 cm

Question 44.
What will you call a point inside a lens through which the light passes without deviation?
Answer:
Optical centre

Question 45.
What causes more bending of light rays passing through it – (1) A convex lens of long focal length or (2) A convex lens of short focal length?
Answer:
A convex lens of short focal length

Question 46.
State the equation for power of lens
Answer:
Power (P) = \(\frac{1}{f}\)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 47.
The magnification of an image formed by a convex lens is -1. Find the object distance in terms of its focal length.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 85
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 86

Question 48.
Look at the two ray diagrams given here. In which diagram will magnification be positive? Why?
Answer:
Magnification is positive in diagram (ii).
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 87
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 88

Reason: The image formed is virtual, erect and magnified. This means both the object and the image have positive heights.

Question 49.
Kruti says a thick convex lens has more power as compared to a thin convex lens. Is she correct? State your argument.
Answer:
Yes she is correct because thick convex lens has shorter focal length and hence more power.

Question 50.
What is the SI unit of power of lens?
Answer:
Dioptre
(Hint: Use magnification formula m Image height h’.
\(=\frac{\text { Image height } \mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\text { object height } \mathrm{h}}\) Real images are negative object height h images.)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 51.
A lens has a focal length of -25 cm. What will be the power and nature of this lens?
Answer:
4D; concave

Fill in the Blanks:

1. We cannot see things through regular reflection because …………..
Answer:
The light is reflected back only in one direction.

2. As per the law of reflection, the incident ray, the normal and the reflected ray are …………….
Answer:
In same plane

3. Image formed by plane mirror is ………… (Answer in terms of image property).
Answer:
Virtual and erect.

4. The size of image formed by plane mirror is same as object but is ……………….
Answer:
Laterally inverted

5. Light is ……………..
Answer:
Electromagnetic radiation which produces sensation in our eyes

6. If there is no reflection, the world would appear ……………
Answer:
Dark

7. ……….. and ……….. are the different types of reflection.
Answer:
Regular; Irregular

8. If the …………. surface is made reflecting, one can get a convex mirror.
Answer:
Outer

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

9. The centre of spherical glass ball is called of ……………… mirror.
Answer:
Centre of curvature

10. The …………… of the reflecting surface of the mirror is known as aperture.
Answer:
Diameter

11. The distance between pole and of mirror is called
Answer:
Focal length

12. …………….. Surfaces which are light in large amount.
Answer:
Completely polished

13. …………… image will be formed actually meet at some point.
Answer:
Real

14. …………….. mirror is used for close shaving.
Answer:
Concave

15. You can see a full length image of a tall building/tree in a ………………. mirror.
Answer:
Convex

16. If you visit Agra Fort you can see the distant full length view of the Taj Mahal in …………………….. mirror fitted there.
Answer:
Convex

17. In a concave mirror, a ray which is parallel to principal axis after reflection will ……………….
Answer:
Pass through the principal focus

18. In a concave mirror, a ray which is passing through centre of curvature will …………….
Answer:
Reflect back along the same path

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

19. The image formed by a concave mirror is at centre of curvature, real and inverted and same size as object. The position of the objects is …………………
Answer:
At centre of curvature principal focus reflect incident if the light rays

20. For a convex mirror, if the position of the object is at infinity, then the position, nature and size of the image will be ………..
Answer:
At focus, virtual and erect, highly diminished

21. An object of size 1 cm is placed at a distance of 15 cm from a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. The image distance will be ………………
Answer:
30cm
(Hint: Use mirror formula and follow sign convention.)

22. As per New Cartesian Sign Convention, the object is always placed to the of the mirror.
Answer:
Leftside

23. All the distances parallel to the principle axis are measured from
Answer:
The pole of the mirror.

24. A negative sign in the value of magnification indicates that the image is …………………..
Answer:
Real

25. In mirror formula, as per the sign convention, the image is taken as ……………….
Answer:
-v

26. In mirror formula, as per the sign convention, radius of curvature is taken as ……………….
Answer:
-R

27. Mirror formula can be represented as ………………
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}\)

28. The ratio of image height to the object height is called …………….
Answer:
Magnification

29. The positive value of magnification represents ……………….. image of an object.
Answer:
Virtual

30. ……… medium retracts most of the light incident on it.
Answer:
Transparent

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

31. Suppose that the radius of curvature R of a spherical mirror is 30 cm. In this case, its focal length (t) will be …………..
Answer:
15cm

32. The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction remains constant, subjected lo certain conditions. This law is known as …….
Answer:
Snell’s law of refraction

33. A medium in which speed of light is more is called ……………
Answer:
Optically rarer medium.

34. The sideways Shift of emergent ray from the direction of incident ray is called Lateral shift
Answer:
Leternal shifts

35. According to Snell’s Law constant.
Answer:
\(\frac{\sin \theta_1}{\sin \theta_2}\)

36. When a ray of light travels from optically denser to optically rarer medium,………………
Answer:
It moves away from normal

37. The formula for absolute refractive index is ……………………
Answer:
Velocity of light in vacuum (or air)! Velocity of light in medium

38. The refractive index of water in Which light travels from air is 1.33. Thus, the refractive index of light going from water to air will be ……………….
Answer:
0.75

39. For a convex lens. if an object is positioned at infinity, then the position, nature and size of the image will be and …………….
Answer:
Opposite side at F, real and Inverted, highly diminished (point sized)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

40. For a convex lens, ¡f the image is between F and 2F, real and inverted and diminished, then the object should be …………
Answer:
Beyond 2F

41. In a convex lens, If we put an object at 2F, we get its image also on other side of lens at 2F but real and inverted and
Answer:
Of same size

42. In a concave lens, If we wish to have an image between focus F and optical centre O we should place the object…………..
Answer:
Between infinity and optical centre O of the lens

43. ………………………….. the power of lens having 1m kcal length.
Answer:
1D

44. A person having myopic eyes uses a concave lens of local length 75 cm. The power of his lens will be ………………………

True or False

1. The incident ray, normal to the mirror at the point of incidence and the reflected ray, all lie in the same plane. — True
2. A shining spoon can be considered as a plane mirror. — False
3. Focal length (f) = 2R. — False
4. Minimum three rays are needed to construct a ray diagram. — False
5. SpherIcal mIrrors are the most commonly used curved mirrors. True or false. — True
6. Convex mirror is commonly used for shaving. — False
7. You can put an object at only two positions to obtain an image through a convex mirror. — True
8. Concave mirrors are commonly used as rear-view mirrors in vehicles. True or false? — False
9. Concave mirrors have wider field of view. — False
10. For W > h,m > 1 — True
11. Speed of light in a medium / Speed of light in air will give you absolute refractive Index. — True
12. Concave lens is a converging lens. — False
13. Lens formula and mirror formula differ only by a mathematical sign. — True
14. Sideways shifting of the light In a glass slab is called lateral shift. — True

Match the Following 

Question 1.

A

B

1. A perpendicular drawn at the point of incidence to the reflecting surface.(a) Linear magnification
2. The rays which strike the mirror surface near the periphery(b) Normal
3. The ratio of the height of the image to the height of the object(c) Absolute refractive index
4. The ratio of speed of light in vacuum to the speed of light in a medium(d) Marginal ray

Answer: (1-b), (2-d), (3-a), (4-c)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction

Question 2.

(A)(B)
1. Plane mirror(a) Real image, inverted and large
2. Concave lens(b) Virtual image, erect and same size
3. Convex lens(c) Virtual image, positive focal length
4. Convex mirror(d) Virtual image, negative focal length negative power

Answer: (1-b), (2-d), (3-a), (4-c)

Question 3.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 89

Answer:
(1-c), (2-b), (3-d), (4-a)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 10 Light Reflection and Refraction Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Short/Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
A copper rod of radius 1 cm and length 2 cm is drawn into a wire of length 18 m of uniform thickness. Find the thickness of the wire.
Solution :
We have,
Radius of copper rod (r1) = 1 cm
Length of copper rod (h1) = 2 cm
Volume of copper rod = πr1² × h1
= π × 12 × 2
= 2π cm3
Let r2 be radius of wire
Lenght of wire (h2) = 18 m
= 1800 cm
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 1
So, the diameter of the crossection i.e.
thickness of wire = \(\frac{2}{30}=\frac{1}{15}\)cm
= 0.67 mm (approx.)

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 2.
A solid metallic sphere of diameter 16 cm is melted and recast into smaller solid cones, each of the radius 4 cm and height 8 cm. Find the number of cones so formed.
Solution :
We have,
Radius of sphere (R) = \(\frac {16}{2}\) = 8 cm
Volume of sphere = \(\frac {4}{3}\)πR3
= \(\frac {4}{3}\) × π × 83
= \(\frac{4 \times 512 \pi}{3}\)cm3
radius of cone (r) = 4 cm
and height of cone (h) = 8 cm
Let the number of recast x cones be x
Volume of recast x cones
= x × \(\frac {1}{3}\)πr2h
= x × \(\frac {1}{3}\)π × 42 × 8
= \(\frac {128πx}{3}\)cm3

Since, solid sphere is melted and recast into smaller cones
∴ Volume of recast x cones = Volume of sphere
⇒ \(\frac{128 \pi x}{3}=\frac{4 \times 512 \pi}{3}\)
⇒ x = \(\frac{4 \times 512 \pi \times 3}{3 \times 128 \pi}\)
⇒ x = 16
Hence, number of recast cones = 16

Question 3.
A solid metallic cuboid of dimensions 9 m × 8m × 2 m is melted and recent into solid cubes of edges 2 m. Find the number of cubes so formed.
Solution :
We have,
Dimensions of cuboid = 9m × 8m × 2m
Volume of cuboid = 9 × 8 × 2
= 144 m3
edge of recast cube (a) = 2m
Volume of recast cube = a3
= (2)3 = 8m3
Let the number of recast cube be x
Since, cuboid is melted and recast into small x cubes
So, volume of x recasted cubes = Volume of cuboid
⇒ 8 × x = 144
⇒ x = \(\frac {144}{8}\) = 18
Hence, number of recast cubes = 18

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 4.
A solid mettalic cylinder of radius 3.5 cm and height 14 cm is melted and recast into a number of small solid mettalic balls, each of radius \(\frac {7}{12}\)cm. Find the number of bass so formed.
Solution :
We have,
Radius of cylinder (R) = 3.5 cm
Height of cylinder (h) = 14 cm
Volume of cylinder = πr² h
= π × (3.5)2 × 14 cm3
Andradius of recasted ball (r) = \(\frac {7}{12}\)cm
Volume of recasted small ball = \(\frac {4}{3}\)πr3
Let the number of recasted small balls be x
= \(\frac {4}{3}\)π(\(\frac {7}{12}\))3 cm3
since, cylinder is melted and recasted into x small balls
∴ Volume of x recasted = Volume of cylinder small balls
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 2
Hence, number of recasted smaller balls = 648

Question 5.
Find the number of coins of 1.5 cm diameter and 0.2 cm thickness to be melted to form a right circular cylinder of height 10 cm and diameter 4.5 cm.
Solution :
We have,
Radius of coins (r) = \(\frac {1.5}{2}\) = 0.75 cm
Thickness of coin (h) = 0.2
Volume of coin = πr²h
= π × (0.75)2 × 0.2
= 1.125 π cm3
Let the number of recasted coins be x
∴ Volume of x coins = x × 1.125 πcm3
Radius of cylinder (R) = \(\frac {4.5}{2}\) = 2.25 cm
and Height of cylinder (H) = 10 cm
Volume of cylinder = πR²H
= π × (2.25)2 × 10
= 50.625π cm3
Since, x coins to be melted to form a right circular cylinder
∴ Volume of x coins = Volume of cylinder
⇒ x × 1.125 π = 50.625π
⇒ x = \(\frac {50.625π}{1.125π}\)
⇒ x = 45
Hence, number of coins melted = 45

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 6.
A sphere of diameter 12 cm is Iropped in a right circular cylindrical vessel, partly illed with water. If the sphere is completely ubmerged in water, the water level in the cylindrical vessel rises by 3\(\frac {5}{9}\) cm. Find the diameter of the cylindrical vessel.
Solution :
We have,
Diameter of sphere = 12 cm
Radius of the sphere (r) = \(\frac {12}{2}\) = 6 cm
Volume of the sphere = \(\frac {4}{3}\)πr3
= \(\frac {4}{3}\) × π × 6 × 6 × 6
= 288π
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 3
If sphere dropped into the cylinder, water rises by 3\(\frac {5}{9}\) cm
= \(\frac {32}{9}\)cm
∴ Height of the water rises in the cylinder (h) = \(\frac {32}{9}\) cm
Let radius of cylinder = R cm
Volume of the water rises that contained cylinder = πR²h
= π × R² × \(\frac {32}{9}\)
Volume of rises water of cylinder = Volume of the sphere
⇒ π × R² × \(\frac {32}{9}\) = 288π
⇒ R² = \(\frac{288 \pi \times 9}{32 \times \pi}\)
⇒ R² = 9 × 9
⇒ R = \(\sqrt{9 \times 9}\)
⇒ R = 9 cm.
∴ Diameter of the cylinder
= 2 × 9 = 18 cm.
Hence, diameter of the cylinder
= 18 cm.

Question 7.
Water is flowing at the rate of 5 km/hr through a pipe of diameter 14 cm into a rectangular tank of dimensions 50 m × 44 m. Find the time in which the level of water in the tank will rise by 7 cm.
Solution :
We have,
Speed of water in pipe = 5 km/hr
∴ Length of water flow in pipe in 1 hours.
= 5000 m
Let time consumes in it = t hour
Radius of pipe (r) = \(\frac {14}{2}\) = 7cm = \(\frac {7}{100}\)m
Volume of water flown in t hours through pipe = πr²H
= π × (\(\frac {7}{100}\))2 × 5000 × t
= π × \(\frac {49}{100}\) × 5000 × t m 3
= 24.5 π × t m3
length of rectangle tank (l) = 50 m
Breadth of rectangle tank (b) = 44 m
Level of water rise (h) = 7 cm = \(\frac {7}{100}\)m
Volume of water in tank = l × b × h
= 50 × 44 × \(\frac {7}{100}\)
= 154 m3
Since, water flown through a pipe in the rectangular tank, so
Volume of water flawn through pipe in t hours = Volume of water in the tank
⇒ 24.5 π × t = 154
⇒ \(\frac{24.5 \times 22}{7}\) × t = 154
⇒ 77 × t = 154
⇒ t = \(\frac {154}{77}\)
⇒ t = 2 hours
Hence, time taken in which the level of water in the tank will rise by 7 cm = 2 hours.

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 8.
Two spheres of same metal weight 1 kg and 7 kg. The radius of smaller sphere is 3 cm. The two spheres are melted to form a single big sphere. Find the diameter of the new sphere.
Solution :
Radius of small sphere (r) = 3 cm
Volume of smaller sphere = \(\frac {4}{3}\)π × (3)3
= 36π cm3
Weight of smaller sphere is 1 kg and that of larger sphere is 7 kg
Since, 1 kg metal sphere occupies 36π cm3 sapse
How, weight of recasted metal sphere = 1 + 7 = 8 kg
∴ 8 Kg metal sphere occupies 36π × 8 cm3
Two sphere 1 kg and 7 kg mass melted and recast single sphere
Let the R be radius of recasted single sphere
∴ Volume of recasted single sphere = Volume of two 8 kg spheres
⇒ \(\frac {4}{3}\)πR3 = 36π × 8
⇒ R3 = \(\frac{36 \pi \times 8 \times 3}{4 \pi}\) = 216
⇒ R = 3\(\sqrt{6 \times 6 \times 6}\)
⇒ R = 6 cm
Hence, diameter of recasted new sphere = 2 × 6 = 12 cm.

Question 9.
504 cones each of diameter 3.5 em and hight 3 cm are melted and recast into a metallic sphere. Find the diameter of sphere and hence find its surface area. (use π = 22/7)
Solution :
We have,
Radius of each cone (r) = \(\frac {3.5}{2}\)
and its height (h) = 3 cm
Volume of 1 cone = \(\frac {1}{3}\)π × r2h
= \(\frac {1}{3}\)π × (\(\frac {3.5}{2}\))2 × 3
= \(\frac {12.25}{4}\)π cm3
Volume of 504 cones = \(\frac{12.25 \pi \times 504}{4}\)
= 1543.5 π
Let the R be radius of recasted sphere volume of recasted sphere = \(\frac {4}{3}\)πR3
Since, 504 cones are melted and recast into metallic sphere
∴ Volume of recasted sphere = Volume of 504 cones
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 4
Hence, diameter of sphere 21 cm and its surface area = 1386 cm2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 10.
From each end of a solid metal cylinder, metal was scooped out in hemispherical form of same diameter. The height of the cylinder is 10 cm and its base is of radius 4.2 cm. The rest of the cylinder is melted and converted into at cylindrical wire of 1.4 cm thickness. find the length of wire. (use π = 22/7)
Solution :
We have,
Base radius of cylinder (R) = 4.2 cm
Height of cylinder (h) = 10 cm
Volume of cylinder = πR²h
= π × (4.2)² × 10
= 176.4π cm3
Volume of metal scooped out = 2 × volume of hemisphere
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 5
= 98.784π cm3
Volume of rest of cylinder
= 176.4π × 98.784π
= 77.616 π cm3
let the length of wire be l cm
∴ Volume of wire = πr²l [here H = 1 = π × (0.7)2 × l]
[∴ radius of wire (r) = \(\frac {1.4}{2}\) = 0.7 cm]
= 0.49 πl
Since, rest of cylinder is melted and converted into a cylindrical wire.
∴ Volume of wire = Volume of rest of cylinder
⇒ 0.49πl = 77.616π
⇒ l = \(\frac {77.616л}{0.49π}\)
⇒ l = \(\frac {77.616}{0.49}\) = \(\frac {77.616}{49}\)
⇒ l = 158.4 cm
Hence, length of wire = 158.4 cm

Question 11.
A well of diameter 7 m is dug and earth from digging is evenly spread out to form a platform 22 m × 14 m × 2.5 m. Find the depth the well.
Solution :
We have,
Diameter of well = 7 m
∴ Its radius (r) = \(\frac {7}{2}\)m
Let depth of well be h m
Volume of soil dugout from well spread out to form a plateform.
So, volume of soil dugout from well = Volume of soil to form plateform
⇒ π × \(\frac {49}{4}\) × h = 770
⇒ h = \(\frac{770 \times 4}{49 \times \pi}\)
⇒ h = \(\frac{110 \times 4 \times 7}{7 \times 22}\)
⇒ h = 5 × 4 = 20 m
Hence, depth of well = 20 m

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 12.
A well of diameter 4 m dug 21 m deep. The earth taken out of it has beed spread evenly all around it in the shape of a circular ring of width 3 m to form an embankment. Find the height of the embankment.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 6
Solution :
We have,
Radius of the well (r) = \(\frac {4}{2}\) = 2 m
Depth of the well (h) = 21 m
Volume of the earth dug out = πr²h
= π × 22 × 21
= 84π m3
Radius of the embankment (R)
= 2 + 3 = 5 m
Let height of embankment be h’ m.
Volume of the earth used for making embankment = volume of the earth dugout
⇒ πr²h’ – πr²h’ = 84π
⇒ πh’ (R² – r²) = 84π
⇒ h’ (5² – 2²) = \(\frac {84π}{π}\)
⇒ h’ (25 – 4) = 84
⇒ h’ × 21 = 84
⇒ h’ = \(\frac {84}{21}\) = 4m
Hence, height of embankment is 4 cm.

Question 13.
Find the curved surface area of the frustum of a cone, the diameters of whose circular ends are 20 m and 6 m and its height is 24 m.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 7
Solution :
We have,
Radii of two circular ends are :
r1 = \(\frac {20}{2}\) = 10m, r2 = \(\frac {6}{2}\) = 3m
And its height (h) = 24 m
Slant height of frustum of cone (l)
= \(\sqrt{h^2+\left(r_1-r_2\right)^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{24^2+(10-3)^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{576+49}\)
= \(\sqrt{625}\)
= 25 m
Curved surface area = πl(r1 + r2)
Frustum of a cone = 3.14 × 25 (10 + 3)
= 78.5 × 13
= 1020.5 m2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 14.
A bucket is in the form of a frustum of a cone of height 30 cm with raddi of its lower and upper ends as 10 cm and 20 cm, respectively. Find the capacity of the bucket. Also find the cost of milk which can completely fill the bucket at the rate of ₹ 40 per litre. (use π = 22/7)
Solution :
We have,
Raddi of lower and upper ends of frustum of a cone are
r2 = cm and r1 = 20 cm
And its height (h) = 30 cm
Capacity of bucket = Volume of bucket
= \(\frac {πh}{3}\)(r1² + r2² + r1r2)
= \(\frac{22}{7} \times \frac{30}{3}\)[(20)2 + (10)2 + 20 × 10]
= \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 10[400 + 100 + 200]
= \(\frac {220}{7}\) × 700
= 22000 cm3
Milk in the container = \(\frac {22000}{1000}\) liters
[∴ 1 litre = 1000 cm3]
= 22 litres
cost of milk = 22 × 40 = ₹880
Hence, capacity of bucket = 22 litres and cost of milk = ₹880

Question 15.
A metal container, open from the top, is in the shape of frustum of a cone of height 21 cm with raddi of its lower and upper circular ends as 8 cm and 20 cm respectively. Find the cost of milk which can completely fill the container at the rate of ₹35 per litre.
Solution :
We have,
Radii of lower and upper circular ends of a metal container open from the top are
r2 = 8 cm, r1 = 20 cm
and its height (h) = 21 cm
Volume of container = \(\frac {πh}{3}\)(r1² + r2² + r1r2)
= \(\frac{22}{3} \times \frac{21}{3}\)[(20)2 + 82 + 20 × 8]
= 22 [400 + 64 + 160]
= 22 [624]
= 13728 cm3
= \(\frac {13728}{1000}\)
= 13.728 litres
cost of milk = 13.728 × 35
= ₹ 480.48

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 16.
The height of a cone is 10 cm. The cone is divided into two parts using a plane parallel to its base at the middle of its height. Find the ratio of volume the two parts.
Solution :
Let VAB cone and VN be its axis, and let M be mid point of VN,
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 8
VN = 10 cm, VM = MN = \(\frac {10}{2}\)
Let VM be h’ = 5 cm
Let radii of upper and lower ends of frustum be r1 cm and r2 cm respectively
Δ VNB ~ Δ VMD [By AA similarity]
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 9
Hence, ratio of the required volumes = 1 : 7

Question 17.
A right circular cone is cut by two planes parallel to the base trisecting the height. Compare the volumes of the three parts into which the cone is divided.
Solution :
Let the right circular cone be cut by two parallel planes DE and FG.
∴ BC || DE || FG.
Now,
Δ ARG ~ ΔAPC
⇒ \(\frac {RG}{PC}\) = \(\frac {AR}{AP}\)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 10
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 11
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 12

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
A playin top (lattu) consistr of a hemisphere and a _______
Solution :
cone

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 2.
πl (r1 + r2) is _______ surface area of frusum.
Solution :
curved

Question 3.
In conversion of one solid to other solid, we have constant ________
Solution :
volume

Question 4.
Two spheres have raddi in the ratio 2 : 1, then ratio of their volume is _______
Solution :
8 : 1

Question 5.
While calculating the volumes of combi- nation of solids, the volume of common parts should be _______
Solution :
excluded

Question 6.
Volume of cylinder of radius r and height h is 27 cm3. Then the volume of cone of same radius and same height is _______ cm3.
Solution :
9

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 7.
Bodies which have three dimensions in space are called ______.
Solution :
solids

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Volume of two spheres are in the ratio 64 : 27 the ratio of their surface areas is :
(a) 3 : 4
(b) 4 : 3
(c) 9 : 16
(d) 16 : 9
Solution :
(d) 16 : 9

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 13
So correct choice is (d).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 2.
A hollow cube of internal edge 22 cm is filled with spherical marbles of diameter 0.5 cm and it is assumed that \(\frac {1}{8}\) space of the cube remains unfilled. Then the number of marbles that the cube can accommodate is :
(a) 142296
(b) 142396
(c) 142496
(d) 142596
Solution :
(a) 142296

Number of marbles
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 14
So correct choice is (a)

Question 3.
A metallic spherical shell of internal and external diameters 4 cm and 8 cm, respectively is melted and recast into the form at cone of base diameter 8 cm. The height of the cone is:
(a) 12 cm
(b) 14 cm
(c) 15 cm
(d) 18 cm
Solution :
(b) 14 cm

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 15
So correct choice is (b).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 4.
A solid piece of iron in the form of a cuboid of dimensions 49 cm × 33 cm × 24 cm, is moulded to form a solid slphere. The radius of the splhere is:
(a) 21 cm
(b) 23 cm
(c) 25 cm
(d) 19 cm
Solution :
(a) 21 cm

volume of sphere = volume of cuboid.
\(\frac {4}{3}\)πr3 = l × b × h
\(\frac {4}{3}\) × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × r3 = 49 × 33 × 24
r3 = 73 × 33
r = 7 × 3 = 21 cm
so correct choice is (a).

Question 5.
A mason constructs a wall of dimensions 270 cm × 300 cm × 350 cm with the bricks each of size 22.5 cm × 11.25 cm × 8.75 cm and it is assumed that \(\frac {1}{8}\) space is covered by the moter then the number of bricks used to construct the wall is :
(a) 11100
(b) 112000
(c) 11000
(d) 11300
Solution :
(b) 112000
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 16
So correct choice in 11200 i.e., (b).

Question 6.
Twelve solid spheres of the same size are made by melting a solid metallic cyclinder of base diameter 2 em and height 16 cm. The diameter of each sphere is :
(a) 4 cm
(b) 3 cm
(c) 2 cm
(d) 6 cm
Solution :
(c) 2 cm

volume of 12 sphere volume of cylinder
12 × \(\frac {4}{3}\)πr3 = πR²Н = π × 1 × 16
⇒ r = 1 cm
∴ d = 2r= 2 cm
So correct choice (c).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes

Question 7.
The radii of the top and bottom of a bucket of slant height 45 cm are 28 cm and 7 cm, respectively. The curved surface area of the bucket is
(a) 4950 cm2
(b) 4951 cm2
(c) 5952 cm2
(d) 4953 cm2
Solution :
(a) 4950 cm2

l = 45 cm, R = 28 cm, r = 7 cm
CSA = π(R + r)
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 45(28 + 7)
= \(\frac{22 \times 45 \times 35}{7}\)
= 4950 cm2
So correct choice is (a).

Question 8.
A medicine capsule is in the shape of a cylinder of diameter 0.5 cm with two hemispheres stuck to each of its ends. The length of entire capsule is 2 cm. the capacity of the capsule is:
(a) 0.36 cm3
(b) 0.35 cm3
(c) 0.34 cm3
(d) 0.33 cm3
Solution :
(a) 0.36 cm3

r = \(\frac {0.5}{2}\)cm
capacity of capsule
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 17
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes - 18
Hence correct choice is (a).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 13 Surface Areas and Volumes Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 1.
‘Every new generation accumulates variation during reproduction.’ Explain the statement.
Answer:
1. Organisms have two modes of reproduction,

  • Asexual reproduction and
  • Sexual reproduction. Offspring are born through any of these modes.

2. During reproduction, these offspring inherit two things from their previous generation. They are –

  • A common basic body design and
  • Some fine (i.e. minor) variations.

3. When the offspring grow and reproduce the next generation, the new generation offspring will again inherit two things.
They are –

  • Same basic body design along with differences given by their previous generations and
  • Some fine new variations.

4. This way with each new generation born, the variations get accumulated.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 2.
Explain: Parental generation, First generation and Second generation.
Answer:
(a) Parental generation (P):
The first set of parents crossed is called parental generation. The parental generation is denoted by ‘P’.

(b) First generation (F1):
All the offspring born from the first set of parents crossed are said to be belonging to the First generation. The First generation is denoted by F1

(c) Second generation (F2):
All the offspring born from the F1 generation are said to be belonging to the Second generation. The Second generation is denoted by F2.

Question 3.
Explain with the help of a diagram how variation (or diversity) is created over succeeding generations.
Answer:
1. As shown in the diagram, consider a single bacteria at the top reproduces on its own asexually.
2. It gives birth to two individuals. The two individuals reproduced will have

  • Similar body design like their previous (parental) generation and
  • Some minor variations/ differences of their own.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 1

3. Each of these organisms in turn may give birth to two individuals in the next i.e. first generation. So, there are in total four organisms in the second generation.

4. As can be seen, each of the four individuals in the bottom row is somewhat different from each other. Each one has

  • The common body design inherited from its previous generation along with
  • Some unique differences of its own. So, each organism although similar, is not the exact copy and hence shows variation.

5. Since this is an example of asexual reproduction, the differences are very minor. In case of sexual reproduction, the changes would be much diversed.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 4.
What is the most obvious outcome of reproduction? What do the rules of heredity determine?
Answer:
1. The most obvious outcome of reproductive process is that similar designs of individuals are maintained generation after generation.
2. The rules of heredity determine the process by which traits and characteristics get transferred from one generation to another.

Question 5.
Organisms undergo variation during reproduction. Do all these variations survive?
Answer:
1. Although organisms undergo variation, all the variations do not survive.
2. Depending upon the nature of variations, different individuals would gain different kinds of advantages from the variations.
3. An individual has to withstand several environmental effects and changes. So, organisms having variations which can adapt to the environment survive, others may not.

Question 6.
What do you mean by heredity? Explain.
Answer:
Heredity:
1. Heredity means the transmission of characters from parents to offspring. For example, eggs laid by a sparrow will hatch sparrow and not any other bird. Similarly, a dog gives birth only to pups.
2. Thus, in this sense, it can be said that heredity is continuity of features from one generation to another. This is the essence of heredity.
3. Hereditary information is present in the fertilized egg i.e. zygote.
4. The zygote develops into the same organism to which it belongs. And so the new organisms produced resemble their parents.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 7.
Explain the following terms:
Answer:
1. Heredity: The transmission of parental traits to their offspring is called heredity. This transmission always follows certain principles or laws.
2. Genetics: The study of how inherited traits (or say heredity) are passed-on and the variations occurring therein is called genetics.
3. Trait: A trait is a particular characteristic, quality or tendency that someone or something has. For example, height, skin or eye colour, certain behaviour, etc.
4. Inherited trait: A feature or a characteristic of an organism that it has received in its genes from its parents is called an inherited trait.

Question 8.
Why there are two versions for each trait in each child?
Answer:
In a sexual reproduction, the father as well as the mother contributes equal amounts of genetic material to the child. This means that each trait that the child has can be influenced by the DNA of the father as well as mother. Thus, for each trait there will be two versions in each child.

Question 9.
What are the fundamental characteristics of inheritance of traits?
Answer:
The fundamental characteristics of inheritance of traits are as follows:
(i) A unit of inheritance is called as a gene. Each gene controls a character(s).
(ii) Genes have two alternative forms for each inherited trait.
(iii) From the two alternative traits, the trait which is expressed is known as a dominant trait whereas, the trait which is not expressed is known as a recessive trait.
(iv) From two alternative traits for an expression of a character, one trait may be dominant over the other.
(v) The dominant trait is represented by capital letter (Generally ‘T’) while the recessive trait is represented by the small letter (‘t’).
(vi) The unexpressed/recessive trait may be expressed in any future generation.
(vii) In sexual reproduction both the parents give equal amount of chromatin material/genetic material to make a zygote. So, each inherited trait is influenced by both the parents equally.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 10.
Explain Mendel’s contribution through his study of inheritance of characteristics. OR In Mendel’s study, the ‘T’ gene is dominant while the ‘t’ gene is recessive. Explain in detail with an example. OR Explain Gregor Johann Mendel’s experiment showing inheritance of any one character.
Answer:
1. Mendel studied garden pea plants for the expression of a character. The character under study was the height of plants
2. He observed two contrasting expressions of height — tall plants and dwarf plants/short plants.
3. For the purpose of his study, Mendel took pure tall plants (TT) and pure short plants (tt).

(i) Cross-pollination between parent (P) generation plants:
Mendel performed cross-pollination between TT — pure tall plants and tt — pure short plants. These TT and ft are known as a parent (P) generation plants.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 2

Observation:
The plants that got produced from Parent (P) generation are known as First (F1 generation) plants. Mendel observed that all the plants of F1 generations were as tall as TT of P generation i.e. as tall as their parents. So, Mendel thought that only one parental trait i.e. of tallness (instead of both trait i.e. tallness and shortness) was inherited by the F1 generation plants.

(ii) Self-pollination of (a) Tall Parental Generation plants and (b) F1 generation plants:
In the second phase, Mendel performed self-pollination of
(a) Tall i.e. U Parental Generation plants and
(b) F1 generation plants.

Observation:
(a) The new plants produced by the self-pollination of Tall i.e. U Parental Generation plants were all tall.
(b) The new plants produced i.e. the second (F2) generation plants by the self-pollination of F1 generation plants were a mix of tall and short plants. Mendel observed that in F2 generation, around 75°/° of the plants were tall and 25% of the plants were short. This means the ratio of tall short plant in the F2 generation was 3:1.

Thus, in the second trial, Mendel concluded that in the first trial, the F1 generation plants had inherited both the traits i.e. the trait of tallness and dwarfism, from their parent (P) generation but, only the trait of tallness got expressed. However, when he self-pollinated the F1 generation plants, both the traits i.e. the trait of tallness and dwarfness could be seen in the F2 generation plants.

Question 11.
What did Mendel conclude from his experiment on pea plants?
Answer:
Mendel’s conclusion:
1. The contrasting characters (traits) i.e. tallness and shortness of the pea plant are determined by factors.
2. Two copies (i.e. in pairs) of such factors are present in sexually reproducing organism and they are known as a ‘gene’.
3. These two may be identical, or may be different, depending on the parentage.
4. When individuals having contrasting features are crossed, the feature which gets expressed is known as a dominant feature (trait) and the one that does not get expressed is known as a recessive feature (trait).
5. Tall plants are represented by ‘TT’ as well as ‘Tt’, but short plants are represented by ‘tt’. This means that presence of even single copy of‘T’ is enough to make a plant tall, but for a plant to be short, both the copies have to be ‘t’. Hence, T is called a dominant trait whereas ‘t’ is called a recessive trait.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 12.
Explain Mendel’s experiment on inheritance of two characters simultaneously. OR Explain Mendel’s experiment with different seeds. OR Explain the inheritance of seed colour and shape of the seed of pea plant Pisum Sativum.
Answer:
1. Mendel performed an experiment to study garden pea plants having two different characters. The two characters that the pea plant had were –

  • Colour of the seeds and
  • Shape of the seeds

2. Mendel wanted to study how the traits express themselves when the plants contain two characters as mentioned above rather than one.
At first, Mendel selected the following two pure breeding pea plants:
(a) Plants with yellow colour seed and round shape seeds.
(b) Plants with green colour seed and wrinkled shape seeds.

  • He considered these plants as parent plants.
  • Mendel performed cross-pollination between both these parent plants and obtained the F1 generation.

1. Observation of F1 generation plants:

  • All the plants of F1 generation had yellow coloured seeds having round shape.
  • This means that ‘yellow colour’ and ‘round seeds’ were dominating characteristics (traits) in the F1 generation.
  • In the second trial, he performed self-pollination between the F1 plants to obtain F2 generation.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

2. Observation of F2 generation plants:
Mendel obtained four different types of F2 generation plants as mentioned below:
(a) Yellow and round seed plants
(b) Yellow and wrinkled seed plants
(c) Green and round seed plants
(d) Green and wrinkled seed plants

This indicates that characteristics (traits) of colour yellow and green and characteristics (traits) of shape round and wrinkled are inherited independently from each other.

The ratio in which Mendel obtained the plants was —

  • (Yellow round) : (Green round) : (Yellow wrinkled) : (Green wrinkled) = 9 : 3 : 3 : 1
  • The results obtained in F2 generation clearly indicate that the inheritance of two different characters is independent to each other.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 3

Question 13.
How does the mechanism of heredity work in terms of genes control?
Answer
1. The DNA found in the cells is the fundamental source of genetic information for making specific proteins in the cell.
2. In general, a segment of DNA which provides information to synthesize protein is known as a gene.
3. In plants as well as organisms, the characters (traits) get expressed due to specific reactions. These reactions take place with the help of enzymes.
4. The enzymes as well as several hormones are made up of proteins.
5. So, when a specific gene undertakes synthesis of a specific protein it results in expression of a specific character.

Example:
1. Let us consider height (tallness) as a characteristic of a plant.
2. Plants have hormones that trigger growth. This means height of plants depend upon the amount of a particular harmone.
3. A particular type of enzyme works as a catalyst for this hormone. And the synthesis of this enzyme is regulated by gene located on the DNA.
4. Thus, if the enzyme is synthesized in required amount and if it works efficiently, a lot of quality hormone can be produced which will then boost the height of the plant.
5. However, it the gene has altered due to some reason, the enzyme will become less efficient.
6. This will result in less amount of hormone in the plant and hence it will be of dwarf size.
7. From this example, it can be clearly said that genes control the characteristics or traits.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 14.
Describe sex determination in human beings in detail.
Answer:
Sex determination:
1. In sexual reproduction, the mechanism to determine the sex of an organism is known as sex determination.
2. In human beings, the sex is determined by genes located on the chromosomes.
3. These genes are inherited by the offspring from their parents.
4. In humans, each cell contains 23 pairs of chromosomes.
5. Out of these, 22 pairs are autosomes and one pair is of sex chromosomes.
6. These 22 pairs of autosomes are same in males as well as females. Only the 23 pair differs.
7. In females, the 23 pair contains two similar ‘X’ sex chromosomes i.e. the 23 pair is ‘XX’.
8. In males, the 23rd pair contains one ‘X’ sex chromosome and one ‘Y’ sex chromosome i.e. the 23’’ pair is ‘XV’. The ‘Y’ sex chromosome is smaller than the ‘X’ sex chromosome.
9. Out of all the sperms, 50% sperms contain ‘X’ chromosome while the other 50% sperms contain ‘Y’ chromosome.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 4

Sex of the foetus:
1. If a sperm carrying ‘X’ chromosome fuses with the ‘X’ chromosome of female egg i.e. if ‘XX’ combination occurs, female will be produced.
2. However, if a sperm carrying ‘Y’ chromosome fuses with the ‘X’ chromosome of female egg, i.e. if ‘XY’ combination occurs, male will be produced.
3. Since male sperm carries both ‘X’ and ‘Y’ chromosomes and female carries only ‘X’ and ‘X’ chromosomes, males are responsible for the sex of the child born.
4. When zygote is formed and the embryo starts developing, the gonads (organs that produce sex cells) are undifferentiated.
5. Later, the gonads develop either into testes or ovaries.
6. If the zygote contains the Y sex chromosomes, the gonad differentiates into testes.
7. These testes then produce male sex hormones and stimulate development of a male individual.
8. Similar process takes place if the zygote contains only ‘X’ chromosome.

Question 15.
What are sex chromosomes? Which sex chromosomes are found in male and female human beings? State the chromosome responsible for the development of male child in human beings.
Answer:
1.The chromosomes that determine the sex of the new born baby are called sex chromosomes. X chromosome and Y chromosome together form the pair of sex chromosomes in male human beings. Thus, the male contains XV sex chromosomes.
2. In female, both the sex chromosomes are X. So, the female sex chromosomes are called XX.
3. A male child can take birth only when the zygote receives Y chromosome from the male human being.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 16.
Every organism resembles its parents. Give reason.
Answer:
1. When male and female sex cells fertilize, zygote is formed.
2. Zygote develops into an organism.
3. Zygote contains heredity information from the parents.
4. This information is passed on to the next generations.
5. Hence, every organism will resemble its parents.

Question 17.
What is natural selection? Explain.
Answer:
1. Natural selection is a central concept of evolution. In general terms it is also called ‘survival of the fittest’.
2. Natural selection can be considered as the one ‘selected by nature’.
3. When organisms develop certain favourable traits i.e. the traits that are more suited for nature to select, the organisms survive and hence reproduce. These organisms then pass their traits to the next generation.
4. Over time this process allows organisms to adapt to their environment. The organisms better adapted to their environment tend to survive and produce more offspring.

Question 18.
Give an example of beetles to understand the concept of natural selection.
Answer:
1. Consider a group of 12 red beetles. They live in bushes mat have green leaves.
2. The population of beetles will grow by sexual reproduction and so every generation produced will show variations.
3. Let us consider that crows feed on these beetles. The more beetles the crows eat, the fewer beetles will remain for reproduction.
4. Now, suppose, a colour variation arises during reproduction. Under this, one of the beetle reproduced attains ‘green colour’ instead of red.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 5
5. When this green coloured beetle undergoes reproduction, it passes this green colour to its progeny. So, all the new beetles reproduced from this green coloured beetle are green.
6. Because green-coloured beetles get merged with green leaves, now the crows cannot see green coloured beetles on the green leaves and therefore cannot eat them. As a result, the green beetles do not get eaten, while the red beetles continue to be eaten.
7. In conclusion, the population of green beetles increase whereas that of red beetles decline drastically.
8. Here, the beetles that adapted the green colour became more suited to nature and so got ‘selected by nature (i.e. natural selection)’ for remaining alive.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 19.
Give an example of beetles to understand the concept of genetic drift.
Answer:
1. Consider a group of 12 red beetles. They live in bushes that have green leaves.

2. The population of beetles will grow by sexual reproduction and so every generation produced will show variations.

3. A colour variation arises during reproduction and few of the new beetles born are of blue colour
instead of red. The blue beetle can pass the colour on to its progeny, so that all its progeny beetles are blue.

4. Crows living in the bush feed on the beetles. They can see both red as well as blue beetles and thereiore can eat both the varieties.

5. Initially, in the population, most of the beetles are of red coloured and only few are blue. At this point, a sudden and an unexpected change takes place. An elephant comes and stamps on the bushes where the beetles live.

6. By chance, the stamping of elephant kills mostly red beetles. The few beetles that have survived are mostly blue.

7. Now, the beetle population again slowly expands, but the beetles in the population are mostly blue.

8. Here, the change in colour as a variation seen in the beetles did not increase their chance of survival, the way it happened when the beetles adopted a green colour. The blue coloured beetle survived simply by chance because the elephant foot got stamped on the red beetles and not the blue.

9. From this we conclude that accidents in small populations can change the frequency of some genes in a population, even if they give no survival advantage This concept is called genetic drift. Genetic drift resulted in variation but did not give any advantage of adaptation to the beetles.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 6

Question 20.
What is genetic drift? Explain.
Answer:
Genetic drift:
The sudden and random change in the gene frequency that occurs by chance in a small population is known as genetic drift.’

Explanation:
1. When a large group of population migrates or dies due to natural calamity, certain traits get eliminated from the population.
2. As a result, in the remaining population the gene frequency is altered. So, in the next progenies some different kind of variations arise.
3. At times due to genetic drift, the population may get free of some unfavourable character and at times, it is also possible that some important character is lost.

Importance:
1. Genetic drift influences evolution.
2. It is possible that the population becomes different because there is a probability that each population may fix a different genotype.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 21.
What is evolution? Explain.
Answer:
Evolution:
1. Evolution is a type of gradual formation of new plants or organisms from the pre-existing primitive plants or animals respectively by Constant and relatively long time changes.
2. The word ‘evolution’ has been derived from Latin word ‘evolvere’ which means to untold’ or ‘unroll’.
3. Evolution is the sequence of gradual changes, which have taken place over millions of years in primitive plants and animals from which new species are formed.
4. Evolution is a constant process taking place in the organisms since life originated. In fact, all the varieties of organisms, which we see around us. have evolved from some ancestors that lived on this earth long time ago.

Question 22.
Explain acquired and Inherited traits (characteristics).
Answer:
(A) Acquired traits:
1. Acquired trait means a trait or characteristic of an organism that it has not inherited but has developed in response to the environment.
2. For example, if an organism starves for sometime and reduces its weight, then it ¡s called acquired trait.
3. The reduced weight due to starvation will not change DNA of the cells.
4. As a result, reduced weight is not a trait, which can be. inherited by future generations of organisms that will starve.
5. Other examples are cut tail of a mouse, a man who knows how to swim, or speak German or roller skate, or may have a scar on the face due to accident. None of these traits will be passed on to the future generations because these traits have not altered the genes of the organisms.
6. Thus, the changes in the non-reproductive body cells of an organism cannot be transmitted to its progeny.
7. Only those traits will be inherited to their progeny where in change has occurred in the genes in gametes of organisms during the process of reproduction.

(B) Inherited trait :
1. A trait of an organism, which is caused by a change in its DNA, is known as inherited trait.
2. For example, suppose a population of red beetles is living in bushes with green leaves.
3. Suppose a colour variation arises during reproduction in the gene of reproductive cells and one green colour beetle arises instead of red.
4. Here, the colour of this beetle is an inherited trait, which can be transmitted to the next generations.

Question 23.
Explain the terms: (a) Variations (b) Acquired variations.
(a) Variations:

  • Any difference that occurs between cells, individual organisms, or groups of organisms of any species either by genetic differences or by the effect of environmental factors on the expression of the genetic potential is called variation.
  • Organisms may show variation in their physical appearance, metabolism, rate of fertility, mode of reproduction, behaviour, etc.

(b) Acquired variations :

  • An acquired characteristic (variation) is a change which is acquired not due to heredity but due to response to the environmental factors.
  • Acquired variation may occur in the function or structure of an organism caused after birth due to reasons such as disease, Injury, accident, repeated use or misuse, or other environmental factors.
  • Acquired variations are limited to the organism that acquires the variation. Such variations than vanish and with the death of that organism and hence do not get inherited.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 24.
Differentiate between acquired and inherited traits.
Answer:

Acquired traitsInherited traits
1. It is a trait of an organism that is not inherited but developed in response to the environment.
2. These changes do not occur in the genes of gametes of the organism.
3. These changes are considered as changes in the non-reproductive body cells.
4. Cut tail of a rat expertise to play a game etc. are acquired characteristics.
1. It is a trait of an organism, which is caused by a change in its DNA.
2. These changes occur in the genes of the gametes of the organisms.
3. These changes are considered to be changes in the reproductive body cells.
4. Colour of eyes, skin, facial characteristics, etc. are hereditary characteristics.

Question 25.
What is speciation? Explain.
Answer:
Speciation: The process of evolution of new species that occurs when members of similar population no longer interbreed to produce fertile off spring is known as speciation.

Speciation due to geographical isolation:
1. Suppose due to some reason the population of a given species gets divided into two groups.
2. These groups then get separated from each other geographically by certain barriers like rivers, seas, mountain ranges, or even natural calamities.
3. This means these two groups got geographically isolated and they will not be able to interbreed and hence exchange genes.
4. Over a period, both groups might adapt to its environment through natural selection and develop their gene pool.
5. Eventually, the gene pools of both populations might become so different that the new species of these organisms would evolve in different populations.
6. Thus, due to process of random change in gene frequency (gene drift), after thousands of years individuals become so different that they cannot reproduce with each other and so new species are formed.
7. Thus, geographical isolation leads to reproductive isolation due to which there is no gene flow between two separated groups of population.
8. Thus, we may get completely new species of population.

Other reasons of speciation:
Other reasons can be changes in DNA, change in number of chromosomes, gene cells of two isolated groups of populations, which cannot fuse with each other, etc.

Question 26.
How are organisms classified? OR What do you mean by characteristics as the base of classification? Explain.
Answer:
1. When we classify organisms by grouping them in certain way, it helps us to study them properly.
2. One of the basic methods of classifying the organisms is on the basis of similarities they possess.
3. For classifying we will have to decide which characteristics show ‘fundamental differences’ or say important differences and which show ‘basic differences’ or say less important differences.

Characteristics as a base of classification:

1. A characteristic means a particular type of appearance (form) or behaviour (function).
2. We humans have four limbs (two hands and two legs) and it is our appearance characteristic.
3. Plants perform photosynthesis is a behaviour (function) characteristic.
4. Some basic characteristics are shared by most organisms. For example, cell is the basic unit of life in all organisms. However, the characteristics of the next level of classification would be shared by most, but not all organisms.
5. At cell level, the classification could be whether the cell has a nucleus or not.
For example, cells – of bacteria do not have nucleus, while the cells of most other organisms do.
6. Further, organisms that have nucleus in their cells can be classified as uni-cellular or multi-cellular.
7. Among multi-cellular organisms, classification can be done as whether they undergo photosynthesis or not.
8. The multi-cellular organisms that do not undergo photosynthesis can be further classified as,whether the skeleton is inside the body or around the body.
9. By classifying in this manner we can develop a hierarchy of organisms.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 27.
Giving an example of humans to explain what increases the probability of two species having a common ancestor.
Answer:
The more characteristics two species will have in common, the more closely they will be related. And the more closely they are related, the more are the chances of them being having a recent common ancestor.
Example:
A brother and a sister are closely related. They have common ancestors in the first generation before them, namely, their parents. Now, the girl and her first cousin are also related, but less than the girl and her brother. The reason for this is that although cousins have common ancestors i.e. their grandparents, in the second generation but the parents of these two cousins are different. So, the cousins are less related.

Question 28.
It is believed that non-living material must have given rise to life. How can one say this?
Answer:
1. If we keep on forming small groups of species with recent common ancestors, then eventually we can reach at a stage of forming super-groups of these groups with more distant common ancestors, and so on.
2. Theoretically, if we keep going backwards like this we may reach to a notion that originally there were a single species at the very beginning of evolutionary time.
3. If that is the case, then at some point in the history of the earth, non-living material must have given rise to life.

Question 29.
How did life originate on earth?
Answer:
It is believed that life must have developed from simple inorganic molecules which were present on earth soon after it was formed.
2. It was also speculated that the conditions on earth at that time could have given rise to more complex organic molecules that were necessary for life.
3. It is believed that the first primitive organisms would have arisen from further chemical synthesis.

Question 30.
What do you mean by evidences of evolution? In what way homologous organs and analogous organs give evidence for evolution?
Answer:
Evidence for evolution: Certain significant sources which provide proofs for evolution are called evidences for evolution.

The main ones are:
(1) Evidences through homologous organs,
(2) Evidence through analogous organs and
(3) Evidence through fossils

(1) Evidences through homologous organs:

  • Those organs that have same internal structure but different functions are called homologous organs.
  • For example, the basic design of internal structure of bones of forelimbs of a frog, lizard, bird, bat and man is same, even though these organs perform different functions.
  • This indicates that all these forelimbs have evolved from a common ancestral animal, which had a same basic internal structure.

(2) Analogous organs:

  • Those organs, which have different designs but similar appearance and carry out similar functions are called analogous organs.
  • For example, wings of insects and birds have different structures but perform similar functions.
  • Thus, the presence of analogous organs in different animals provide evidence that they are not evolved from common ancestors, still they perform similar functions to survive prevailing environment.

Question 31.
Differentiate between homologous organs and analogous organs.
Answer:
1. When we classify organisms by grouping them in certain way, it helps us to study them properly.
2. One of the basic methods of classifying the organisms is on the basis of similarities they possess.
3. For classifying we will have to decide which characteristics show fundamental differences’ or say important differences and which show basic differences’ or say less important differences.

Characteristics as a base of classification:
1. A characteristic means a particular type of appearance (form) or behaviour (function).
2. We humans have four limbs (two hands and two legs) and it Is our appearance characteristic.
3. Plants perform photosynthesis is a behaviour (function) characteristic.
4. Some basic characteristics are shared by most organisms. For example, cell is the basic unit of life in all organisms. However, the characteristics of the next level of classification would be shared by most, but not all organisms.
5. At cell level, the classification could be whether the cell has a nucleus or not. For example, cells
of bacteria do not have nucleus, while the cells of most other organisms do.
6. Further, organisms that have nucleus in their cells can be classified as uni-cellular or multi-cellular.
7. Among multi-cellular organisms, classification can be done as whether they undergo photosynthesis or not.
8. The multi-cellular organisms that do not undergo photosynthesis can be further classified as, whether the skeleton Is Inside the body or around the body.
9. By classifying in this manner we can develop a hierarchy of organisms.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 27.
Giving an example of humans to explain what increases the probability of two species having a common ancestor.
Answer:
The more characteristics two species will have in common, the more closely they will be related. And the more closely they are related, the more are the chances of them being having a recent common ancestor.
Example:
1. A brother and a sister are closely related. They have common ancestors in the first generation before them, namely, their parents.
2. Now, the girl and her first cousin are also related, but less than the girl and her brother. The reason for this is that although cousins have common ancestors i.e. their grandparents, in the second generation but the parents of these two cousins are different. So, the cousins are less related.

Question 28.
It is believed that non-living material must have given rise to life. How can one say this?
Answer:
1. It we keep on forming small groups of species with recent common ancestors, then eventually we can reach at a stage of forming super-groups of these groups with more distant common ancestors, and so on.
2. Theoretically, if we keep going backwards like this we may reach to a notion that originally there were a single species at the very beginning of evolutionary time.
3. It that is the case, then at some point in the history of the earth, non-living material must have given rise to life.

Question 29.
How did life originate on earth?
Answer:
1. It is believed that life must have developed from simple inorganic molecules which were present on earth soon after it was formed.
2. It was also speculated that the conditions on earth at that time could have given rise to more
complex organic molecules that were necessary for life.
3. It is believed that the first primitive organisms would have arisen from further chemical synthesis.

Question 30.
What do you mean by evidences of evolution? in what way homologous organs and analogous organs give evidence for evolution?
Answer:
Evidence for evolution: Certain significant sources which provide proofs for evolution are called evidences for evolution.
The main ones are:
(1) Evidences through homologous organs
(2) Evidence through analogous organs and
(3) Evidence through fossils

(1) Evidence.s through homologous organs:

  • Those organs that have saine internal structure but iterent functions are called homologous organs.
  • For example, the basic design of internal structure of bones of forel,mbs of a frog, lizard, bird, bat and man is same. even though these organs perform different functions.
  • This Nidicates that all these forelimbs have evolved from a common ancestral animal, which had a same basic internal structure.

(2) Analogous organs:

  • Those organs, which have different designs but similar appearance and carry out similar functions are called analogous organs
  • For example, wings of insects and birds have different structures but perform similar functions
  • Thus, the presence of analogous organs in different animals provide evidence that they are not evolved from common ancestors still they perform similar functions to survive prevailing environment.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 31.
Differentiate between homologous organs and analogous organs.
Answer:

Homologous organsAnalogous organs
1. These organs have similar internal structure.
2. These organs perform different functions.
3. These organs have evolved from a common ancestor.
4. For example, forelimbs of a frog, lizard, a bird, bat and a man are homologous
1. These organs have different basic design.
2. These organs perform similar functions.
3. These organs have not evolved from a common ancestor.
4. Wings of insects and birds are examples of analogous organs.

Question 32.
What are fossils? How do they provide evidence for evolution? OR What are fossils?
Answer:
1. The remains of dead organisms buried under the earth for millions of years are known as fossils.
2. Fossils are impressions of dead plants or animals that lived in the past.
3. When plants or animals die, the micro-organisms get decomposed in the presence of moisture and oxygen.
4. However, sometimes due to environmental conditions, their bodies do not decompose completely.
5. Such body parts of the plants and animals become fossil and can be available on digging the earth.
6. Fossils can be in the form of imprints, burrow of a worm, or even an actual bone.

Example:

  • If the dead leaf gets caught in the mud, leaf will not decompose completely.
  • The mud around the leaf will set around it as a mould which will then slowly become hard to form a rock and retain the impression of the leaf. Thus fossil of a leaf is formed.
  • By studying these fossils, scientists learn how organisms evolved over time.

Question 33.
Describe any three methods of tracing evolutionary relationships among organisms.
Answer:
Evidence for evolution: Certain significant sources which provide proofs for evolution are called evidences for evolution.
The main ones are:
(1) Evidences through homologous organs
(2) Evidence through analogous organs and
(3) Evidence through fossils

(1) Evidences through homologous organs:

  • Those organs that have saine internal structure but different functions are called homologous organs.
  • For example, the basic design of internal structure of bones of forel,mbs of a frog, lizard, bird, bat and man is same. even though these organs perform different functions.
  • This Nidicates that all these forelimbs have evolved from a common ancestral animal, which had a same basic internal structure.

(2) Analogous organs:

  • Those organs, which have different designs but similar appearance and carry out similar functions are called analogous organs
  • For example, wings of insects and birds have different structures but perform similar functions
  • Thus, the presence of analogous organs in different animals provide evidence that they are not evolved from common ancestors still they perform similar functions to survive prevailing environment.

1. The remains of dead organisms buried under the earth for millions of years are known as fossils.
2. Fossils are impressions of dead plants or animals that lived in the past.
3. When plants or animals die, the micro-organisms get decomposed in the presence of moisture and oxygen.
4. However, sometimes due to environmental conditions, their bodies do not decompose completely.
5. Such body parts of the plants and animals become fossil and can be available on digging the earth.
6. Fossils can be in the form of imprints, burrow of a worm, or even an actual bone.

Example:

  • If the dead leaf gets caught in the mud, leaf will not decompose completely.
  • The mud around the leaf will set around it as a mould which will then slowly become hard to form a rock and retain the impression of the leaf. Thus fossil of a leaf is formed.
  • By studying these fossils, scientists learn how organisms evolved over time.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 34.
Mention three important features of fossils which help in the study of evolution.
Answer:
(i) Fossils represent how the ancient species were preserved.
(ii) Fossils help in establishing evolutionary relationship between organisms and their ancestors.
(iii) Fossils help in knowing the time period in which organisms lived.

Question 35.
How can you say that eyes evolved in stages?
Answer:
1. The eye is an important organ for animals.
2. It is a complicated organ which cannot be generated by a single DNA change.
3. The eyes of animals have been created in stages after many generations.
4. First of all, eye was formed in planaria (flat-worm).
5. The eyes of planaria are very simple and are just like ‘eyes-spots’ which detect light.
6. These simple eyes provide a survival advantage to planaria.
7. Thus eye seems to be a very popular adaptation. Gradually, it becomes a complex organ.
8. Most of the animals like insects, octopus, invertebrates and vertebrates have eyes.
9. The structure of eye in above organisms is different which suggests the evolution of eye and is an example of evolution taken place stages.

Question 36.
How can you say that birds are very close to reptiles? OR Give reason. Birds are closely related to reptiles.
Answer:
1. In some dinosaurs, feathers could not be used for flying but provided insulation in cold weather. But, later they might have become useful for flight. Birds however later adapted to flights.
2. Thus, presence of feathers in the birds tells us that birds are quite closely related to reptiles, since dinosaurs which had feathers were reptiles.

Question 37.
Explain how wild cabbage has evolved over the years. OR Explain evolution by stages of analogous organs with the help of artificial section of evolution method.
Answer:
1. As per the definition of analogous organs, the organs that have different basic design but similar appearance and carry out similar functions are called analogous organs.
2. From this concept, it is said that very dissimilar looking structures evolved from common ancestral body design. But all these guesses are about history, which is very old.
3. A present day example to prove this concept can be of wild cabbage.
4. If we study cabbage, we can learn that cabbage provides evidence that a completely dissimilar ‘ looking plant can evolve from it by the process of evolution.
5. Before more than 2000 years, the farmers cultivated wild cabbage as food plant.
6. With the passage of time, farmers gave various modifications to it.
7. Some farmers obtained broccoli (a kind of vegetable) while others obtained sterile flowers and developed cauliflower.
8. Some other farmers selected swollen parts of wild cabbage and developed another variety known as kohlrabi.
9. Some farmers have developed slightly large leaves of wild cabbage and their leafy vegetable is called kale.
10. Thus, now wild cabbage is the ancestor of cabbage, broccoli, cauliflower, kohlrabi and kale varieties, which are obtained by farmers by performing artificial selection. Moreover, all these varieties look different from their ancestor i.e. wild cabbage.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 7

Question 38.
It is incorrect to consider evolution as progress. Explain.
Answer:
1. Actually, no real ‘progress’ has taken place in the idea of evolution.
2. Evolution is simply the generation of diversity and the shaping of the diversity by environmental selection.
3. The only progressive trend that is seen in evolution is that with time more and more complex body designs have emerged. This does not mean that the older designs were inefficient. Many older and simpler designs still survive.
4. One of the simplest life forms bacteria still inhabit the most inhospitable habitats like hot springs, deep-sea thermal vents and the ice in Antarctica.
5. Hence, it is incorrect to consider evolution as progress.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 39.
How can you say that humans have not evolved from different races and that they all belonged to only one region of the world?
Answer:
1. Across the earth, there is a great diversity in humans.
2. For quite a long time, man thought about different races of human.
3. Initially, human race was identified on the basis of skin colour and the humans were known as yellow, black, white or brown.
4. However, in the recent years, it has been proved that all the human beings have evolved from a single species called the Homo sapiens.
5. By research, it has been established that we all have emerged from Africa.
6. Our genetic foot prints can be traced back to Africa.
7. A couple of hundred thousand years ago, some of our ancestors left Africa while others stayed back.
8. Those who left Africa slowly spread over the planet from Africa to West Asia to Central Asia, Eurasia, South Asia and East Asia.
9. Humans also migrated to islandsof Indonesia and Philippines, Australia and reached America.
10. They went with groups, sometimes separating from each other and mixing with each other, even moving in and out of Africa.
11. Thus, humans have all evolved from Homo sapiens and initially belonged to Africa.

Question 40.
Differentiate between dominant trait and recessive trait.
Answer:

Dominant traitRecessive trait
These traits can be seen in F1 generation.
Dominant trait is found in F1 as well as F2 generation in larger quantities.
F1 generation is a cross of two plants with different traits.
These traits cannot be seen in F1 generation.
Recessive trait is found in F2 generation, that too in lesser quantity.
F2 generation is a self-pollination of F1 generation.

Question 41.
Give the pair of contrasting traits of the following characters in pea plant and mention which is dominant and which recessive.
(i) Yellow seed
(ii) Round seed
Answer:

CharacterContrasting traits
DominantRecessive
(i)  Seed colour
(ii)   Seed type
yellow
round
green
wrinkled

Question 42.
Why did Mendel choose pea plant for his experiments? OR Mendel selected pea plant (Pisum sativum) for his experiments to study inheritance. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Pea plants are very small and so it is quite easy to manage them. Also, they grow easily.
2. They produce a large number of progeny and so the characters they show can be studied more accurately on a larger scale.
3. Pea plants have both male and female reproductive organs. As a result, they can either self-pollinate themselves or cross-pollinate with another plant. This helps in understanding the traits properly.
4. Pea plants have sharply defined and contrasting traits such as height (tall, dwarf), seed colour (yellow, green), etc.
5. They are annual plants. So, every year, one can obtain a new generation plant.
6. These characteristics of the pea plant make it quite favourable for performing research. Hence, Mendel choose this plant.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 43.
Males are responsible for the sex of the child produced. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Sex of the child is determined by the sex chromosomes that its zygote contains.
2. If the zygote contains ‘Y’ sex chromosome over and above ‘X’ chromosome, it will turn into male and if both sex chromosomes are ‘X’, the child born will be a female.
3. A female sex cell contains ‘XX’ sex chromosome whereas a male contains ‘XY’ chromosome.
4. Thus, a female can always donate ‘X’ chromosome but it is the male that can provide ‘Y’ chromosome to female ‘X’ chromosomes and produce a male.
5. However, if the male donates ‘X’ chromosome, a female will be born.
6. Thus, males and not females are responsible for the sex of the child produced.

Question 44.
Changes in the non-reproductive body cells of an organism cannot be transmitted to its progeny. Give reason.
Answer:
1. Only those traits will be inherited to their progeny wherein change has occurred in the genes in gametes of organisms during the process of reproduction.
2. For example, if an organism starves for some time and reduces its weight, then It is called acquired trait.
3. The reduced weight due to starvation will not change DNA of the cells.
4. As a result, reduced weight is not a trait, which can be inherited by future generations of organisms that will starve.
5. Thus, the changes in the non-reproductive body cells of an organism cannot be transmitted to its progeny

Question 45.
Does genetic combination of mothers play a significant role in determining the sex of a new born?
Answer:
1. The mothers have a pair of XX chromosomes. This means that all children whether boy or girl can inherit X-chromosome only from their mother.
2. Only males have XV chromosome. One of these two will be passed on to the offspring. So, whether the sex of the new born will be male or female can be decided only through the male chromosome. Hence, genetic combination of mothers does not play a significant role in determining sex of the new born.

Question 46.
Why do all the gametes formed in human females have only X-chromosome?
Answer:
The genetic making of the females is such that their sex chromosomes have only X chromosomes. This means both the chromosomes in the female germ cells have X chromosome. So, naturally, the gametes formed in human females have only X-chromosomes.

Question 47.
A woman has only daughters. Analyze the situation genetically and provide a suitable explanation.
Answer:
1. Man contains both X and Y chromosomes. This means males have XV chromosome. So, it is mans sex cells that determine the sex of the child born.

2. Women contain only XX chromosomes so she can contribute X chromosome only. A woman has only daughters. This indicates that in every fusion, the sperm of the male carrying X-chromosome got fertilized with the X chromosome of the female ovum. So, if a boy were to be born, the Y chromosome from male should have travelled and fertilized with X chromosome of the female.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 48.
Why reduction in weight of beetle bug cannot be considered as an inherited trait?
Answer:
1. The weight of the beetle bug got reduced because of starvation. It did not change the DNA of the germ (sex) cells. Change in non-reproductive tissues cannot be passed on to the DNA of the germ cells.

2. Since the DNA is not changed, the change i.e. low weight cannot be inherited by the progeny of a starving beetle.

3. Hence, even if some generations of beetles are low in weight because of starvation, it cannot be considered as an example of evolution because the change is not inherited over generations. When such scarcity of food gets over and the beetle get sufficient food the new beetles will be healthy.

Question 49.
‘Experience of an Individual during its lifetime cannot be passed on to its progeny and cannot direct evolution’ What do you mean by this statement? Explain giving example.
Answer:
Change in non-reproductive tissues cannot be passed on to the DNA of the germ cells. Hence the experiences of an individual during its lifetime can neither be passed on to its progeny nor can such experiences result in evolution.

Example:
1. If we breed a group of mice, all their progeny will have tails.
2. Suppose we remove the tails of each generation of these mice by surgery then it does not mean that the progeny is tailless.
3. Artificially removing the tail does not bring any change in the genes of the germ cells of the mice.
4. So, the cut-tall that a generation of mice experienced cannot become a trait to be passed on to the next generation.

Question 50.
Work out which trait would be considered dominant and which one recessive in the given figure.
Answer:
Stage 1 (F1 generation):
When a cross occurs between a coloured flower plant and a white flower plant, the F1 generation plant produced has all the coloured flowers. This means ‘the coloured flowered trait’ is dominant over ‘white flowered trait’.

Stage 2 (F2 generation):
Although, the white flowered trait did not get expressed in F1 generation. it did get expressed in F2 generation. This means the ‘white flowered trait’ is the recessive trait.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 8

Question 51.
Sakhaaram, a poor farmer has 2 daughters. He feels that he should have a son who can help him in his farming work. So when his wife again gets pregnant, he tells her that this time she should not give birth to a girl again. If she does so, he will abandon her. So, she insists her to go for sonography and remove foetus it is found to be of a female.
Now, answer the following questions:

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Questions:
1. Who is the responsible for the sex of the children? — Sakhaaram or his wife?
2. ‘Owing to the poor condition of Sakhaaram, removing the female foetus is a good solution.’ State your comments.
3. Which sex chromosome of Sakhaaram did not do its job of giving birth to a male child in previous cases?
4. The village sarpanch advised Sakhaaram to accept the born child irrespective of the sex as it is God’s decision and also because that is the only legal way. Which values has Sarpanch shown?
Answers:
1. Sex of the child gets determined by the chromosome of the male parent. Hence, Sakhaaram is responsible for the sex of the children.
2. Removing female foetus is a crime. Sakhaaram can be jailed for doing so. Moreover, socially, such an act disturbs the sex-ratio.
3. Y-chromosome.
4. The Sarpanch has shown the values of morality, empathy towards Sakhaaram and care and concern towards his wife. Moreover, the Sarpanch also displayed the values of awareness towards the laws of our country.

Question 52.
Given below is the experiment carried out by Mendel to study inheritance of two traits in garden pea:
(a) What do the letters A, B and C represent?
(b) State the objective for which Mendel performed this experiment.
Answer:
(a) A = gamete of round green (RY) plant
B = gamete of wrinkled (ry)
C = F1 generation (all round yellow)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution 9

(b) Mendel’s objective was to show independent inheritance of traits or to prove law of independent assortment.

Question 53.
The legendary Milkha Singh, also known as ‘The Flying Sikh’ is the source of inspiration for millions of indians who aspire to become a great runner. However, Milkha’s son Jeev is a golfer and not a runner.
Now answer the following questions:

Questions:
1. Didn’t Jeev inherit the running skill from Milkha Singh? Why or why not?
2. Which type of traits is running?
Answers:
1. Skills such as running, swimming, acting, dancing, etc. cannot be inherited because such skills are acquired skills. Milkha Singh acquired it by extreme hard work and dedication. His son acquired the skills of golfing.
2. Running is an acquired skill. It can be acquired by putting dedicated and planned effort in the field of one’s choice.

Question 54.
Explain whether the traits like eye colour or height are genically Inherited or not. Do power to lift weight and reading French also belong to same category? Justify your answer.
Answer:
(a) Colour of eye and height are genetically inherited.
Reason:
Traits such as colour of eye and height cannot be changed or acquired during a life because they are controlled by the genes which an individual inherits from the parents.

(b) Power to lift weight and reading French can be acquired during life time.
Reason:
1. These traits are achieved by an individual by experience and practice. Hence, these are acquired characters.
2. These acquired characters do not change DNA of germ cells and so they cannot be inherited or passed to the next generation.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 55.
Which of the following traits cannot be passed on the progeny? Justify your answer.
(i) Rudimentary eyes of planaria.
(ii) Absence of tail in a mouse (after surgical removal)
(iii) Low weight of a starving beetle.
Answer:
(i) Trait number
(ii) Absence of tail in a mouse (after surgical removal) and
(iii) Low weight of a starving beetle cannot be passed on the progeny.

Reason:
These traits are present in non-reproductive tissues. So, they do not change the DNA of the germ cells.

Very Short Answer Type Questions 

Question 1.
Define heredity.
Answer:
The process of transmission of characters from parents to the offspring is known as heredity.

Question 2.
Define genetics
Answer:
The branch of science which deals with heredity and variation is known as genetics

Question 3.
In a sexual reproduction, offspring is similar to the characteristics of parents however it is not identical to the parents. Justify this statement.
Answer:
Inheritance from previous generation includes carrying forward the basic body structure along with minor variations. Hence It is rightly said that though offspring is similar it is not identical to the parent.

Question 4.
Why would you say that asexual reproduction is not suitable for introducing variation in species?
Answer:
Asexual reproduction involves a single parent. The offspring produced has same set of chromosomes which exhibit little or no variation. Hence asexual reproduction is not suitable for introducing variation in species.

Question 5.
How can we say that variation In species Increases the probability of survival?
Answer:
Variation improves the adaptability of the species according to the climatic conditions. This increases the chances of survival.

Question 6.
State the types of earlobes that can be seen in humans.
Answer:
We can see two types of earlobes in humans. They are —
(i) Attached earlobes Le, earlobes which are attached to the side of the head.
(ii) Free earlobes i.e. earlobes which seem hanging and hence unattached to the side of the head.

Question 7.
Point out a variation that has been observed in human beings.
Answer:
Free or attached earlobes is a variation that can be observed in human beings.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 8.
What is meant by a pure plant (or pure line plant)?
Answer:
A breed or strain of animals or plants that maintains a high degree of consistency in certain characters as a result of inbreeding for generations is called a pure breed of plant or animal. Such a plant of animal maintains homozygous for all genes.

Question 9.
Who is considered as a ‘father of genetics’?
Answer:
Gregor Johann Mendel is considered as a ‘father of Genetics’.

Question 10.
What is the contribution of Gregor Johann Mendel?
Answer:
Gregor Johann Mendel established Mendelian Inheritance Laws. He made major contributions in genetics.

Question 11.
Which term did Mendel use to describe genes?
Answer:
Mendel used the word ‘factor’ to describe genes.

Question 12.
Name the plant on which Mendel performed his experiments.
Answer:
Mendel performed experiments on Pisum Sativum (Garden pea)

Question 13.
What do you mean by dominant and recessive traits?
Answer:
While inheriting the traits from parent, the allele of a gene that masks the other variants is called as the dominant trait whereas the one that gets masked is called as recessive trait.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 14.
What are F1 and F2 generations?
Answer:
F1 is the first generation reproduced from two distinct parental type of same species. F2 is the second generation reproduced from breeding of F1 generation.

Question 15.
What did Mendel observe in F1 progeny when he crossbred a tall and a short plant?
Answer:
Mendel observed that there were no medium height plants. All the plants in F1 progeny were tall in height.

Question 16.
What was the second observation that Mendel make from F2 progeny of garden peas plant?
Answer:
Mendel found that 75% of F2 generation plant produced from F1 progeny were tall whereas 25% of them were short heighted.

Question 17.
If TT and Tt trait combination produces tall plants, which of the traits is a dominant trait?
Answer:
In the above stated combination of traits, T is the dominant trait for tallness.

Question 18.
How did Mendel prove that the traits are independently Inherited by the progeny?
Answer:
When Mendel cross pollinated one plant with yellow and round seeds with another plant having green and wrinkled seeds, he observed that the F2 progeny generated four different types of plants with the different combinations of the above mentioned traits. This proves that the traits are independently inherited by progeny.

Question 19.
What is the phenotype ratio of Mendel’s experiment done to study inheritance of a single character?
Answer:
3:1

Question 21.
What is the genotype ratio of Mendel’s experiment done to study InherItance of a single character?
Answer:
1:2:1

Question 22.
What is the phenotype ratio of Mendel’s experiment to study inheritance of two characters?
Answer:
9:3:3:1

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 23.
State the correct sequence for the expression of tall trait in pea plant.
(A) A lot of hormone will be made
(B) A gene provides information for protein
(C) A hormone triggers the growth in height
(D) An enzyme works efficiently
Answer:
(B) – (D) – (A) – (C)

Question 24.
Write expanded form of DNA.
Answer:
Deoxyribonucleic acid

Question 25.
What is a gene?
Answer:
Gene is considered to be the basic unit of heredity. A section of DNA in a cell which provides information of a protein is called as gene for that protein.

Question 26.
How is the sex of an offspring determined in human beings?
Answer:
The genes inherited from the parents determines the sex of the offspring in human beings. If an X chromosome is inherited from father, the sex will be female whereas if Y chromosome is inherited from father, the sex will be male.

Question 27.
Give an example of an animal in which sex is not genetically determined.
Answer:
In snails, sex is not determined genetically.

Question 28.
Would a new born child with XX pair of chromosome be a boy or a girl?
Answer:
The new born child with XX pair of chromosome would be a girl.

Question 29.
What is the difference between the sex chromosome of a male and a female?
Answer:
Women have a perfect pair of sex chromosomes and both are called X whereas men have a mismatched pair in which one is X with a normal length and the other is Y which is of shorter length.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 30.
Suppose, a gene of brown eyes is dominant to a gene of blue eyes. What would be the eye colour of a child born If he inherits gene of blue eyes from mother and a gene of brown eyes from father.
Answer:
The child have brown coloured eyes.

Question 31.
It a woman with brown hair gene b marries a man with black hair gene B, what would be the hair colour of offspring born with the below mentioned combination?
(i) bb, (ii) Bb, (iii) BB
Answer:
Offspring born with contrition bb would have brown hair whereas the offspring born with the combinations Bb and BB would have black hair

Question 32.
How would you differentiate an acquired trait from an inherited trait?
Answer:
The trait of an organism that is passed on from the DNA of a parent to an offspring is an inherited flit whereas the trait that an organism develops as a response to the environment and through me experience is an acquired trait.

Question 33.
Do young once of mice whose tails have been cut are born without tails? Justify your name.
Answer:
The young ones are born with tails because cutting the tail of parent mice does not after the genes of mice

Question 34.
What is evolution?
Answer:
The change introduced in the offspring from the parents through variation in species is known as evolution.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 33.
Name the scientist who first came up with the theory of evolution.
Answer:
Changes Darwin first introduced the theory of evolution.

Question 38.
Which are the two basic factors responsible for evolution?
Answer:
Heredity and deflation are the two basic factors responsible for evolution.

Question 37.
What are the two population of one species who cannot reproduce called as?
Answer:
Such poputation are called as independent population.

Question 38.
What is natural selection?
Answer:
The process whereby organisms get batter adapted to their environment tend to survive and produce more oftsprng is called …….. .

Question 39.
State any three reason which cause speciation.
Answer:
Geographical isolation, changes in DNA. emergence of a variation n population. etc are few of the newly reasons which can cause speciation.

Question 40.
How can geographical isotation impact specistion in species which reproduce:
(i) asexualy,
(ii) sexually?
Answer:
In case of asexual reproduction geographical isolation may not result in speciation because the offspring are reproduced from already existing parent throught salt fertilization. it has high chance of speciation in case of sexual reproduction as geoephically isolated species may rarely get involved in cross fertilization.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 41.
What do you mean by genetic drift?
Answer:
The sudden and random changes in the gene frequency occurring in a small population by chance is known as a genetic drift.

Question 42.
I am able to inculcate diversity in organisms without any adaptations that too simply by chancing the frequency of certain genes in a population. identify me.
Answer:
Genetic drift

Question 43.
On what basis do we classify organisms? Give an example.
Answer:
We can classify organisms based on characteristics i.e. the appearance or behavior. The ability to do photosynthesis is a characteristic which helps us classify these organisms in plant kingdom.

Question 44.
What are the homologous characteristics of organisms? Give an example.
Answer:
The organs having similar origin and similar basic structure but may perform different functions are homologous organs. For example, frogs. lizards, birds and humans. All of these have limbs with similar structures but they are used to perform different functions.

Question 45.
Describe analogous organs with an example.
Answer:
Analogous organs are the organs which have similar functions even though they might have different origin. For example, the wings of a bat and a butterfly perform the functions of flying but they do not have common ancestry.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 46.
What are fossils?
Answer:
When the organisms die, their body gets decomposed and then gets absorbed in nature. But at times, the body or few parts of body remains without getting decomposed completely. Such preserved traces of organisms are called fossils.

Question 47.
Which evolutionary explanation is true for the feathers?
(1) Birds are very closely related to reptiles
(2) Birds and bat are very closely related to each other.
Answer:
Statement I

Question 48.
What Is the ‘relative way’ to find the age of a fossil?
Answer:
Relative way compares the depth of two fossils at which they are found in earth’s surface. The fossil that is found near to surface of earth is more recent than fossil that is discovered at deeper layer.

Question 49.
Which fossil dId we discover in Narmada Valley recently?
Answer:
A skull of a dinosaur was discovered in Narmada valley a few years ago.

Question 50.
How does the dating method work for calculating the age of a fossil?
Answer:
In dating method, the different isotopes (Carbon-14) of the same element found in fossil are compared to the current available element for calculating the age of a fossil.

Question 51.
What is the possible explanation of evolution of complex organs like eyes?
Answer:
It can be explained that the evolution of such complex organs took place at regular stages. For example, it may have started with a rudimentary eye which initially just detected light.

Question 52.
Give an example of an animal having rudimentary eye.
Answer:
Planaria is a type of flat-worm having rudimentary eye.

Question 53.
Mention one characteristIc which lndicates close relation between birds and reptiles
Answer;
Existence of feathers on the body of few dinosaurs (who were reptiles) and also on the body of birds indicates a close relationship between birds and reptiles.

Question 54.
Give an example of evolution through artificial selection. OR List any six vegetables which have been evolved from wild cabbage due to artificial selection.
Answer:
Humans, through artificial selection have cultivated wild cabbage by focusing on various characteristics. This resulted in evolution to multiple types of vegetables such as cauliflower, broccoli, kohlrabi, kale, cabbage and red cabbage.

Question 55.
How can variation in population help us in understanding evolution?
Answer:
We know that minor changes in DNA during reproduction is the basic event In evolution. If we compare DNA of different species over the period of time this can help us in understanding evolution of species.

Question 56.
Give an example which proves that older body designs and characteristics are not in efficient.
Answer:
Bacteria, which are the simplest and oldest body designs are successfully surviving in conditions such as hot springs, deep-sea thermal vents and ice in Antarctica. This proves that older body designs and characteristics are not inefficient.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 57.
Where were the earliest traces of human species found? What is the name of that species?
Answer:
The earliest traces of human beings known as Homo sapiens have been found in Africa.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. During reproduction, an offspring inherits two things from its previous generation, common basic body design and …………..
Answer: some fine (minor) variations

2. Variations in the new generation occur due to ……………
Answer: DNA copying

3. Selection of variants by environmental factors forms the basis for …………………
Answer: evolutionary processes

4. The rules of determine the process by which traits and charactenstics are reliably inherited.
Answer: Heredity

5. If the traits get expressed in the first generation, they are known as …………..
Answer: Dominant traits

6. The DNA segment which is responsible for the synthesis of a specific type of protein is called ……………..
Answer: Gene

7. The lowest part of the ear pinna is known as an …………..
Answer: Ear-lobe

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

8. …………… can change their sex on their own.
Answer: Snails

9. It is the chromosome of ……………….. that determines the sex of the child born.
Answer: male sex cell

10. In layman language, the phrase related to natural selection is ……………..
Answer: survival of the fittest

11. A trait developed in response to the environment is called ………………..
Answer: acquired trait

12. Acquired traits are ……. in nature.
Answer: temporary

13. Genetic drift leads to accumulation of …………………
Answer: different changes (variation)

14. The of eyes provide survival advantage to them……………..
Answer: planaria

15. Thus, presence of feathers in the birds tells us that birds are quite closely related to…………
Answer: reptiles

16. …………. used to be the most common way of identifying human races.
Answer: Skin colour

True OR False

1. Organisms have two modes of reproduction. — True
2. Suppose a bactena is able to survive better in a heat wave. This means that quite likely the next generation will be able to survive in a heat-wave — True
3. Organisms undergo variation and most variations survive resulting in high rate of survival of those organisms. — False
4. If a trait A exists in 8% of a population of an asexually reproducing species and a trait B exists in 42% of the same population, it means population with trait A must have arisen earlier and is more stable to variation. — False
5. Practically, the father contributes more amount of genetic material to the child as compared to the mother. — False
6. In Mendel’s experiment, in the first place, no ‘medium-height’ plants were produced. This means the plants gained trait only from one of the parent and not both and so his first experiment failed. — False
7. In Mendel’s experiments F1 progeny was obtained by cross pollination. — True
8. In Mendel’s experiments F2 progeny was obtained by cross pollination. — False
9. In Mendel’s experiments, characters of both the parents were observed in F2 generation. — True
10. The enzyme synthesis in the cell is controlled by genes. — True
11. In general, the pea plant shows cross-pollination. — True
12. In some reptiles, change in temperature of the fertilized egg determines the sex of the newborn. — True
13. The size of both the chromosome in women is same, while it is unequal in men. — True
14. A child who inherits a Y chromosome from her father will be a girl, and one who inherits an X chromosome from him will be a boy. — False
15. If a person is on dieting and loses weight, he is said to have acquired a trait. — True
16. An inherited trait alters the DNA. — True
17. If a person from Ahmedabad who loves living in mountains migrates to Himalayas and lives there for 20 years, his child when born will develop similar love for the mountains. — False
18. Our forelimbs are similar to lizards. — True
19. It is believed that both, human beings and chimpanzees have a common ancestor. — True
20. Practically speaking, there is no real ‘progress’ in the idea of evolution. — True

Match the Following:

Question 1.

Column I.Column II.
1. Gene
2. New combination
3. Y-chromosome
4. Inheritance
p. Genetical trait
q. Segment of DNA
r. Mitosis
s. Male sex

Answer:
(1- q), (2 – r), (3 – s), (4 – p)

Question 2.

Column I.Column II.
1. Ammonites
2. Snail
3 Planaria
4. Dinosaurs having feathers
p. Reptilia
q. Eye-spots for the first time
r. Can change sex
s. Fossils

Answer:
(1 – s), (2 – r), (3 – q), (4 – p)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution

Question 3.

Column I.Column II.
1. Variation
2. Natural selection
3. Artificial selection
4. Dating fossils
p. Ratios of isotopes
q. Change in form or function of the organism
r. Change in variety through selective hybridization
s Evolution of species

Answer:
(1 – q), (2 – s), (3 – r), (4 – p)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 9 Heredity and Evolution Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 1.
Explain reproduction. Why is it vital? OR Reproduction is not necessary for maintaining the life of an Individual then why do organisms reproduce?
Answer:
Reproduction:
1. The production of new organisms from the existing organisms of same species is known as reproduction.
2. Every organism remains alive for a limited time. In other words, one that takes birth has to die at some point of time.
3. Considering this fact, if an organism does not reproduce, it is quite likely that one day its species will become extinct. Not only this, even if one species vanishes, it disturbs the entire environmental cycle.
4. Hence, even though, the organism does not need to undergo reproduction for maintaining his own life, it reproduces so that it may continue the existence of its species. And this is the reason why reproduction is vital for the survival of the species.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 2.
Organisms of the same species look similar. What is the role of DNA copying in this? OR Discuss the meaning and need of DNA copying.
Answer:
1. All organisms of a particular species look similar. For example, dogs look like dogs and a human looks like another. This happens because the designs of their bodies are similar.
2. Naturally, if the body designs are to be similar, the blueprints for these designs should be similar. Thus, similar blue prints lead to formation of similar bodies.

Producing copies of DNA:

1. The first and foremost task of the reproduction process is to make ‘copies of blueprints of body design’. This is done by creating copies of DNk
2. The nucleus of cells contains chromosomes and chromosomes contain genetic material called DNA. DNA contains information about protein synthesis.
3. If the information is changed, there will be a change in protein synthesis, which will eventually change the body design. In such case, one organism may look quite different than the other and we would not be able to classify an organism into a specific species. Therefore, the most basic work in the process of reproduction is to create a DNA copy. Cells undergo certain chemical reactions to build the copies of their DNA.

Question 3.
Why only DNA copying is not sufficient for creating similar organisms? What else should be done? OR ‘Although DNA copying is the basic activity for creating similar organisms, It does not ensure survival’. Explain.
Answer:
1. A cell that undergoes reproduction creates two copies of DNA. Then, both these copies need to be separated from each other.
2. Production of a new cell takes place through the process called ‘cell division’.
3. It is not possible to keep one copy of DNA inside the cell and simply push out the second copy. The second copy of DNA would not survive this way.
4. In order to make the DNA survive, a complete ‘cell apparatus’ or simply a complete cell will have to be produced. The new cell will safely contain and preserve the second copy of the DNA.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 4.
How does DNA copying leads to variation In organisms? Is this variation harmful?
Answer:
1. During cell division, a cell divides to give rise to two cells. Although, the two cells will be similar but will not be exactly identical. It is quite obvious that the process of copying the DNA will have some variations. Hence, the generated DNA copies will be similar, but may not be identical to the original.

2. At times, some variations in DNA copying are so drastic that the new DNA copy cannot work with the cellular apparatus it inherits. Such a new born cell will eventually die.

3. In conclusion, the cells that survive after the cell division are (1) similar to each other as well as (2) different i.e. show variation. This inbuilt tendency for variation during reproduction is the basis for evolution which is useful for the organism to adapt to ever changing environment.

Question 5.
Is a reproduced cell identical? What happens If this ¡s not the case?
Answer:
1. Whether the new cell formed will be identical or not depends on how accurately the sequence of information has been copied.
2. Copy error is a rare event, still at times it may take place.
3. If the newly produced cell is not identical, there may occur changes in its characteristics.
4. If these changes are not compatible with the existing cellular system, the cell may die.

Question 6.
What is meant by creation of additional cellular apparatus?
Answer:
1. When a cell undergoes division, it must make copy of the cell DNA. However, simply making a copy of DNA is not sufficient during cell division, since the DNA molecule itself cannot survive and carry out all the functions of a cell.
2. The DNA will require all the other parts of the cell i.e. the cellular organelles such as nucleus. mitochondria, Golgi body, etc. so that the DNA can survive in the newly formed whole cell. This would be a fully functional cell and hence called a cellular apparatus or simply a cell.
3. Creating an addItional cellular apparatus means to produce a copy of all the parts of the cell (other than DNA).

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 7.
What is a clone? Why do offspring formed by asexual reproduction exhibit remarkable similarity?
Answer:
1. A clone is an identical genetic copy of either a piece of DNA, or a cell or a whole organism. Many organisms produce clones through asexual reproduction.
2. A clone genetically identical to the parent i.e. it possesses the exact copy of DNA of its parent and hence it shows remarkable similarity to the parent as well as to one another.

Question 8.
What is niche? Explain.
Answer:
Niche:
1. A niche is the role and position a species plays in the environment, how the species meets its needs for food and shelter, how it survives and how it reproduces.
2. Different species of organisms have different niches.
3. For example, the way a lion gathers Its food or shelter or reproduces are quite different from that of a crocodile i.e. the niches of two organisms vary.

Important aspects with respect to niches are —

  • Variation is seen among niches of various species.
  • The niches can change because the causes for their changes are not under the control of the organisms. Changes could be due to change in the temperature of the earth, which can go up or down, variation in water level, meteor hits, etc.
  • Minor variations in the body designs with respect to a changing niche increases the chances of survival of the organism.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 9.
Give an example where in variation in species becomes a boon for surviving in the changed niche.
Answer:
1. Suppose a population of reproducing organism was suited to a particular niche.
2. A drastic change occurs in the niche, which can wipe out the entire population because the population cannot withstand such a drastic change.
3. Assume a population of bacteria living in temperate waters. If the temperature of water increases to global warming, most of these bacteria would die. But if in some individuals of this population, some variations exist which can allow them to with stand such changes. then these individuals will survive and the entire population will not wipe off.
4. Thus, we can say variation in the species can save the existence of that species in this world. Thus, variation is useful for the survival of species.

Question 10.
What is asexual reproduction? State its types.
Answer:
Asexual reproduction :
The method of producing a new plant (or animal) without the act of fertilization of gametes is called asexual reproduction.

Types:

  • Fission
  • Fragmentation
  • Regeneration
  • Budding
  • Vegetative propagation and
  • Spore formation.

Question 11.
Explain the fission method of asexual reproduction.
Answer:
Fission :
1. Fission is the simplest method of asexual reproduction in unicellular organisms such as bacteria and protozoa.
2. In fission process, a unicellular organism divides to form two or more new organisms.

Types : (A) Binary fission and (B) Multiple fission

(A) Binary fission:

  • Many bacteria and protozoa simply split into two equal halves during cell division.
  • In binary fission, the nucleus lengthens and then divides into two parts.
  • After that the cytoplasm divides into two parts. This results in two daughter cells.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

(1) Binary fission in amoeba:
Amoeba has no definite shape. Hence, binary fission can take place from any place (or say plane) of the amoeba cell resulting into two daughter cells.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 1

(2) Binary fission in leishmania:

  • Some unicellular organisms like leishmania shows somewhat more organized binary fission of their bodies.
  • Leishmania has a whip-like i.e. longitudinal structure at one end of the cell. So in leishmania, binary fission takes place in a definite orientation (plane) unlike amoeba.
  • Leishmania causes an infectious disease called kala-azar or say black fever.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 2

(B) Multiple fission:
1. In multiple fission, the parent organism divides to form many new organisms at the same time.
2. Malarial parasite, plasmodium, divides into many daughter cells simultaneously by multiple fission.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 3

Question 12.
How is binary fission in amoeba different than that in lelshmania?
Answer:
1. In amoeba, binary fission can happen at any place or say plane of the cell.
2. Leishmania has a whip-like i.e. longitudinal structure at one end of the cell. So, in leishmania, binary fission takes place in a definite orientation (plane).

Question 13.
Differentiate between binary fission and multiple fission.
Answer:

Binary fissionMultiple fission
The parent nucleus divides into two parts.
Cyst is not formed.
Amoeba and paramoecium reproduce through a binary system.
The parent nucleus divides into several parts.
A cyst is formed around the organism.
Amoeba and plasmodium reproduce through multiple fission.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 14.
What is fragmentation?
Answer:
1. The process wherein the body of a multi-cellular organism breaks (fragments) into two or more pieces and on maturing each piece grows to form a complete new organism is known as fragmentation.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 4
2. Simple asexual reproduction method can work even in multi-cellular organisms provided the organisms have relatively simple body organization. For example spirogyra, a simple multi-cellular organism reproduces through fragmentation.

Question 15.
Why fragmentation reproduction method works well only for few multi-cellular organisms? Why there is a need of more complex way of reproduction for most of the multi-cellular organisms?
Answer:
1. Although multi-cellular organisms like spirogyra reproduces through fragmentation, such multi-cellular organisms have simple body organization.
2. When the body organization is complex, the multi-cellular organisms cannot simply divide and reproduce. They need to reproduce through a more complex way of reproduction.

Reason:

  • Many multi-cellular organisms are not simply a random collection of cells. Such organisms have specialized cells. The cells are organized as tissues, and tissues are organized into organs. The organs are placed at definite positions in the body.
  • In such a carefully organized situation, cell-by-cell division is impractical.
  • Also, in multi-cellular organisms, different cell types perform different specialized functions. So, reproduction in such organisms is also the function of a specific type of cells. Hence, multi-cellular organisms need to reproduce through a more complex way of reproduction.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 16.
Write a note on regeneration.
Answer:
1. In some plants and animals, if some parts of their bodies get cut, they have the ability to regenerate and form a complete new organism. This method of reproduction is called regeneration.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 5
2. If such individuals somehow get cut or broken up into many pieces, many of these pieces grow into separate individuals.
3. For example, simple animals like hydra and planaria can be cut into any number of pieces and each piece would grow into a complete organism.
4. Regeneration is carried out by specialized cells. These cells perform repeated cell division and form large numbers of cells or say cell-mass. From this mass of cells, different cells undergo changes to become various cell types and tissues.
5. These changes take place in an organized sequence which is referred as ‘development’.
6. Note that regeneration is not the same as reproduction because getting cut to reproduce is not the way to reproduce for most of the organisms.

Question 17.
Name the process by which planaria grows. Explain the basic features of this process.
Answer:
Planaria grows through regeneration.

Basic features:

  • Regeneration is carried out by specialized cells. These cells perform repeated cell division and form large numbers of cells or say cell-mass.
  • From this mass of cells, different cells undergo changes to become various cell types and tissues.

Question 18.
What is budding? Explain.
Answer:
1. In budding, a small part of the body of the parent organism grows out as a ‘bud’. It then detaches from parent and becomes a new organism. For example, hydra and planaria reproduce through budding.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 6
2. During budding, hydra makes use of regenerative cells for reproduction.
3. A bud develops as an outgrowth due to repeated cell division at one specific site. These buds develop into tiny individuals and when they mature fully, they get detached from the parent body and become new independent individuals.

Question 19.
Differentiate between fragmentation and budding.
Answer:

FragmentationBudding
1. Here, the body of a multicellular organism breaks into two or many pieces.
2. Since the body breaks into small pieces, the method is called fragmentation.
3. Spirogyra reproduces through fragmentation.
1. Here, a bud is formed from the body of the organism which then detaches from the organism.
2. Since only a part of the plant swells and emerges as a bud, it is called budding.
3. Hydra and planaria reproduce through budding.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 20.
Explain vegetative propagation. OR What is vegetative propagation? Draw a labeled diagram to show vegetative propagation.
Answer:
1. Vegetative propagation is an asexual method of reproduction which occurs only in plants.
2. In vegetative propagation, new plants are reproduced from the plant parts such as roots, stem and leaves of old plants, without taking help of any reproductive organs.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 8
3. There are many plants in which parts such as root, stem and leaves develop into new plants under appropriate conditions.
4. Similarly, buds produced in the notches along the leaf margin of bryophyllum fall on the soil and develop into new plants is also an example of vegetative propagation.
5. This property of vegetative propagation is used in methods such as layering or grafting for growing plants such as sugarcane, roses and grapes.

Question 21.
State the advantages of vegetative propagation.
Answer:
Advantages of vegetative propagation:
1. Plants raised by vegetative propagation can bear flowers and gifts earlier than those produced from seeds.
2. Vegetative propagation is also helpful in growing plants such as banana, orange, rose and jasmine that have lost the capacity to produce seeds.
3. The plants produced are genetically similar to the parent plant and so have similar characteristics as the parent plant.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 22.
Name the plant that reproduces through leaves. List two advantages of this method of reproduction.
Answer:
Bryophyllum is a plant that reproduces through leaves.
Advantages:

  • Many buds are produced in the notches along the margin of a single leaf. Each leaf bud of bryophyllum can produce a plant.
  • One single leaf reproduces a large number of young plants. This helps in survival of the species.

Question 23.
What is a spore? Explain asexual reproduction through spore formation. OR Explain asexual reproduction in rhizopus.
Answer:
1. A spore is a microscopic reproductive unit of plants which is covered by a protective coat.
2. When the coat of spore bursts, the spores spread into air. These airborne spores settle on food and under favourable condition, germinate to produce new plants.

Example:
1. A bread mould such as rhizopus is a simple multi-cellular organism (fungi). Numerous spores are produced in rhizopus within sacs called sporangia (singular: sporangium).
2. The sporangia are knob (or blob) like tiny structures present at the top of the thread like structures called hyphae. The sporangia contain cells or spores.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 7
3. When these sporangia bursts, the spores get scattered by rain, wind or insects and under suitable conditions develop into a new rhizopus plant, when they come in contact with a moist substance such as bread.

Question 24.
What is sexual reproduction? Explain very briefly how it takes place.
Answer:
Sexual reproduction :
1. The mode of reproduction that takes place with the help of both male sex cells and female sex cells is known as sexual reproduction.
2. The sex cells involved in sexual reproduction are called gametes.
3. During sexual reproduction, a male gamete unites with a female gamete to produce a ‘zygote’.
4. As time passes, the zygote develops into a new organism.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 25.
Discuss the important aspects of variation occurring during DNA copying.
Answer:
1. Creation of two new cells from one cell involves copying of the DNA’ as well as copying the ‘cellular apparatus’.

2. Although, the two cells will be similar but will not be exactly identical. It is quite obvious that copying of DNA will not be 100% accurate and there will be some variations in the copied version. These variations are known as copying errors. These errors or variations lead to variations in population of organisms.

3. The negative effect of variation is that at times, the variation developed in new cells lead to the death of the cells and even organisms. The positive side of variation is that the species develop resistance to adapt to various environments. This enables the population to survive when a change in the environment occurs.

4. Every individual organism cannot be protected by variations, but variations developed in a population due to DNA copying are useful for ensuring the survival of the species. Thus, ideally, variations in the reproduction are helpful for the organisms.

5. It is a known fact that DNA-copying mechanisms are not absolutely accurate. However, these mechanisms are so accurate that they maintain the speed of variation in such a manner that the DNA copies formed adapt to the cellular apparatus and hence do not die.

Question 26.
How is the process of making variants speeded up by sexual mode of reproduction?
Answer:
1. A single cell divides to form two cells and it involves copying of two things,

  • DNA and
  • Cellular apparatus.

2. Copying of DNA leads to variation. Moreover, the newly formed DNA copy already contains variations accumulated from previous generations.
3. Owing to these two sources of variations, the two different individuals in a population would have quite different patterns of accumulated variations.
4. When variations from two or more individuals combine, it leads to creation of new combinations of variants. Moreover, each combination would be novel, since each would have come from two different individuals.
5. The sexual mode of reproduction incorporates such a process of combining DNA from two different individuals during reproduction.

Question 27.
How in sexually reproducing organisms, the number of chromosomes and the DNA content maintained at a constant level in each generation?
Answer:
1. In humans, both male and female germ-cells have 46 chromosomes each.
2. In sexually reproducing organisms, each new generation is the combination of the DNA copies from its two parents. So, logically, the new generation organism should have double the chromosome (i.e. 46 + 46 = 92) in its body, but it does not work this way.
3. The germ-cells of sexually reproducing organisms undergo meiosis. Meiosis reduces the number of chromosome to half.
4. Under meiosis, when two haploid germ cells from two individuals combine during sexual reproduction they form diploid zygote which makes the number of chromosome and the DNA content same as its previous generation i.e. 46.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 28.
How are the germ cells different in higher or say complex organisms?
Answer:
As the body design becomes more complex i.e. in higher organisms, the germ cells become specialized and show some differences. They are listed below.

Male gametesFemale gametes
These are called sperms.
They are smaller and motile i.e. they move.
These are called egg cells.
They are larger and contain nutrients.

Question 29.
Draw the diagram of a flower and explain its reproductive parts.
Answer:
1. Flowering plants belong to the group of angiosperms. The reproductive parts of angiosperms are located in the flower. So, we can say that flower is the reproductive organ of the plant. The four main reproductive parts of a flower are:

  • Stamen,
  • Pistil,
  • Petal and
  • Sepal

2. Stamen and pistil contain germ-cells (gametes).
(i) Unisexual flower: If the flower contains only one part out of stamen or pistil then such a flower is called unisexual. For example, papaya and watermelon.

(ii) Bisexual flower: If the flower contains both stamen as well as pistil the flower is called bisexual. For example. hibiscus and mustard.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 9
(iii) Male reproductive part: Stamen is the male reproductive part. It produces yellowish coloured pollen grains. Stamen is made up of two parts namely (a) anther and (b) filament.

(iv) Female reproductive part: Pistil (or carpel) is the female reproductive part. It is present at the centre of a flower. It is made of three parts namely, (a) ovary, (b) style and (c) stigma. The swollen bottom part is the ovary, middle elongated part is the style and the terminal part which may be sticky is the stigma. The ovary contains ovules and each ovule contains an egg cell.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 30.
Explain the process of sexual reproduction in flowering plants.
Answer:
Main processes of sexual reproduction:
(a) Pollination:
1. Flowering plants have male and female reproductive parts for conducting sexual reproduction.
2. The ovary (the female reproductive part) contains ovules and each ovule has a female egg-cell. On the other hand, the stamen (the male reproductive part) produces pollen grain which contains male germ-cell.
3. The female and male germ-cells fuse with each other. If the cells fertilize, they produce a zygote. The zygote then grows into a new plant.
4. Thus, for the formation of a zygote and hence a new plant, the pollen needs to travel from the stamen to the stigma. This is called pollination.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 10

(b) Fertilization:
1. After the pollen grain lands on a suitable stigma, it has to reach the female germ-cells which are in the ovary For this, a tube grows out of the pollen grain and travels through the style to reach the ovary.
2. The process of fusing of male gamete from the pollen grain and the female gamete in the ovary is called fertilization. Fertilization leads to formation of zygote.

(c) Seed germination:
1. After fertilization, the zygote divides several times to form an embryo within the ovule.
2. The ovule develops a tough coat and eventually develops Into a seed. The ovary containing the seed grows rapidly and ripens to form a fruit. By this time, the petals, sepals, stamens, style and stigma may wither and fall-off.
3. The seed contains the future plant or embryo which develops into a seedling under appropriate conditions. This process is known as germination.

Question 31.
What is pollination? State its types and define them.
Answer:
1. For reproduction of a new plant, the pollen grain must travel from stamen (male reproductive part) to stigma (female reproductive part).
2. The travel of the pollen grain from stamen to stigma is called pollination.

There are two types of pollination. They are:
1. Self-pollination: If the transfer of pollen to the stamen occurs in the same flower, it is known as self-pollination.
2. Cross-pollination:

  • If the transfer of pollen to the stamen occurs from one flower to another, it is known as cross-pollination.
  • The transfer of pollen from one flower to another takes place by agents such as wind, water, insects or animals.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 32.
What do you mean by a unisexual and a bisexual flower?
Answer:
1. Unisexual flower: If the flower contains only one part out of stamen or pistil then such a flower is called unisexual. For example, papaya and watermelon.
2. Bisexual flower: If the flower contains both stamen as well as pistil the flower is called bisexual. For example. hibiscus and mustard.

Question 33.
Give a brief idea about the reproductive organs stamen and carpel (pistil) OR Male reproductive parts and female reproductive parts of a flower.
Answer:
1. Male reproductive part: Stamen is the male reproductive part. It produces yellowish coloured pollen grains. Stamen is made up of two parts namely

  • anther and
  • filament.

2. Female reproductive part: Pistil (or carpel) is the female reproductive part. It is present at the centre of a flower. It is made of three parts namely,

  • ovary,
  • style and
  • stigma.

The swollen bottom part is the ovary, middle elongated part is the style and the terminal part which may be sticky is the stigma. The ovary contains ovules and each ovule contains an egg cell.

Question 34.
State the functions of petals and sepals.
Answer:
Function of petal:

  • Petals are modified leaves that surround the reproductive parts of flowers.
  • Generally, petals are of bright colour and hence attract insects for conducting pollination.

Function of sepal:

  • Sepals are the lower or outermost part of the flower.
  • Their main function is to fold the closed bud and protect it from cold and other environmental effects.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 35.
Give a brief idea about changes that a human body experiences in early childhood.
Answer:
(a) Changes in infancy:

  • Our body changes drastically between the period of infancy and childhood. Several changes occur in this period.
  • Our height and weight increase as we grow.
  • First, we acquire milk teeth then we lose them and acquire permanent teeth.
  • All these changes can be grouped under the general process of growth,which the body becomes larger.

(b) Changes in the early teenage:  In early teenage years, a whole new set of changes occur which are not just restricted to enlargement of body.

(i) Changes common to boys and girls include —

  • The changes in the early teenage are changes in the appearance of a human, changes in the body proportions, attaining new features, sensations, etc.
  • Thick and dark hair start growing in armpits and the genital area between the thighs.
  • Thin hair appear on legs, arms and even face.
  • The skin becomes oily and sometimes pimples begin to develop.
  • We start becoming conscious and aware of our own bodies as well as bodies of others in new ways.

(ii) Other changes (Secondary sexual changes):

(a) In girls:

  • The breasts start increasing. The nipples become dark.
  • The ovary starts secreting female sex hormones. Hence, girls begin to menstruate at around this time.

(b) In boys:

  • The testes start secreting male sex hormones.
  • The penis occasionally becomes enlarged and erect, either in daydreams or at night.
  • The facial hair becomes thick and the soft voice starts becoming cracked and later, deep.
  • The body becomes more muscular and shoulder and chest become broad.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 36.
Which uncommon (secondary sexual) changes do boys and girls experience during puberty?
Answer:
Other changes (Secondary sexual changes):
(a) In girls:

  • The breasts start increasing. The nipples become dark.
  • The ovary starts secreting female sex hormones. Hence, girls begin to menstruate at around this time.

(b) In boys:

  • The testes start secreting male sex hormones.
  • The penis occasionally becomes enlarged and erect, either in daydreams or at night.
  • The facial hair becomes thick and the soft voice starts becoming cracked and later, deep.
  • The body becomes more muscular and shoulder and chest become broad.

Question 37.
Discuss some important features of changes that human body experiences.
Answer:
1. The changes that occur in humans from infancy to childhood, to teenage and finally to fully grown matured body takes place quite slowly over several years. Moreover, neither do all these changes happen together at the same time in one person, nor do they happen at an exact age.

2. In some people, the changes happen early and quickly, while in others, they can happen slowly.

3. Each change takes its own time to get completed. For example, when thick hair starts growing on a boy’s face, they do not grow all of a sudden and in perfect manner on entire face. Initially, the hair grows in a scattered manner and gradually it becomes uniform and complete.

4. The changes are not uniform in all humans. For example, one may have a thick, full grown beard while another may have very less growth of facial hair. Similarly, different people will have different shaped noses or fingers. patterns of hair growth, or size and shape of breast or penis, etc. All of these changes signify that the body is becoming matured with time.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 38.
Why does the body show sexual maturation during teenage?
Answer:
1. The bodies of multi-cellular organisms need special kind of cells to carry out specialized functions. Producing germ-cells so that they can participate in sexual reproduction is one such specialized function. Both plants and animals develop special tissues for this function.

2. The growth of the body and maturation of the reproductive tissues happen in a contrasting manner. The reproductive tissues do not mature during the growth stage of the body. The tissues begin to mature when the general body growth begins to slow clown. The stage when the reproductive tissues start to mature is known as puberty.

Question 39.
What is the pre-requisite for sexual reproduction In humans?
Answer:
1. The bodies of individuals must have matured to the stage of reproduction.
2. The reproductive organs must have developed to a stage where they can undergo sexual reproduction.
For example, in men penis is a special reproductive organ. It should be able to become erect to participate in the process of reproduction.
3. In mammals such as humans, the baby is carried in the mother’s body for a long period, and will be breast-fed later. The female reproductive organs and breasts will need to mature to accommodate these possibilities.
4. Just like humans, animals must also be able to identify that they are sexually matured to undergo mating. For sexual mode or reproduction, the germ-celLs of male and female should join with each other. This can happen in two ways. They are:
(a) When individuals (plants and humans) release the germ-cells Out of their bodies.
(b) When two individuals (animals) join their bodies together internal transfer of germ-cels for fuaion.

Question 40.
What is puberty ? Explain what happens when a boy or a girl attains it.
Answer:
1. The age at which a body starts producing gametes and girls and boys become biologically capable to reproduce is known as puberty.
2. Generally, girls attain puberty at the age of 12 years, while-boys reach puberty at the age of 13 to 14 years.
3. On attaining puberty, testes start producing sperm and ovaries start producing eggs.
4. The sex hormones start getting secreted.
5. The time between childhood and adulthood is known as ‘adolescence’.
6. Many changes take place during puberty, such as new hair growth, body becomes more muscular, voice deepens, shoulders and chest broadens, etc.
7. The penis becomes larger and capable of becoming erect.
8. In humans, the baby is carried in mother’s body for a long period and will be breast fed after birth.
9. The female breast and reproductive organs develop to accommodate these possibilities.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 41.
Why does the body of human beings mature sexually?
Answer:
1. Every organism participates in reproduction. In order to reproduce, the organism must produce sex cells in its body.
2. Reproduction requires certain specialized cells which the body starts producing during the time of puberty.
3. So, for reproduction which is carried out by specialized cells, human beings mature sexually.

Question 42.
Draw a labelled diagram of human male reproductive system and explain it.
Answer:
The male reproductive system: The human male reproductive system consists of parts which produce male gametes and parts that transfer the gametes to the site of fertilization.

Main reproductive organ:
Testes:

  • Testes are paired, oval shaped glands which produce the male gametes and secrete sex hormones, testosterone.
  • The testes lie in muscular pouch called scrotum present outside the abdominal cavity.
  • The temperature of testes remains 230 C below the body temperature. This is essential for the formation of sperms.
  • Testes secrete the male sexual hormone called testosterone.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 11

Path of motion of sperm:

Vas deferens:

  • The sperms formed are released into a long tube called vas deferens where they remain stored until they are released from the body.
  • When the sperm is moving through the vas deterens, glands like the prostate and the semin vesicles add their secretions to the sperm and make it fluid. Fluid form makes the transport C sperm easier. Moreover, the fluid also provides nutrition.
  • The was deferens joins with urinary duct which comes out from urinary bladder.
  • Now, it is known as urethra.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Urethra:
Urethra transfers the sperms to an organ called penis. in males, both sperm as well as urine pass through urethra.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 12

Penis:

  • The penis opens up outside the body through a hole-like structure.
  • The sperms may be either released outside the body through this pore or may be released into the vagina of a woman’s body during mating.
  • Sperms are tiny bodies that mainly consist of genetic material. They have a long tail that helps them to move towards the female germ-cell.

Question 43.
Draw a labeled diagram of female reproductive system and explain how the system works.
Answer:
1. A pair of ovaries, oviduct, fallopian tube, uterus and vagina are the main parts of a female reproductive system.
2. The female reproductive system is more complicated than male because it takes care of fertilization and the development of embryo till the birth.

(i) Ovaries:

  • Two oval shaped ovaries lie inside the abdominal cavity.
  • The function of ovaries is to produce female sex cells called ova or eggs.
  • The ovaries also secrete female sex hormones called estrogen and progesterone.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 13

(ii) Fallopian tubes (oviducts): Fallopian tubes are a pair of tubes.

  • The funnel-shaped open end of the tubes lies just above the ovaries. This end of the tube receives ova (female egg cells) from the ovary. Then the tube carries it to the uterus.
  • The upper part of fallopian-tube also does the work of fertilizing the ova in case it receives sperm cells.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

(iii) Uterus:
The two fallopian tubes unite to form a thick walled muscular bag like structure called uterus.

(iii) Uterus:

  • The two fallopian tubes unite to form a thick walled muscular bag-like structure called uterus.
  • Uterus looks like an inverted triangle. It receives ovum from oviduct.
  • Fertilized ovum develops and grows in the uterus.

(iv) Cervix:
The lower one-third part of uterus is called cervix.

(v) Vagina:

  • Uterus opens into tubular structure called vagina.
  • Vagina receives sperms through penis.

Question 44.
Explain the stages from release of ovum to embryo till child birth in females. OR Explain implantation and child birth in females.
Answer:
When a girl is born, the ovaries already contain thousands of immature eggs. When she reaches the age of about 10-12 years i.e. when she attains puberty, the sex hormones cause the ova (sex cells or germ cells) to become mature.

Ovulation:

  • Every month one of the ovaries produces one ovum.
  • After the ovum becomes matured, it is released from the ovary into the oviduct (fallopian tube). This is known as ovulation.

Fertilization:

  • Before ovulation, the inner wall of uterus becomes thick and its blood capillaries become full of blood.
  • During sexual intercourse the man ejaculates (releases) the sperms in the vagina.
  • The sperms then travel upwards into the fallopian tube. If it finds a matured ovum it unites with
    it in the upper part of the tube and fertilizes it. Here, we say fertilization has taken place. The fertilized ovum is known as zygote.

Embryo formation:
1. The fertilized ovum gets implanted on the lining of the uterus, starts dividing and forms a hollow ball of cells called embryo.
2. The embryo gets nutrition from mother’s blood through a disc-like special tissue called placenta.
3. The exchange of oxygen, nutrients and waste products takes place through the placenta.
4. The embryo continues to develop in the uterus for nine months.
5. As the foetus grows, the muscles of uterus keep expanding to accommodate the foetus.
6. Finally, the child comes out of the female body (i.e. is born) due to the rhythmic contraction of the uterus muscles.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 14

Question 45.
Write a note on placenta.
Answer:
1. Placenta is a temporary organ which is made up of disc-shaped special tissue. It develops in the uterus when the female becomes pregnant.
2. One side of the placenta has villi. This side faces the mother’s body.
3. On the mother’s side are blood spaces, which surround the villi. This provides a large surface area for glucose and oxygen to pass from the mother to the embryo.
4. The other side of the placenta has an umbilical cord which connects to the foetus.
5. The waste generated by the foetus is removed by transferring it into the mother’s blood through the placenta.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 46.
Explain menstrual cycle in females.
Answer:
Menstrual cycle In females:
1. When a girl reaches the age of about 10-12 years i.e. when she attains puberty, the sex hormones cause the ova (sex cells) to become mature.
2. Every month one of the ovaries produce one ovum.
3. After the ovum becomes matured, it is released from the ovary into the oviduct (fallopian tube). This is known as ovulation.
4. Before ovulation, the inner wall of uterus becomes thick and its blood capillaries full of blood.
5. At this stage, utews prepares itself to receive a fertilized ovum.
6. The thick lining makes itself ready for implantation of embryo.
7. In the ovum does not receive a sperm, it will not get fertilized and hence no embryo will develop in the uterus. Such an egg will live for one day.
8. Now, the thick wall (lining) of uterus along with the blood vessels and dead ovum will come out of the vagina in the form of blood and mucous. This is known as menstruation.
9. Menstruation lasts for about 2-8 days. Since the ovary releases one egg every month, the uterus also prepares itself every month to receive a fertilized egg. When menstruation is over, the inner wall of uterus starts building up again so that it may receive the next fertilized ovum.
10. Again if the ovum does not get fertilized, menstruation will occur after 28 days.
11. The process of menstruation stops when a woman gets pregnant i.e. when the ovum gets fertilized.
12. Once the pregnant woman delivers the baby, the menstruation restarts, after some months.

Question 47.
“If a boy or a girl has started becoming sexually mature, he/she can participate In sexual acts and give birth to children.” Do you agree with this statement? Explain your view.
Answer:
1. The process of sexual maturation is gradual and it occurs while general body growth is still going on. During such a period some may think that the body and the mind is ready for sexual act and giving birth to a child, but it is not so. During such a time there are many different kinds of pressures about these issues.
2. There can be pressure from our friends for participating in many activities, whether we really want to or not. There can be pressure from families to get married and start having children.
3. There can be pressure from government agencies to avoid having children.
4. Under such situation, one cannot decide what is wrong and what is right.
5. Hence, some degree of sexual maturation does not necessarily mean that the body or the mind is ready for sexual acts or for having and bringing up children.

Question 48.
What are sexually transmitted diseases? Name a few of them. Also name the responsible vectors.
Answer:
Sexually transmitted diseases:

  • The infectious diseases which are spread from an infected person to a healthy person through sexual contact are called sexually transmitted diseases (STDs).
  • These disease can be caused either by bacteria or by virus.
  • Syphilis and gonorrhoea are bacterial diseases whereas AIDS and warts are viral disease.
  • AIDS is caused by a virus called Human Immuno Deficiency Virus (HIV).

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 49.
What is contraception? List out the methods of contraception and explain them.
Answer:
Contraception :
The method to prevent pregnancy in women is called contraception. Methods adopted to prevent pregnancy are called contraceptive methods.

Methods:
(1) Birth control tools:

  • Under this method, a mechanical barrier is created which prevents the entry of sperm into the genital tract. As a result, fertilization does not occur.
  • The tools include condoms to be worn on penis andlor diaphagm worn in the vagina by female.
  • Another tool s placing Intra-Uterine Contraceptive Devices (IUCDs) like Copper-T into the uterus of females to prevent pregnancy.

(2) Birth control pills:
There are oral pills that a women can take. These pills change the hormonal balance of the body so that the eggs are not released by the ovaries and fertilization is prevented.

(3) Surgical methods:

  • In males, a small portion of vas deterens is surgically removed or tied.
  • This process is known as vasectomy and it prevents the sperms from entering urethra. (Note: ectomy means to remove by surgery)
  • In females, the fallopian tube is surgically cut and tied. This process is known as tubectomy. It will not allow the sperm to reach the uterus.

(4) Abortion:
Another method is to surgically remove the foetus from the body of pregnant women. However, this is not a method to prevent pregnancy but to prevent child-birth after pregnancy.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 50.
State the disadvantages of contraception.
Answer:
Disadvantages of contraception:

  • Oral pills change hormonal balance of a woman’s body and hence cause several side-effects.
  • Copper-T causes Irritation in the uterus and hence leads to side effects.
  • If the surgery to block a portion of vas deferens or fallopian tube is not done properly it may cause infections.

Question 51.
Why contraceptive methods play an Important role In avoiding unwanted pregnancy?
Answer:
1.  Sexual act may lead to pregnancy. Pregnancy will put a lot of biological, physical and mental stress on woman, If the woman is not ready to handle it. her health will be adversely affected.
2. So, there are several ways devised to avoid pregnancy until both man and woman are ready to handle the situation and responsibility to give birth to a child. This gives rise to the need of adopting contraceptive methods to avoid pregnancy.

Question 52.
List any two reasons why the government has banned prenatal sex determination by law.
Answer:
(i) To stop people from forcefully aborting female foetus.
(ii) To maintain the female-male sex ratio in the society.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 53.
“Cell division is a type of reproduction in unicellular organisms.” Justify.
Answer:
1. Unicellular organisms such as bacteria simply split into two equal halves during cell division to produce two new individuals. For example, plasmodium which is a unicellular organism divides into many daughter cells and each cell turns out to be an individual.
2. Thus we can say that in unicellular organism, cell division is a type of reproduction.

2. “Multicellular organisms cannot divide cell by cell”. List two reasons to justify this statement.

  • Multicellular organisms have complex bodies.
  • Their bodies consist of set specialized cells for carrying out specifIc functions. The cells then get organized as tissues and tissues as organs which then together form the entire body. Each organ performs a specific function.
  • Owing to such complex structure of multicellular organisms, cell by cell division for reproduction is flot possible.

3. Colonies of yeast fail to multiply in water, but multiply in sugar solution. Give reason.

  • All living organisms need energy to perform activities like respiration, movement, reproduction, etc.
  • Yeast Is also a living organism and so it also requires energy to reproduce i.e. multiply.
  • Yeast does not receive any nutrition in water arid so the colony of yeast does not multiply in water.
  • Sugar solution provides nutrition to the yeast which in turn gives it energy. Hence, the colonies of yeast multiply in the sugar solution.

4. Why does bread mould grow profusely on a moist slice of bread rather than on a dry slice of bread?

  • Moist environment of bread slice offers moisture as well as nutrients to the bread mould. Moisture is one of the basic requirements for mould to grow and hence it grows profusely.
  • Dry slice of bread offers nutrients but not moisture. Hence,mould does not grow on dry bread.

5. Why fertilization cannot take place In flowers If pollination does not occur?

  • During pollination, the pollen grains i.e. the male gametes enter the stigma i.e. the female reproductive organ with an objective of fusing with the female gamete.
  • Naturally, if pollination does not occur, the female and male gametes cannot unite and fertilization cannot occur.

6. Contraceptive pills helps in stopping pregnancy. Give reason.

  • The oral contraceptive pills contain a combination of hormones which stop the production of ova. This prevents fertilization.
  • Similarly, the vaginal pills contain chemical known as spermicide which kills sperms.
  • In any case, the fertilization of ovum is prevented.
  • Thus, contraceptive pills help in stopping pregnancies.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 54.
What is female foeticide? Explain.
Answer:
Female foeticide:
1. The killing of unborn girl child is known as female foeticide.
2. Some people are not interested to have a girl child and are only interested in a boy.
3. In order to find out whether the foetus in the pregnant lady is male or female, people illegally make use of an ultrasound technique called sonography. This process is called sex-determination.
4. If the foetus is that of female, people get it removed by surgery or medications.
5. Government has put a strict ban on such sonographies and female foeticide. In fact these acts are now criminal acts.
6. By female foeticide, child sex ratio is reducing at an alarming rate in the society.

Question 55.
Differentiate between asexual and sexual reproduction.
Answer:

Asexual reproductionSexual reproduction
The reproduction of a new organism from single parent is known as asexual reproduction.The reproduction of a new organism, from two parents of opposite sex is known as sexual reproduction.
No sex cells (gametes) are involved while reproduction.Sex cells (gametes) are involved while reproduction.
In asexual reproduction, certain body parts of the parent separate off and form new organisms of same kind.In sexual reproduction, the reproductive organs of both the sex develop, produce gametes and after copulation, conducts fertilization. The fertilized egg develops in the same organism.
Fission, regeneration, budding, etc are the examples of asexual reproduction.The waste generated by the foetus is removed by transferring it into the mother’s blood through the placenta.

Question 56.
List any two differences between pollination and fertilization.
Answer:

PollinationFertilization
The transfer of pollen grains from the anther to the stigma of a flower as called pollination.Fertilization is the fusion of male germ-cell with female germ cell in the ovule.
Pollination takes place with the help of an agent such as wind or insect.Fertilization takes place with the development of pollen tube which carries male gamete to the female gamete in the ovule.
Pollination leads to fertilization and hence formation of embryo.Fertilization leads to the formation of zygote.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 57.
Differentiate between puberty in males and puberty in females.
Answer:

Puberty in malesPuberty in females
1. Boys attain puberty at the age of 13-14 years
2. Testes of boys start producing sperms.
3. Voice of boys become deep.
4. Pene becomes larger and capable of getting erect.
5. Muscles of boys become strong and broad.
Girls attain puberty at the age 10-12 years.
Ovaries of girls start producing ovum.
Voice of girls become shrill.
Breasts and reproductive organs develop.
Muscles of girls remain soft.

Question 58.
Distinguish between the functions of ovary and testes.
Answer:

OvaryTestes
1. Ovary produces female germ-cells/ova.
2. Ovaries are located inside the female body in a pelvic cavity.
3. Ovary secrete female hormone oestrogen.
Testes produces male germ-cells or sperms.
Testes are situated outside the body in a pouch like structure called scrotum,
Testes produces male hormone called testosterone.

Question 59.
Differentiate between male reproductive system and female reproductive system.

Male reproductive systemFemale reproductive system
1. It consists of testes, scrotum, epididymis, vas deferens. seminal vesicle, prostate gland and penis.
2. Testes, the organs that produce sex cells, lie outside the abdominal cavity in the muscular pouch.
1. It contains of ovaries, fallopian tubes, uterus and vagina.
2. Ovaries, the organs that produce sex cells,lie inside the abdominal cavity.

Question 60.
Differentiate between vasectomy and tubectomy.

VasectomyTubectomy
1. In this method, a small portion of male vas deferens is surgically removed and both cut ends are tied properly.
2. This method prevents the sperms from entering the urethra.
In females a small portion of oviduct is surgically removed and tied up from the tips.
This method prevents ovum from entering oviduct.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 61.
Identify A, B and C in the given diagram and write their functions.
Answer:
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 15
Part-A: It is stigma. Pollen lands on stigma. The stigma then provides proper conditions for the germination of pollen and develops pollen tube for transferring the pollen further.
Part-B : It is pollen tube. It grows from the pollen grain and travels through style. It carries the male germ cell to the ovary for fertilization.
Part-C: It is female germ cell in the ovary, It unites with the male germ-cell to carry out fertilization.

Question 62.
Name those parts of a flower which serve the same function as the following do in animals:
(i) Testes, (ii) Ovary, (iii) Eggs, (iii) Sperms
Answer:

Part of animal

Part of plant which performs the same function
Testes
Ovary
Eggs
Sperm

Anther
Ovary of the carpel
Egg present in ovule
Pollen grains in the anther

Question 63.
Would a planaria cut vertically into two halves into two individuals? Complete the given figure D and E by indicating the regenerated regions.
Answer:
Planaria has a very good capability to regenerate. Hence, even if we cut its body into two vertical halves, each piece of the body of planaria will grow into two complete individuals.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 16

Question 64.
Trace the path of sperm during ejaculation and mentIon the gland and their functions associated with the male reproductive system.
Path of sperm during ejaculation:
Testes → Epididymis → Vas deferens → Urethra → Penis → Released outside the body
Answer:
Glands associated with male reproductive system and their functions:
(a) Testes: Secretes the hormone testosterone and spermatogenesis
(b) Prostate gland: Makes the semen medium alkaline
(c) Seminal vesicle: Adds fluid content to semen

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 65.
In the given figure, label the parts and mention their functions.
(a) Production of egg (b) Site of fertilization (c) Site of implantation (d) Entry of the sperms
(Note: We have directly given the image and marked the asked parts. Students will be given a blank diagram.)
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 17
Answer:

Part

Function

(a) Ovary
(b) Oviduct
(c) Uterus
(d) Vagina

Produces eggs
Site of fertilization
Site for implantation
Sperms enters from here into the female body

Very Short Answer Type Questions 

Question 1.
How can we identify if two distinct organisms belong to same species?
Answer:
Two distinct organisms would have resembling physical traits of a particular species. These traits helps in identifying if two organisms are from the same species or not.

Question 2.
Why would you say that a parent and a child are similar but not completely identical?
Answer:
Although in reproduction, DNA copying takes place but this biochemical reaction is not an exact copy. Some minor variations take place each time DNA is copied. Hence it can be said that a parent and a child are similar but not completely identical.

Question 3.
What happens if protein synthesis of DNA changes?
Answer:
It will change the body design of the organism.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 4.
How does DNA copying leads to variation?
Answer:
During cell division, a cell divides to give rise to two cells. Although, the two cells will be similar but will not be exactly identical. It is quite obvious that the process of copying the DNA will have some variations. Hence, DNA copies generated will be similar, but may not be identical to the original and show some variation.

Question 5.
What is the full form of DNA?
Answer:
Deoxyribonucleic Acid

Question 6.
How are the newly formed cells with respect to their parent cells?
Answer:
The cells that survive after the cell division are
1. similar to each other as well as
2. different i.e. show variation.

Question 7.
Which two main aspects are Involved during creation of two new cells from one cell?
Answer:
It involves
1. Copying of the DNA and
2. Copying the cellular apparatus.

Question 8.
When does the newly formed copies of DNA separate?
Answer:
Newly formed copies of DNA separate when the additional cellular apparatus is formed at the time of cell division.

Question 9.
What is coying error?
Answer:
When a new cell is formed from existing cells, the new cell will be similar but will not be exactly identical. The copying of DNA will not be 100% accurate and there will be some variations in the copied version. These variations are known as copying errors.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 10.
State one positive and one negative effect of copying error or say variation.
Answer:
The negative effect of variation is that at times, the variation developed in new cells lead to the death of the cells and even organisms. The positive side of variation is that the species develop resistance to adapt to various environments. This increases the chances of survival.

Question 11.
What is a clone?
Answer:
A clone is an identical genetic copy of a piece of DNA, or a cell or a whole organism. Many organisms produce clones through asexual reproduction.

Question 12.
What is a niche? Give one example.
Answer:
A niche is the role and position a species plays in the environment, how the species meets its needs for food and shelter, how it survives and how it reproduces.
For example, a lion gathers its food, shelter or reproduces in a specific way which is quite different from that of a crocodile.

Question 13.
State any two climatic factors which can affect and change the niche of a species.
Answer:
Drastic change in temperature and differing water levels are two of the many climatic factors which can have an effect on niche.

Question 14.
How can we classify the types of reproduction based on the number of parent organism involved in it?
Answer:
Reproduction can be classified into two types as
(i) Asexual reproduction and
(ii) Sexual reproduction

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 15.
Mention any four types of asexual reproduction.
Answer:
(i) Fission
(ii) Budding
(iii) Regeneration
(iv) Vegetative propagation

Question 16.
Look at the diagrams provided here and identify the type of asexual reproduction show in them.
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce 18
(i) Fission,
(ii) Budding

Question 17.
State the types of fission. Explain them briefly and give one example of each.
Answer:
Types: Binary fission and multiple fission

(i) In binary fission, a cell splits into two halves to form two individual cells.
Example: Amoeba.

(ii) In multiple fission, the parent cell divides into multiple daughter cells simultaneously.
Example: Plasmodium.

Question 18.
Give examples of two organisms which are capable of regeneration.
Answer:
Planaria and hydra are capable of regeneration.

Question 19.
How does rhizopus reproduce? Is this method sexual/asexual?
Answer:
Rhizopus reproduces through spore formation. This method is asexual.

Question 20.
Give examples of animals that reproduce
(i) sexually and
(ii) asexually. (Give two examples of each).
Answer:
(i) Dogs and humans reproduce sexually.
(ii) Hydra and amoeba reproduce asexually.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 21.
Which method is used for growing sugarcane? Give two other examples of plants which can be grown through same method.
Answer:
Sugarcane Is grown through grafting which is a type of vegetative propagation. Roses and grapes can also be grown through grafting.

Question 22.
Choose the odd one out from the following. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Bryophyllum, Hibiscus, Spirogyra. Hydra, Planaria.
Odd one: Hibiscus Reason: Except hibiscus, all the organisms mentioned reproduce asexually.

Question 23.
Can a dog reproduce through regeneration? Justify your answer.
Answer:
A dog has a very complex multicellular body formation and hence each organ is formed with specialized cells which are meant for specific function. In this case, one type of cell cannot reproduce to form entire body of a dog. Hence ………………

Question 24.
Why do we notice minute variations among two organisms of the same population?
Answer:
The DNA copying mechanism although similar is not absolutely accurate. This results in minor variations in DNA copying. Hence, we notice
some dissimilarity between two organisms of same species,

Question 25.
How does a zygote get the energy to develop into tissue and eventually Into organs?
Answer:
The female gamete generally consists of food reserve which can be utilized as energy source when it forms zygote by combining with a male gamete.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 26.
Name the reproductive organs found in a flower. Also classify them as male and female.
Answer:
Stamen and carpel are reproductive organs found in a flower. Stamen is male whereas carpel is a female reproductive organ.

Question 27.
What is a unisexual flower?
Answer:
If the flower contains only one part out of stamen or pistil then such a flower is called unisexual flower.

Question 28.
What is a bisexual flower?
Answer:
If the flower contains both stamen as well as pistil, the flower is called bisexual flower.

Question 29.
Give two examples each of unisexual and bisexual flowering plants.
Answer:
Unisexual: Papaya arid watermelon Bisexual: Hibiscus and mustard

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 30.
Differentiate between pollen grain and ovule.
Answer:
Pollen grain, found in stamen consists of male germ-cells whereas ovule, found in the ovary of carpel consists of female germ-cells.

Question 31.
What are the constituents of carpel? Mention in the order of occurrence from bottom to top.
Answer:
Carpel Consists of

  • Ovary at the bottom,
  • Style in the middle and
  • Stigma at the top.

Question 32.
Which are the external agents responsible for cross-pollination of angIosperms?
Answer:
External agents such as wind, water and animals are responsible for cross-pollination.

Question 33.
What happens to the pollen grain after it lands on a stigma?
Answer:
Once a pollen grain lands on a stigma, a pollen tube grows out of the grain to reach the egg cells in ovary through the style.

Question 34.
Which are the three commonly used plant propagation techniques for growing garden plants?
Answer:
The three plant propagation techniques are:

  • Grafting,
  • Cutting and
  • Layering

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 35.
What is the difference between germination and fertilization?
Answer:
The process of sprouting of a seed into a seedling and eventually into a plant under suitable conditions is called germination. whereas fusion of male and female germ-cells is called fertilization.

Question 36.
Point out any two signs indicating onset of puberty in girls and boys.
Answer:
1. Frequently developing pimples on face
2. Thick hair starts growing in pubic region

Question 37.
Mention any two signs which indicate the onset of puberty In boys.
Answer:
1. Development of thick facial hair growth
2. Occasional enlargement of penis

Question 38.
Mention any two signs which indicate the onset of puberty In girls.
Answer:
1. Increase in the size of breasts
2. Beginning of menstruation at regular interval of time

Question 39.
Where does the formation of sperm cells take place in male reproductive system?
Answer:
The formation of sperm cells take place in testes.

Question 40.
Name the male and female sex cells produced In human body along with the organs that produce them.
Answer:
1. Testes produces sperms which are male sex cells
2. Ovary produces eggs which are female sex cells

Question 41.
Below mentioned are the parts of male reproductive system. Arrange them in the order from the point where sperm formation takes place to the point where semen is transmitted out of the reproductive system. Urethra, Testes, Seminal vesicle, Vas deference, Prostate gland.
Answer:
Testes, Vas deference, Seminal vesicle, Prostate gland, Urethra.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 42.
Name three major sex hormones which are responsible for reproduction in humans.
Answer:
Testosterone, estrogen and progesterone

Question 43.
What is the function of placenta?
Answer:
Function of placenta is to provide nutrition to the foetus through mother’s blood and to collect the waste generated by foetus and discard it through mother’s blood.

Question 44.
What is the frequency of menstrual cycle and how long does one cycle lasts?
Answer:
The frequency of menstrual cycle is approximately one month and it lasts for 2 to 8 days.

Question 45.
Name any two sexually transmitted bacterial Infections.
Answer:
Gonorrhea and syphilis are sexually transmitted disease caused by bacterial infections.

Question 46.
What is the full form of AIDS? Which organism is responsible for infecting this disease?
Answer:
AIDS stands for Acquired Immuno Deficiency Syndrome. This disease is caused by Human Immunodeficiency Virus.

Question 47.
Why is it recommended to use a condom while engaging in a sexual act?
Answer:
Using a condom can prevent transmission of sexually transmitted disease. Moreover, it can also prevent occurrence of unwanted pregnancy. Hence it is advisable to use a condom while engaging in a sexual act.

Question 48.
What do you mean by abortion?
Answer:
Abortion is a surgical method used to terminate an unwanted pregnancy wherein the embryo/foetus is surgical removed from the uterus.

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 49.
Mention any two surgical methods with small description adopted to permanently
prevent pregnancy.
Answer:
1. Vasectomy in which the vas deference in male is blocked for semen to ejaculate and
2. tubectomy in which the fallopian tube in female is blocked to prevent egg from reaching the uterus.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. The most fundamental activity that occurs in reproduction for maintaining the structure of the organism is ………………..
Answer:
DNA copying.

2. The white cotton-like mass that appears on the bread which is kept moist for few days is ………………..
Answer:
Mould (Fungus)

3. Which causes kala-azar reproduces through
Answer:
Leishmania, fission

4. Plasmodium and amoeba reproduce through fission. The only difference is, former reproduces through …………… fission whereas later reproduces through ……………. fission.
Answer:
multiple, binary

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

5. ……………. is the simplest method of asexual reproduction in unicellular organisms.
Answer:
Budding

6. Fission is …………….. of types.
Answer:
Two

7. An algae which reproduces by the asexual reproduction method called fragmentation is……………..
Answer:
Spirogyra

8. The cut part of plant stem (having roots is fixed to ground) which is used in the process of grafting is …………………
Answer:
Stock

9. Generally, in sexual reproduction …………….. gamete contains food stores whereas ………….. gamete possesses motility.
Answer:
female, male

10. ………………. is the future shoot where as ……………… is the future root of a germinated seed.
Answer:
Plumule, radicle

11. The ovary in a flower transforms to become a ………… after fertihzing.
Answer:
fruit

12. Anther and filament are the constituents of …………… in a flowering plant.
Answer:
stamen

13. Pollen grain landed on a stigma reaches the egg cell through ………………….
Answer:
pollen tube

14. A single cell produced after the fertilization of male and female gametes is called as …………………..
Answer:
zygote

15. After fertilization, zygote divides multiple times to form alan within an …………………..
Answer:
embryo, ovule

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

16. ………………….. hormone is responsible for regulating the formation of sperms.
Answer:
Testosterone

17. After the sperm fertilizes egg to form a zygote. it gets attached to the lining of with the help of a tissue known as …………………..
Answer:
uterus, placenta

18. Menstruation lasts for about …………….. days.
Answer:
2to8

19. …………… should be used during a sexual intercourse to avoid transmission of STDs and to avoid unwanted pregnancy.
Answer:
Condoms

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

20. In males, a small portion of ……………. is cut to prevent sperms from entering urethra.
Answer:
Vas deferens

True Or False:

1. Reproduction is as important life process as respiration and excretion for sustaining the life of an individual. — False
2. Although not identical, copied DNA should be similar to the parent cell in order to sustain body design in a species of a particular niche. — True
3. Due to minor variations in a niche gradual extinction of a species is observed. Hence. maintaining a niche is very important for survival of a species over time. — False
4. Copy error is a common event during cell division. — False
5. A single-cell parasite which is responsible for causing malaria reproduces through multiple fission. — True
6. Hydra can propagate and reproduce through regeneration as well as budding. — True
7. Plants are capable of propagating themselves from the parts like roots, stems and leaves due to which a new propagation is also possible for those plants which have lost the capacity to produce seeds. — True
8. Generally, male germ-cells are motile and relatively smaller whereas female germ-cells contain food reserves and hence are relatively larger. — True
HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?
9. Mustard and watermelon are the types of angiosperms which reproduce bisexually. — False
10. Carpel found as a reproductive organ of an angiosperm consists of yellowish coloured pollen grains. — False
11. The tough coat in which embryo is formed eventually gets converted into a seed. — True
12. As the human body is growing to its adulthood, sexual maturity also occurs simultaneously to its growth. — False
13. Male reproductive organ which produces sperm is present in scrotum inside the abdominal cavity. — False
14. The temperature in a small muscular sac consisting testes is relatively lower than that of abdominal cavity. This is ideal for the growth of male gametes. –True
15. Both the ovaries produce eggs every month in a female reproductive system. — False
16. The two female sex hormones are produced Inside the uterine cavity and released in the body. — False
17. The inner lining of vagina prepares itself every month to nourish an embryo attached in its walls. — False
18. Condoms are such type of contraceptive tools which are also capable of preventing transmission of sexually transmitted diseases — True
19. Copper-T is a type of contraceptive device placed in uterus to prevent pregnancy. However, using it may cause minor side-effects. — True
20. Prenatal sex determination is a criminal offence as per indian law. — True

Match the Following 

Question 1.

OrganismType of reproduction
1. Planaria
2. Bryophyllum
3. Rhizopus
4. Hydra
a. Spore formation
b. Fragmentation
c. Vegetative propagation
d. Budding
e. Fission
f. Regeneration

Answer: (1-f), (2-c), (3-a), (4-d)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 2.

Birth control methoExample
1. Barrier method
2. Surgical method
a. Vasectomy
b. Contraception
c. Condom

Answer: (1-c), (2-a)

Question 3.

Column IColumn II
1. Prostate gland
2. Cervix
3. Oviduct
4. Placenta
a. A special tissue that develops between embryo and the uterus wall
b. Fertilization takes place here
c. Mouth of uterus
d. Secretory gland in the passage of sperms

Answer: (1 – d), (2 – c), (3 – b), (4 – a)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce?

Question 4.

Column IColumn II
1. Approximate life of an unfertilized egg
2. Girls attain puberty
3. Menstruation in female
4. Development of embryo in uterus of female
a. At least 9 months
b. 10 to 12 years
c. 2 to 8 days
d. About 1 day

Answer: (1 – d), (2 – b), (3 – c), (4 – a)

HBSE 10th Class Science Important Questions Chapter 8 How do Organisms Reproduce? Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Short/Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Find the area of a quadrant of a circle whose circumference is 44 cm.
Solution :
Let the radius of a circle be r cm.
The circumference of a circle = 44 cm (given)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 1

Question 2.
The short hand and long hand of clock are 4 cm and 6 cm long respectively. Find the sum of distances travelled by their tips in 48 hours.
Solution :
The distance travelled by shorthand in 12 hours = 2πr
= 2 × π × 4
[∴ r = 4 cm]
The distance travelled by shorthand in 48 hours = 4 × 8x
= 32πcm
The distance travelled by long hand in 12 hours = 4 × 2лR
= 4 × 2π × 6
[∴ R = 6 cm]
Total distance travelled by their tips in 48 hours = 32π + 48л
= 80π cm.

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 3.
If the angle of a major sector of a circle is 250°. Then find the angle of minor sector.
Solution :
We have
Angle of major sector = 250°
∴ Angle of minor sector = 360° – 250° = 110°

Question 4.
If an arc of a circle subtends an angle of 60° at the centre and if the area of minor sector is 231 cm2, then find the radius of the circle.
Solution :
We have sector angle (θ) = 60°
Let radius of circle be r cm
Area of minor sector = 231 cm2
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 2
Hence, radius of the circle = 21 cm

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 5.
The perimeter of a sector of a circle of radius 5.2 cm is 16.4 cm. Find the area of the sector.
Solution :
We have
Radius of sector of a circle (r) = 5.2 em
Let sector angle be θ
Perimeter of a sector of a circle = 16.4 cm (given)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 3

Question 6.
Find the area of sector of a circle of radius 6 cm whose central angle is 30°. (take π = 3.14)
Solution :
We have
Radius of a circle (r) = 6 cm
Sector angle (θ) = 30°
Area of a sector = \(\frac{\pi^2 \theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
= \(\frac{3.14 \times 6^2 \times 30^{\circ}}{360^{\circ}}\)
= 3.14 × 3
= 9.42 cm2

Question 7.
In the given figure is a sector of circle of radius 10.5 cm. Find the perimeter of sector.
(Take π = 22/7)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 4
Solution :
We have
Radius of a sector of circle (r) = 10.5 cm
Sector angle (θ) = 60°
Perimeter of sector = \(\frac{2 \pi r \theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 22}{7} \times \frac{10.5 \times 60}{360^{\circ}}\)
= 22 × 0.5
= 11 cm2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 8.
In the given figure, AOB is a sector of angle 60° of a circle with centre O and radius 17 cm. If AP ⊥ OB and AP = 15 cm, find the area of shaded region.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 5
Solution :
We have
Radius of circle (r) = AO 17 cm
∠APO = 90° and AP = 15 cm,
sector angle (θ) = 60°
In right triangle AOP
⇒ AO2 = AP2 + OP2
172 = 152 + OP2
172 – 152 = OP2
(17 + 15) (17 – 15) = OP2
32 × 2 = OP2
OP = \(\sqrt{m}\) = 8 cm
Area of shaded region
= Area of sector AOBA – area of Δ AOP
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 6

Question 9.
In the given figure two arcs, A and B. Are A is part of the circle with centre O and radius OP. Arc B is part of the circle with centre M and radius PM, where M is the midpoint of PQ. Show that area enclosed by two arcs is equal to (\(\sqrt{3}\) – \(\frac {π}{6}\)) cm2
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 7
Solution :
We have
Radius of semicircle (PBQ)
R = 5 cm
Area of semicircle (A1) = \(\frac {1}{2}\)πR²
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × π × 52
= \(\frac {25π}{2}\) cm2
Let ∠MOQ = ∠MOP = Q1
In the right ΔOMQ, we have
sin θ1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{MQ}}{\mathrm{OQ}}=\frac{5}{10}=\frac{1}{2}\)
sin θ1 = sin 30°
θ1 = 30°
∠POQ = 2θ = 2 × 30° = 60°
Area enclosed by are A and chord PQ (A2)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 8
= 25(\(\sqrt{3}\) – \(\frac {π}{6}\))
So, required area = 25(\(\sqrt{3}\) – \(\frac {π}{6}\))
Hence Proved

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 10.
Find the area of shaded region in the givem figure, where arcs drawn with centres A, B, C, D intersect in pairs at midpoints P, Q, Rand S of the sides AB, BC, CD and DA respectively of square ABCD of side 12 cm.
[use π = 3.14]
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 9
Solution :
We have
side of a square = 12 cm
Area of a square (ABCD)= 12 × 12 = 144 cm2
Radius of each sector (r) = \(\frac {12}{2}\) = 6cm
Each sector angle (θ) = 90°
Area of each sector = \(\frac{\pi r^2 \theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
= \(\frac{3.14 \times 6^2 \times 90}{360^{\circ}}\)
= 3.14 × 9
= 28.26 cm2
Area of 4 sectors = 28.26 × 4
= 113.04 cm2
Area of shaded region
= Area of square – 4 sectors area
= 144 – 113.04
= 30.96 cm2
= 7 cm

Question 11.
In the adjoining figure ABCD is a trapezium with AB || DC and ∠BCD = 30°. In figure BGEC is a sector of a circle with centre C and AB = BC = 7 cm, DE = 4 cm and BF = 3.5 cm, find the area of the shaded region. [use x = \(\frac {22}{7}\)]
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 10
Solution :
We have
AB = 7 cm, DE = 4 cm and BF = 3.5 cm
DC= DE + EC = 4 + 7 = 11 cm
Area of trapezium ABCD
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)(AB + DC) × BF
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)(7 + 11) × 3.5
= 9 × 3.5
= 31.5 cm2
Area of sector BGEC = \(\frac {θ}{360°}\) πr²
= \(\frac {30°}{360°}\) × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 72
= \(\frac{22 \times 7}{12}\)
= 12.83 cm2
Area of shaded region = Area of trapezium – sector area
= 31.5 – 12.83
= 18.67 cm2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 12.
The side of a square is 10 cm, find the area between inscribed and circumscribed circle of the square.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 11
Solution:
Let ABCD be a square of side 10 cm
Radius of inscribed circle (r) = 5 cm
∴ Area of inscribed circle (A1) = πr²
= π × 52
= 25π cm2
In right ΔABC, we have
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
AC2 = 102 + 102
AC2 = 100 + 100
AC = 200
AC = \(\sqrt{2 \times 10 \times 10}\) = 10\(\sqrt{2}\) cm
Radius of circumscribed circle (R) = \(\frac{10 \sqrt{2}}{2}\)
= 5\(\sqrt{2}\)
Area of a circumscribed circle (A2) = πR²
= π × (5\(\sqrt{2}\))2
= 50π
Required area = A2 – A1
= 50π – 25π
= 25π cm2

Question 13.
In the give figure, the boundary of the shaded region consists of four semicircular ares, the smallest two being equal. If the diameter of the largest is 14 cm and of the smallest is 3.5 cm, find.
(i) length of the boundary
(ii) the area of the shaded region.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 12
Solution :
We have,
Diameter of the biggest circle = 14 cm
∴ radius of the biggest circle (r1) = \(\frac {14}{2}\) = 7 cm and diameter of the smallest circle = 3.5 cm
∴ radius of the two smallest circle (r2) = \(\frac {3.5}{2}\)
and radius of the circle (II) = r3 = \(\frac {7}{2}\) = 3.5 cm
(i) length of the boundary = πr1 + 2 × πr2 × πr3
= \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 7 + 2 × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × \(\frac {3.5}{2}\) + \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 3.5
= \(\frac {22}{7}\) [7 + 3.5 + 3.5]
= \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 14
= 44 cm

(ii) The area of the shaded region
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 13
Hence, (i) length of the boundary = 44 cm
(ii) Area of the shaded region = 86.625 cm2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 14.
In the given, the side of square is 28 cm, and radius of each circle is half of the length of the side of the square, where O and O’ are centers of the circle. Find the area of shaded area.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 14
Solution :
Side of the square = 28 cm (given)
∴ Area of sqaure = 28 × 28 = 784 cm2
∴ Radius of each circle is half of the length of the side of the square (given)
∴ Radius of each circle (r) = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 28 = 14cm
Area of two circles = 2πr²
= 2 × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 142
= 44 × 2 × 14
= 1232 cm2
Area of two quadrants = 2 × \(\frac{\pi r^2 \theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
= 2 × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × \(\frac{14^2 \times 90}{360}\)
= 44 × 7
= 308 cm2
Area of shaded region = Area of square + area of two circles – area of two quadrants
= 784 + 1232 – 308
= 1708 cm2

Question 15.
In the given figure, Δ ABC is right angles triangle in which ∠A = 90°. Semicircles are drawn on AB, AC and BC as diameters. Find the area of shaded region.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 15
Solution :
In Δ ABC, we have
∠A = 90°, AB = 3 cm, AC = 4 cm
BC2 = AB2 + AC2
[By Pythagoras theorem]
⇒ BC2 = 32 + 42
= 9 + 16 = 25
BC = 5 cm
Area of semicircle with radius \(\frac {3}{2}\) cm (A1)
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)π × (\(\frac {3}{2}\))2 = \(\frac {9}{8}\)π cm2
Area of semicircle with radius \(\frac {4}{2}\) cm (A2)
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)π × 22 = \(\frac {4π}{2}\)་cm2
Area of semicircle with radius \(\frac {5}{2}\) cm (A3)
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)π × (\(\frac {5}{2}\))2
= \(\frac {25}{8}\)π cm2
Area of right triangle ABC = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 3 × 4 = 6cm2
area of shaded region = A1 + A2 – (A3 – A4)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 16

Question 16.
Sides of a triangular field are 15 m, 16 m and 17. With the three corners of the field a cow, a uffalo and a horse are tied separately with ropes of length 7 m each to graze in the field. Find the area of the field which cannot be grazed by the three animals.
Solution :
We have,
Radius of each sector is = 7 m
Sides of triangle are 15 m, 16 m and 17 m respectively.
Let a cow, a buffalo and a horse are tied respectively with vertex A, B and C separately.
Let ∠A = x1°, ∠B = x2°, ∠C = x3°
The area of the field which can graze by three animals Sum of the areas of three sectors with sector angles x1°, x2°, x3° and radius 7m.
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 17
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 18

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 17.
In the adjoining figure, O is the centre and BOC is the diameter of the circle. Find the area of the shaded region. (use π = 3.14)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 19
Solution :
We have,
AB = 6 cm, AC = 8 cm and BOC is the diameter of the circle.
In right ΔBAC,
BC2 = AB2 + AC2
[By Pythagoras theorem]
BC2 = 62 + 82
BC2 = 36 + 64
BC2 = 100
BC = \(\sqrt{100}\) = 10 cm.
Radius of the circle = \(\frac {10}{2}\) = 5 cm.
Therefore,
OP = OQ = 5 cm
(equal radii of the circle)
Shaded region area = Semi-circle area drawn as BC diameter – ΔABC area + segment PRQ area
= \(\frac {1}{2}\)π × (5)2 – \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 × 8 + area of quadrant POQ – area of ΔPOQ
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 3.14 × 25 – 24 + \(\frac {1}{4}\)π × (5)2 – \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 5 × 5
= 39.25 – 24 + \(\frac {1}{4}\) × 3.14 × 25 – 12.5
= 15.25+ 19.625 – 12.5
= 34.875 – 12.5
= 22.375 = 22.38 cm2. (approx)
Hence, area of shaded region = 22.38 cm2.
(approx)

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
The region between an are and the ……….. joining the centre to the end points of the arc is called a sector of the circle.
Solution :
Two raddi

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 2.
A ……….. of a circle is a line segment joining any two points on the circle.
Solution :
chord

Question 3.
The length of the complete circle is called its……….
Solution :
circum- ference

Question 4.
The region between a chord and either of its …………. is called a segment of the circle.
Solution :
src

Question 5.
The cicles which have same centre and different …………. are called concentric circle.
Solution :
raddi

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 6.
If the perimeter of a circle is equal to that of a square, then the ratio of their areas is ……..
Solution :
14 : 11

Multiple Choice Questions

Choose the correct answer for each of the following :

Question 1.
The circumferences of two circles are in the ratio 3 : 4. The ratio between their areas is:
(a) 9 : 4
(b) 16 : 9
(c) 3 : 4
(d) 9 : 16
Solution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 20

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 2.
The areas of two circles are in the ratio 16 : 25. The ratio of their circumference is:
(a) 4 : 5
(b) 5 : 4
(c) 16 : 25
(d) 25 : 16
Solution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 21

Question 3.
The area of a circle is 13.86 cm2, the circumference of the circle is :
(a) 13.6 cm
(b) 13.2 cm
(c) 6.6 cm
(d) 13.4 cm
Solution :
(b) 13.2 cm

Given, area of circle 13.86 cm2
⇒ πr² = 13.86
3.14 r² = 13.86
r² = \(\frac {13.86}{3.14}\)
r = 2.1 cm
∴ circumference = 2πr
= 2 × \(\frac {22}{7}\) × 2.1
= 13.2 cm
So correct choice is (b).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 4.
Area of the largest triangle that can be inscribed in a semicircle of radius r units is :
(a) r2 sq. units
(b) \(\frac {1}{2}\)r2 sq. units
(c) 2r2 sq. units
(d) \(\sqrt{2}\)r2 sq. units
Solution :
(a) r2 sq. units

Area of triangle = \(\frac {1}{2}\)base × height
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 22
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 2r × r
= r2 sq. units.
Hence correct choice is (a).

Question 5.
The area of sector of central angle of a circle with radius 4r is:
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 23
Solution :
Area of sector = \(\frac{\pi r^2 \theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
= \(\frac{\pi(4 r)^2 x}{360}\)
= \(\frac{2 \pi \cdot x r^2}{45^{\circ}}\)
Hence, correct choice is (b).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 6.
If the sum of the circumference of two circles with radii R1 and R2 is equal to the circumference of a circle of radius R, then :
(a) R1 + R2 = R
(b) R1 + R2 > R
(c) R1 + R2 < R
(d) Nothing definite can be said about the relation among R1, R1 and R.
Solution :
(a) R1 + R2 = R

2πR = 2πR1 + 2πR2
2πR = 2 × (R1 + R2)
R = R1 + R2
Hence correct choice is (a).

Question 7.
If the perimeter of circle is equal to that of a square, then ratio of their area is
(a) 22 : 7
(b) 14 : 11
(c) 7 : 22
(d) 11 : 14
Solution :
(b) 14 : 11

Perimeter of circle = 2πr
Perimeter of square = 4a
A.T.Q. 2π = 4a
side of square a = \(\frac {πr}{2}\)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 24
So required ratio = 14: 11
So correct choice is (b).

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles

Question 8.
If the circumference of a circle and the perimeter of a square are equal, then :
(a) Area of circle = Area of the square
(b) Area of circle > Area of the square
(c) Area of circle < Area of the square
(d) Nothing definite can be said about the relation between the areas of the circle and square
Solution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 25
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles - 26

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 12 Areas related to Circles Read More »

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Haryana State Board HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry Important Questions and Answers.

Haryana Board 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Short/Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
If tan2A = cot (A – 24°). Find A.
Solution :
We have,
tan 2A = coat (A – 24°)
tan 2A = tan (90° – (A – 24))
[∴ tan (90 – θ) = cotθ]
⇒ 2A = 90° – (A – 24°)
⇒ 2A = 90° – A + 24°
⇒ 2A + A = 114°
⇒ 3A = 114°
⇒ A = \(\frac {114}{3}\) = 38°

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 2.
If cos3A = sin (A – 34°), where A is an acute angle, find the value of A.
Solution :
We have,
cos 3A = sin (A – 34°)
⇒ sin (90° – 3A) = sin (A – 34°)
[∴ sin (90 – θ) = cos θ]
⇒ 90° – 3A = A – 34°
⇒ 90° + 34° = A + 3A
⇒ 124° = 4A
⇒ A = \(\frac {124°}{4°}\)
⇒ A = 31° Hence proved

Question 3.
The value of (tan 1° tan 2° …. tan 89°) is equal to ?
Solution :
We have, tan 1° tan 2° tan 3° ….. tan 43° tan 44° tan 45° tan 46° tan 47° ….. tan 87° tan 88° tan 89° = tan 1° tan 2° tan 3° ….. tan 43° tan 44°
1. tan (90° – 44°) tan (90° – 43°) ….. tan (43° – 3°). tan (90° – 2°). tan (90° – 1°).
= tan 1° tan 2° tan 3° ….. tan 43° tan 44° : 1. cot 44° cot 43°….. cot 3° cot 2° cot 1
= tan 1° × \(\frac {1}{tan 1°}\) . tan 2° × \(\frac {1}{tan 2°}\) . tan 3° × \(\frac {1}{tan 3°}\) ……… tan 43° × \(\frac {1}{tan 43°}\) . tan 44° × \(\frac {1}{tan 44°}\) . 1
= 1 × 1 × 1 × 1 × 1 × 1 = 1

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 4.
The value of (sin2θ + \(\frac{1}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\)) = _____
Solution :
We have,
sin2θ + \(\frac{1}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\) = sin2θ + \(\frac{1}{\sec ^2 \theta}\)
[∴ 1 + tan2θ = sec2θ)
= sin2θ + cos2θ
= 1 Hence proved

Question 5.
(1 + tan2θ) (1 – sinθ) (1 + sinθ)
Solution :
(1 + tan2θ) (1 – sinθ) (1 + sinθ)
= sec2θ (1 – sin2θ)
= sec2θ × cos2θ
= \(\frac{1}{\cos ^2 \theta}\) × cos2θ
= 1 Hence proved

Question 6.
Prove that : \(\frac{\tan A-\sin A}{\tan A+\tan A}=\frac{\sec A-1}{\sec A+1}\)
Solution :
We have,
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 1
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 2

Question 7.
Prove the following identify, where the angles involved are acute angles for which the expression is defined.
\(\frac{1+\cot ^2 \mathrm{~A}}{1+\tan ^2 \mathrm{~A}}\) = (\(\frac{1-\cot A}{1-\tan A}\))2
Solution :
We have,
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 3

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 8.
Prove that
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 12
Solution :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 4

Question 9.
Prove that :
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 13
Solution :
We have
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 14
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 5

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 10.
Prove that:
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 15
Solution :
We have,
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 6
= R.H.S
L.H.S. = R.H.S. Hence proved

Question 11.
Prove that:
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 16
Solution :
We have,
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 7

Question 12.
If sin θ + cos θ = \(\sqrt{3}\), then prove that tan θ + cot θ = 1
Solution :
We have,
sin θ + cos θ = \(\sqrt{3}\)
⇒ (sin θ + cos θ)2 = \(\sqrt{3}\)2
⇒ sin2θ + cos2θ + 2sin θ cos θ = 3
⇒ 1 + 2 sinθ cosθ = 3
⇒ sinθ cosθ = \(\frac {2}{2}\) = 1 ………..(1)
Now L.H.S. = tanθ + cotθ
= \(\frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}+\frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}\)
= \(\frac{\sin ^2 \theta+\cos ^2 \theta}{\sin \theta \cos \theta}\)
= \(\frac {1}{1}\)[using equ. (1)]
= 1 = R.H.S.
L.H.S. = R.H.S. Hence proved

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 13.
If sin A + sinA2 = 1, then find the value of the expression cos2A + cost4A.
Solution :
We have, sin A + sin2A = 1
⇒ sin A = 1 – sin2A
⇒ sin A = cos2A
squaring both sides, we get
sin2A = cos4A
⇒ 1 – cos2A = cos4A
⇒ 1 = cos2A + cos4A
⇒ cos2A + cos4A = 1.
Hence proved

Fill in the Blanks

Question 1.
____ is the study of relationship between the sides and angles of a triangle.
Solution :
Trigonometry

Question 2.
An equation involving trignometric ratios of an angle is called a trignometeric.
Solution :
identity

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 3.
The word is derived from the Greek words tri (means three), gon (means sides), metron (means measure).
Solution :
Trigonometry

Question 4.
In a right triangle, aide opposite to right angle is known as _______ .
Solution :
hypotenuse

Question 5.
cot θ is the abbrevation used for ________ of angle θ.
Solution :
cotangent

Question 6.
The ratio of the sides of a triangle with respect to its acute angle are called trigonometric ____ of the angle.
Solution :
ratios

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 7.
If ΔABC is right, right angled at C, then value of cos (A + B) is ______.
Solution :
0 (zero).

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
If cos A = \(\frac {12}{13}\), then cot A is :
(a) \(\frac {12}{5}\)
(b) \(\frac {13}{12}\)
(c) \(\frac {13}{5}\)
(d) \(\frac {5}{12}\)
Solution :
(a) \(\frac {12}{5}\)

Let us draw the triangle ABC in which ∠B = 90°
Then cos A = \(\frac{\mathrm{AB}}{\mathrm{AC}}=\frac{12}{13}\)
Let AB = 12k and AC = 13k
where k is a positive integer
By using Pythagoars Theorem, we have
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
(13k)2 = (12k)2 + BC2
BC2 = (13k)2 – (12k)2
BC2 = 169k2 – 144k2
BC2 = 25k2
\(\sqrt{\mathrm{BC}^2}\) = 5k
cot A = \(\frac{\mathrm{AB}}{\mathrm{BC}}=\frac{12 k}{5 k}=\frac{12}{5}\)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 8

Question 2.
The rod AC of TV disc antena is fixed at right angles to wall AB and a rod CD is supporting the disc as shown in given figure. If AC = 1.5 cm long and CD = 3m, then sec θ + cosec θ is :
(a) \(\frac {41}{12}\)
(b) \(\frac {41}{13}\)
(c) \(\frac {26}{12}\)
(d) \(\frac {15}{41}\)
Solution :
(b) \(\frac {41}{13}\)

The rod AC of TV disc antena is fixed at right angles to wall AB and rod CD is supporting the disc as shown. In right triangle ACD, we have
CD2 = AD2 + AC2
[By Phythogoras Theorem]
⇒ 32 = AD2 + 1.52
⇒ 32 – (1.5)2 = AD2
⇒ AD2 = 9 – 2.25
⇒ AD2 = 6.75
⇒ AD = \(\sqrt{6.75}\)
⇒ AD = 2.6 om (approx)
⇒ sec θ + cosec θ = \(\frac{C D}{A D}+\frac{C D}{A C}\)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 9

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 3.
If 4 tan θ = 3, then [latex]\frac{4 \sin \theta-\cos \theta+1}{4 \sin \theta+\cos \theta+1}[/latex] is :
(a) \(\frac {13}{5}\)
(b) \(\frac {5}{21}\)
(c) \(\frac {13}{21}\)
(d) \(\frac {12}{13}\)
Solution :
(c) \(\frac {13}{21}\)

We have, 4 tan θ = 3
⇒ tan θ = \(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{\mathrm{BC}}{\mathrm{AB}}\)
consider a triangle ABC in which ∠B = 90°
Let BC be 3k and AB be 4k wherek is positive integer.
In right triangle ABC, we have
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
= (4k)2 + (BC)2
= 16k2 + 9k2
= 25k2
AC = \(\sqrt{25 k^2}\)
= 5k
sin θ = \(\frac{3 k}{5 k}=\frac{3}{5}\)
and cos θ = \(\frac{4 k}{5 k}=\frac{4}{5}\)
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 10

Question 4.
If sin (A + 2B) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) and cos (A + 4B) = 0, A > B and A + 4B ≤ 90°, then A and B is :
(a) 30°, 45°
(b) 15°, 45°
(c) 60°, 15°
(d) 30°, 45°
Solution :
(d) 30°, 45°

We have,
sin (A + 2B) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
⇒ sin (A + 2B) = sin 60°
⇒ A + 2B = 60° ………(1)
And cos (A + 4B) = 0
⇒ Cos (A + 4B) = cos 90°
⇒ A + 4B = 90° ……(2)
Subtracting equation (2), from (1), we get
HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry - 11
⇒ B = \(\frac{\sqrt{-30}}{-2}\) = 15°
Substituting the value of B in equ. (1), we get
A + 2 × 15 = 60°
⇒ A + 30° = 60°
⇒ A = 60 – 30 = 30°
Hence, A = 30° and B = 15°

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 5.
The value of sin 23° cos 67° + cos 23° sin 67° is:
Solution :
We have, sin 23° cos 67° + cos 23° sin 67°
= sin 23° cos (90° – 23°) + cos23° sin (90° – 23°)
= sin 23° sin 23° + cos 23° cos 23°
= sin2 23° + cos223°
= 1 [sin2θ + cos2θ = 1]

Question 6.
The value of sin 32° cos 58° + cos 32° sin 58° is:
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Solution :
(b) 1

We have sin 32° cos 58° + cos 32° sin 58°
= sin 32° cos (90° – 32°) + cos 32° sin (98° – 32°)
= sin 32° sin 32° + cos 32° cos 32°
= sin232° + cos2 32°
= 1 [∴ sin2θ + cos2θ = 1]

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry

Question 7.
\(\frac{\cos 80^{\circ}}{\sin 10^{\circ}}\) + cos 59° cosec 31° = :
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Solution :
(c) 2

We have, \(\frac{\cos 80^{\circ}}{\sin 10^{\circ}}\) + cos 59° cosec 31°
= \(\frac{\cos \left(90^{\circ}-10^{\circ}\right)}{\sin 10^{\circ}}\) + cos 59° cosec (90° – 5°)
= \(\frac{\sin 10^{\circ}}{\sin 10^{\circ}}\) + cos 59° sec 59°
= \(\frac{\sin 10^{\circ}}{\sin 10^{\circ}}+\frac{\cos 59^{\circ}}{\cos 59^{\circ}}\)
= 1 + 1 = 2

HBSE 10th Class Maths Important Questions Chapter 8 Introduction to Trigonometry Read More »